KBC2009 Part 1 English Version

Ministry of Land, Transport and Maritime Affairs Notification No.
2009-1245
The Ministry notifies the amended “Korea Building Code-Structural” as follows.
Korean Building Structures Code
Chapter 1 General Rules
0101 General Information
0101.1 Purpose
This Building Code-Structure (“This Code") are aimed to set up technical requirements such as design,
inspection and testing, design loads, design methods for materials, material strengths, fabrication and
installation, quality control for buildings structures under the approvals of the Minister of Land,
Transport and Maritime Affairs in accordance with the building codes to achieve safety, usability and
durability of such building structures.
0101.2 Content
This section specifies the scope of this code, its constitution, and definition of terms, classification of
importance of structures, design of structures, inspections and testing, performance verification of
structural materials, structure safety validation and requirements for principal structural engineers.
0101.3 Scope
Structures and attached structures built, repaired or maintained under the building construction
ordinance law, and construction of temporary structures shall be conformed to this Code.
0101.4 Constitution of the Code
This Code consists of 8 chapters as follows:
Chapter 1 General Rules
Chapter 2 Structural Inspection and Testing
Chapter 3 Design Loads
Chapter 4 Basic Structures
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
Chapter 6 Masonry Structures
Chapter 7 Steel Structures
Chapter 8 Wooden Structures
0101.5 Relevant Structural Criteria and Specification

The following codes will be used as part of this code if required. However, loads and
loading factors shall comply with this code.
(1) Building Code for Precast Concrete Structures / Architecture Institute of Korea /
1992.
(2) Building Code for Lightweight Concrete Structures / Architecture Institute of Korea
/ 1997.
(3) Building Code for Lightweight Concrete Blocks / Architecture Institute of Korea /
1997.
(4) Building Code for Steel Structures – Load Resistance Factor Design / Korean
Society of Steel Construction / 2009
(5) Building Code for Steel-Tube Structures / Architecture Institute of Korea / 1998.
(6) Building Code for Cold-Formed Steel Structures / Architecture Institute of Korea /
1999.
(7) Calculation Standard for Steel Framed Reinforced Concrete Composite Structures /
Architecture Institute of Korea/2000.
(8) Nondestructive Inspection Standards for Welded Steel / Architecture Institute of
Korea / 1999.
(9) Guide for design and construction of Concrete-Filled Steel Tube Structures / Korean
Society of Steel Construction / 2003.
(10) Manual for design and construction of Concrete-Filled Steel Tube Structures /
Architecture Institute of Korea / 2004.
(11) Building Code for Concrete Structures / Architecture Institute of Korea / 2007.
(12) Korean Architectural Standard Specification / Ministry of Land, Transport and
Maritime and Architecture Institute of Korea / 2006.
0101.6 Time Limit of Review

Under “Regulations for Issuance and Administration of Directives and Established
Rules” (Presidential Directive 248), the valid time limit for annulment or amendment of
this Code will be December 23, 2012 considering laws after the notification of this
Code and changed conditions.
0102 Definition of Terms
The terms used in this chapter are defined as follows:
Temporary Structures: Facilities or structures that are installed temporarily for
construction of buildings and work pieces, including temporary buildings such as
temporary performing venues, temporary exhibitions venues and model houses.
Strength Reduction Factor: Difference between the nominal strength and the actual
strength of materials, difference between members in the drawing for fabrication or
construction and completed members, and safety factors for considering ambiguity
related to the tolerance estimation and its interpretation.
Strength Design Method: A design method of structural members by which the value of
strength for design (design stress) is higher than the member force (required strength)
(applied to concrete and masonry structures). Design stress is calculated by multiplying
nominal strength of member section calculated by considering inelastic behavior of
materials which consists of structural members by strength reduction factor.
Building: Structures fixed on the land with roofs and columns or walls, and their
dependant facilities, offices installed in basement or on an overpass, performing venues,
stores, garages, warehouses and any other facilities according to the building code.
Factored Load: When designing by strength design method or limit state design method,
the load calculated by multiplying applied load by a load factor.
Schematic Design: Analysis of frame structures in a series of works during the
preliminary design process prior to the basic design phase including determining
structural code for structures, the strength of used materials and design load and selecting
type of construction to produce a structural concept and a structural plan, which show
sizes, sections and locations of
major structural members: A step of the structural design. This is related to calculate the
member forces which occur in each component of the structure, value of displacements,
and reaction values in bearings using structural engineering theories when the relevant
structure reacts to the exterior forces such as loads.
Structures: Objects that are artificially fixed on the ground except buildings including,
but not limited to, stair towers, traffic control facilities, billboards, advertising towers,
overhead water tanks, smokestacks, machinery foundations, monuments, mechanical
parking, oil tanks, cooling towers, pipe supports, boiler structures, silos and bunkers,
transmission supports, elevator towers, outdoor advertisements, retaining walls,
rainwater storage tanks, over bridges, decorative towers, water tanks, train supports,
sculptures and monuments, underground shelters, pylons, air traffic control towers,
navigation safety facilities and other structures.
Nominal Strength: Resistance to the loads of structures or structural members. The value
is calculated by using a formula induced from applicably structural mechanics theories or
results of filed experiments or experiments with scaled models (taking into consideration
the differences between experiments and actual conditions, and the effect of modeling),
the specified material strength and the size of members.
Structure Supervision: Construction services for struts structures.
Construction Review: Determine whether a structure ensure its structural safety based on
experience and technical knowledge of the principal structural engineer (including
review of structural safety regarding structural drawing documents, shop drawing
documents, extension, zoning, as-built status and maintenance).
Calculation of Structure: Calculate structural mechanics to ensure the safety of each
structural member against each design load that affects a structure.
Structural Plan: A series of initial processes to select a structural type in a three-
dimensional space of a structure to ensure the safety under variety of exterior forces,
loads and soil conditions , and to determine materials, forms and approximate sizes
considering economic feasibility to create a structurally stable space.
Structure: Parts of frames of a building and a construction (term used to refer to
buildings and constructions in terms of structural engineering)
Structural Members: Components of a structure such as columns, foundations, beams,
bracings, slabs and walls.
Structural Design: A series of creative procedures to ensure the structural safety by frame
analysis and structural calculation based on structural engineering for a three-
dimensional structure formed by the structural plan in accordance with this Code and to
present them in a document for construction.
Structural Drawing Documents: Required documents for construction of structures of
buildings or constructions, including structural drawing plan, structural drawings and
specifications for construction.
Structural Drawing Plan: The final result of a structure design which presents the
composition of a structure, type of members and connection details and soon.
Structural Plan: Outcome of a pre-mapping phase by evaluation and adjustment of the
results of a structure plan, frame analysis and member design with experience and
technical knowledge of the principal structural engineer in order for the structure to be
economic and well constructible (including structure design overview, structural
specification for special properties, structure design summary and structural calculation
and so on).
Structural Safety: Sufficient resistance of a building or a structure against exterior forces
or surrounding conditions in the short-term or long-term period.
Strut: Frames of a structure that safely support relevant building or construction against
various loads applying on buildings or constructions, generally referring to the
fundamental frame except for attached struts.
Specifications for Construction: Specifications of construction work for a structure
Basic Design: A series of work undertaken in the structural design process between the
schematic design and the shop drawing such as fine structural analysis including
seismic safety assessment through static and dynamic analysis based on the schematic
design, usability evaluation of main parts, and creating structural calculation for basic
design, structural floor plans for each floor, rebar arrangement drawings for slabs,
beams, columns and walls, detailed rebar arrangement drawings for main members and
the foundation drawing for starting work.
Durability: Functions of a structure in order to maintain a certain level of safety of a
building or a construction to be used according to the original design conditions without
deterioration and deformation, which are resistant to physical, chemical or mechanical
actions over the long-term period.
Retrofitting: An action of general repair or partial extension to control deterioration or
improve functions of a building.
Placing Drawings: A drawing which presents locations and intervals in detail for rebar
arrangement work to be done according to the structural drawing plan.
Value Engineering: Organizational activities of improvement by analyzing various
functions to create maximum values with minimum costs during a series of procedures
such as planning, designing, construction, maintenance and deconstruction of a building
construction (also referred as construction value engineering or V.E.)
Attached Strut: Structural members that are attached to struts of a building or a
construction and considered by only their loads in frame analysis at structural design
phase and constructed by determining details at construction phase.
Member Force: Axial force paralleled force occurred in the imagined cutting section of
a structural member by loads and exterior forces – bending moment, shear force,
torsion, and so on.
Nonlinear Analysis: An analysis to calculate the closest member forces and
displacements to the actual behaviors when a large scaled deformation is expected in an
actual structure or when strain changes largely or the stress-strain relation of used
materials is nonlinear.
Usability: Functions of a structure which prevent the damage of finished materials,
maintain the original forms of a building or a construction and satisfy maintenance,
amenities of residents and functions of machines in use by resisting excessive
deflections, unpleasant vibrations, long-term deformation and cracks.
Working Load: Various loads such as dead load and live load defined in this Code. Also
to be referred as load without multiplied by load factor (applied loads).
Design Load: A load applied during structural design (factor load is applied for strength
design method or limit state design method while working load is applied for other
design methods).
Shop Drawing: A drawing created by a constructor with detailed specifications of each
structural member including scale in order to be able to construct according to the
structure drawing.
Construction Drawings: A series of activities during the final design procedure to create
final drawings for construction, final structural calculation and specific specification of
construction work after making up for the problems of basic design and modifying basic
drawings under agreement by the client, design company and contractor based on the
basic design.
Safety: The ability to resist the maximum load during the expected life span of a building
or a construction. Function of a building to resist rotation, sliding and subsidence, etc.
without causing phenomena such as yielding, buckling, fatigue and brittle fracture of any
member.
Offset: A certain distance from a base line.
Working Point: Reference point of production and installation work.
Stress: A unit of force per unit area which occurred in a structural member caused by
load and exterior force.
Toughness: Shock resistant property using high intensity and strong strain (if a lot of
energy is consumed when a force is given to material which is consequently gone
through from elastic deformation and plastic deformation to ultimate destruction, it is
said that toughness is high.)
Detailed Safety Diagnosis: An action to detect physical and functional defects of a
facility and suggest repair and retrofit methods in order to take immediate and proper
actions by investigating structural safety and causes of defects of the facility.
Production Installation Drawings: A detailed drawing created by a constructor (or
producer or installer) displaying scales of each structural member to ensure actual
production and installation according to the structural drawings.
Created Works: Components or assemblies consisting of materials processed by cutting,
drilling, welding, connecting, joining, cold rolling and calibrating before installing them
to buildings or constructions.
Principal Structural Engineer: An expert with professional knowledge, sufficient
experience and information in building structure who is responsible for and capable of
structure related works such as structural drawing, structural review, structural
supervision and safety diagnosis, etc. under this Code.
Lifting Up: Lifting up of the central part in advance or the lifted distance considering
expected deflection when load is given on horizontal members such as beam or truss.
Elastic Analysis: An analysis to calculate member forces and displacements of a
structural member assuming that the structure is elastic and stress-strain is a primary
function relation.
Load Factor: A safety factor to consider changes of analytical ambiguity and
environmental actions that convert inevitable difference and load between nominal value
of a load and actual load into external loading force.
Limit State Design Method: A design method to establish things that do not reach a limit
state in accordance with load and tolerance evaluation by clearly defining the limit state
using statistical probability factor.
Tolerable (Allowable) Strength Design Method: A design method to make a structural
member have tolerable strength that exceeds required strength under load combinations
of the tolerable load act.
Tolerable (Allowable) Stress Design Method: A method to design a structural member
where stress of the member's section calculated by structural analysis according to the
elastic theory does not exceed the tolerable stress (limit stress considering safety ratio).
0103 Classification of importance of buildings

The importance of a building is classified according to its use and scale as follows:
importance (special), importance (1), importance (2) and importance (3). The
importance of a retrofitted building may be lowered considering its remaining service
life.
0103.1 Importance (special)

(1) Hazardous material storage and processing facilities with gross floor area > 1,000m²
(2) National or local government offices, foreign embassies, fire stations, power stations,
broadcasting stations and telecommunication offices with gross floor acres > 1,000m²
(3) General hospitals and clinics with operating facilities or emergency facilities
0103.2 Importance (1)

(1) Hazardous material storage and processing facilities with gross floor area < 1,000m²
(2) National or local government offices, foreign embassies, fire stations, power stations,
broadcasting stations and telecommunication offices with gross floor acres < 1,000m²
(3) Performing venues, exhibition halls, sports facilities, commercial facilities,
transportation facilities
(Except for freight terminals and shipping facilities) gross floor area > 1,000m²
(4) Childcare related facilities, senior welfare facilities, social welfare facilities and labor
welfare facilities
(5) Accommodation facilities, officetels, dormitories and apartment buildings with more
than 5 stories
(6) Schools
(7) Clinics without operating and emergency facilities and other medical facilities with
gross floor acres > 1,000m2 that are not classified as importance (special).

(1) Building that do not come under importance 9specail, (1) and (3)

(1) Agricultural facilities, small-sized warehouses
(2) Temporary structures
0104 Structural Design
0104.1 Principles of Structural Design
0104.1.1 Safety
Structure of buildings and constructions shall be structurally safe in compliance with
Chapter 4 to 8 of this Code for various loads defined in Chapter 3 Design Loads of this
Code.
0104.1.2 Usability:
Sufficient stiffness and toughness shall be considered for the structure of a building and a
construction not to have any deformation or vibration which cause inconvenience in use.
0104.1.3 Durability:
For structural members that are likely to be damaged by corrosion or abrasion, take
necessary actions to prevent this in parent materials or finishing materials including use
of preventive materials.
0104.2 Structure Design Method
0104.2.1 Types of Structure Design Methods

Structural members shall be designed by tolerable allowable stress design method,
tolerable allowable strength design method, strength design method or limit state design
method, or other structural design methods of which functions are acknowledged to be
able to have equivalent or higher features by Minister of Land, Transport and Maritime
Affairs.
0104.2.2 Tolerable Stress Design Method or Tolerable Strength Design Method

When designing a structural member according to tolerable stress design method or
tolerable strength design method, it shall be based on the following methods:
(1) Design load for a structural member shall be the most unfavorable value among
member force combinations calculated by load and exterior forces according to the
provision of Chapter 3 (Design Loads) of this Code.
(2) For tolerable stress design method, the long-term and short-tem stress by design
loads of a structural member shall be below the tolerable stress defined in Chapter 6
(Masonry Structure) and Chapter 8 (Wooden Structure).
(3) For tolerable strength design method, the long-term and short-tem stress by design
load of a structural member shall be below the tolerable strength.
0104.2.3 Strength Design Method or Limit State Design Method
When designing a structural member according to the strength design method or the
limit state design method, it shall be based on the following methods:
(1) Design loads for a structural member shall be the most unfavorable value among
member force combinations calculated by the load factor multiplied by loads and
exterior forces according to the provision of Chapter 3 (Design Loads) of this Code.
(2) Member force for design based on the factor load of a structural member shall not
exceed the strength for design calculated by the nominal strength of the member section
multiplying by the strength reduction factor.
(3) Structural design requirements that are used in the strength design method or the
limit state design method, such as load factor, strength reduction factor and load
combinations, shall be conformed with Chapter 5 (Concrete Structure)，Chapter 6
(Masonry Structure) and Chapter 7 (Steel Structure) respectively.
0104.3 Structural Design Phases
0104.3.1 Structural Planning

(1) A structural plan of a building and a construction considers the use of the building or
the construction, used materials and their strength, soil property, load conditions,
structure type, possible extension in the future, potential zoning or remodelling
retrofitting.
(2) Columns and beams should be arranged to be harmonized with the building floor
plan. When determining beam spans, not only column spacing but also floor height and
facilities planning shall be considered.
(3) For structural elements resisting to horizontal loads such as earthquake or wind, not
only flat balance but also elevational balance equilibrium shall be considered.
(4) For mixed use of structural types or materials, continuity of stiffness or tolerance
should be checked while vibrations and deformations that affect on usability should be
reviewed in advance.
0104.3.2 Frame Analysis and Member Design

(1) Frame analysis shall be performed based on elastic analysis, but nonlinear analysis
may be also performed if required to calculate a member force which is close to behavior
of the actual structure behavior.
(2) Member design shall be based on 0104.2 (Structure Design Method).
0104.3.3 Creating Structural Drawing Documents

Structural drawing documents must at least contain the followings. However, if the
principal structural engineer who has performed 0104.3.2 (Frame Analysis and Member
Design) carries out 0104.3.3 (Creating Structural Drawing Documents), creating
structural drawing documents according to this paragraph may be skipped.
(1) Structural Design Overview
Describing requirements that were reviewed and considered in 0104.3.1 (Structural
Planning) including descriptions of structural types, used materials and their strengths,
load conditions, and so on.
(2) Specific Factors of Structure
Describe important factors that are necessary for structure safety and should be reflected
in construction specifications of the structure.
(3) Structural Design Summary
Sketching structural floor, member section and junction types in order to be an economic
and high quality construction by evaluation and adjustment of the results of structural
calculation with experience and technical knowledge of the principal structural engineer
and display details of safety that are verified by structural experiment or experience but
not estimated by structural calculation, and structural details defined in this Code.
(4) Structural Calculation
Recording calculation results from frame analysis and design method for each material
provided in this Code.
0104.3.4 Creating Structural Drawings

(1) Structural drawing shall be created in order to meet the requirements of structural
design by displaying detailed member sections and connections calculated by structural
floor plan and structural calculation, and details of structural safety that are verified by
structural details in this Code and structural experiment or experience but not included in
structural calculation.
(2) Structural drawing may be created in three different phases according to the design
progress: schematic design, basic design and construction design.
(3) The structural drawing must include:
Structural design standards,
Main design loads including live loads,
Structural material strengths,
Size and location of structural members,
Dimension and installed location of rebars and anchors,
Anchorage length of rebars, and location and length of connections,
Required strength of junctions for junction design such as shear strength, moment
and axial force, if required for steel materials fabrication and settling erecting drawing,
Column center line and offset, and working point,
Connection types,
Location, direction and scale of lifting-up, if necessary,
Detailed standards for attached structures, if required for shop drawing,
Other details and materials required for drawing construction structure,
Principal structural engineer, his/her qualified licenses, company name and contact
information, and
Date of structural design
0104.3.5 Creating Specifications of a Construction Structure
(1) Specifications of a construction structure shall be created according to Korean
Architectural Standard Specification established by Ministry of Land, Transport and
Maritime Affairs, and include relative parts of the applicable chapters of this Code as
well as describe specific facts about frame work that cannot be displayed on structural
drawings in order to meet the intention of structural design.
(2) When there are discrepancies between the contents of this Code and Korean
Architectural Standard Specification established by Ministry of Land, Transport and
Maritime Affairs, this Code shall prevail.
0105 Various Inspections and Testings, and Performance Validation of Structural

Materials
Quality check of the used materials in a structural design and manufactured products,
procedures and methods of performance validation, technical methods to be approved for
use in case of use of materials not specified in standards or application of special
construction methods, and requirements for certification experiment of steel structure
connections and wind tunnel experiment shall be conformed with Chapter 2.
0106 Verification of Structural Safety

For a building or a construction to have a safety structure, this Code must be conformed
from the design phase to the construction, supervision and maintenance phases. For this
purpose, the following items shall be verified for the structural safety.
0106.1 Verification of Structural Safety in Structural Drawing Documents

Structural drawing documents on the structure of a building or a construction must be
verified whether they are prepared by the principal structural engineer in accordance
with this Code to ensure the structural safety.
0106.2 Verification of Structural Safety of Construction Drawing Documents

Among the shop drawing documents created by the constructor, the following
documents must be verified by the principal structural engineer whether they are
conformed with the provisions of this Code and appropriate for structural drawing
documents in terms of structural safety (including safety for earthquake):
(1) Rebar Placing Drawing of Strut
(2) Production and Installation Drawing of Strut
(3) Fire Resisting Detailed Drawing of Strut
(4) Shop Drawing and Production and Installation Drawing of Attached Struts
(5) Detailed Installation Drawing of Building Equipments
(6) Detailed Construction Drawing of Strut of Temporary Structures
(7) Value Engineering (V.E.) Structural Drawing Documents
(8) Other documents required for verification of structural safety
0106.3 Verification of Structural Safety during Construction

To verify the structural safety during construction in accordance with this Code, the
principal structural engineer should perform the followings:
(1) Review and verification of a structure specification
(2) Review and verification for conformance of used structural materials
(3) Review the test results of structural materials
(4) Review the conformance of rebars and their connections as well as settlement
(5) Review and verify structures regarding design modification
(6) Review structural strength in case of construction defects and suggest reinforcement
plans
(7) Review other items that may affect safety or quality of a construction structure in
construction process
0106.4 Verification of Structural Safety during Maintenance

To ensure the structural safety during maintenance, the principal structural engineer shall
perform the following activities in accordance with this Code:
(1) Detailed safety diagnostic
(2) Review structures for retrofitting
(3) Review structures for zoning change
(4) Review structures for extension
0107 Principal Structural Engineer
0107.1 Qualification of Principal Structural Engineer

The principal structural engineer should be qualified as construction structural
engineer under the national technical qualifications law or equivalent ability.
0107.2 Responsibilities of Principal Structural Engineer

Preparation of structural drawing documents of a building or a construction in
accordance with this Code, verification of structural safety, structural supervision and
detailed safety diagnosis shall be performed under the responsibility of the principal
structural engineer of each area.
0107.3 Signature or Seal of Principal Structural Engineer

(1) Structural drawing documents, construction drawing documents, structural
supervision report and safety diagnosis report will be only valid with the signature of
the principal structural engineer.
(2) Client and constructor must perform any authorized and approved actions as well
as construction with signed or sealed drawing documents by the principal structural
engineer.
Chapter 2 Structural Inspection and Testing
0201.1 Scope
In this paragraph, requirements are defined for appropriate quality assurance of raw
materials of structural materials used in building and construction, experiments for
performance validation of manufactured products, inspections on on-site installation of
structural materials or manufactured products, or maintenance in construction,
certification experiment for steel structure connections and wind tunnel experiment.
0201.2 Definition of Terms

Accredited laboratories and inspection organizations: Professional academic institutions
and inspection agencies accredited by the government that are capable of testing
functions and performing inspection services on a regular basis.
Materials not defined in specified standards: Materials of which specified standards are
defined in the Korean Industrial Standards (KS) but non-classified and that need to be
newly graded.
Materials defined in specified standards: Materials of which specified standards are
defined in the Korean Industrial Standards (KS)
Performance Validation Label: A certificate prepared by a manufacturer for its products
displaying manufacturer’s name, functions and performance features of materials and
certificate by accredited inspection organizations bodies showing that a sample of the
product or the material has been tested and assessed by authorized institution.
New Materials: Materials of which specified standards are not defined in the Korean
Industrial Standards (KS)
Certified Connections: Connection parts of conformed earthquake force resistance
system that are certified for their appropriate functions.
General Inspection: An inspection to verify functions of structural materials used in main
parts for safety, fire prevention and hygiene of foundations and key structural parts of a
building and a construction.
Periodic Special Inspection: An inspection performed on site by the qualified special
inspector on a regular basis.
Certification Experiment for Connections: An inspection performed to certify as the
certified connection parts of the conformed earthquake force resistance system.
Manufactured Products: Components or assemblies consisting of materials processed by
cutting, drilling, welding, connecting, joining, cold rolling and calibrating before
installing to buildings or constructions.
Continuous Special Inspection: Inspections performed continuously by qualified special
inspector who is stationed permanently on site.
Certified Manufacturer of Steel Structures: Manufacturers of steel structures certified by
the minister of land, transport and maritime affairs under the construction technology
management act, article 24-3 Certification of Steel Structures Manufacturing Plant.
Special Inspection: An inspection which requires an expert’s verification to achieve
conformance for manufacturing, construction and installation of components or
connection areas.
Special Inspector: An expert appointed or employed by the client for special inspections
in accordance with 0204 (Special Inspection).
0202 Approval
0202.1 Written Approval

If construction materials, components, system and construction methods comply with the
requirements of this chapter, a supporting test report shall be submitted to the inspector
for a written approval.
0202.2 Approval Records

An approval record containing approved construction materials, components,
equipments, system and construction methods as well as approval conditions and
restrictions shall be kept in the inspector’s office and shall be available to the public if
necessary.
0202.3 Declaration of Proof of Performance

For construction materials, components, equipments, systems and construction methods
that are not based on the Korean Industrial Standards, their performance characteristics
must be mentioned after performing general and special inspections required in this
chapter.
0203 General Inspection
0203.1 General Information

This paragraph defines the requirements to satisfy the quality of structural functions of
structural materials that are used in important parts of foundations and major structures
of a buildings or a construction in terms of safety, prevention of fire and hygiene.
0203.2 Materials with Specified Size
0203.1 Structural materials that are used in parts specified in general information shall
be products in compliance with the Korean Industrial Standards. Materials specified in
this Code shall be used and their performance shall be verified according to the testing
methods of the Korean Industrial Standards.
0203.3 New Materials and Materials without Specified Size
0203.3.1 Scope
0203.1 New materials and materials not specified in specifications that are used in areas
specified in 0203.1 (General Information) includes:
(1) Concrete
(2) Rebars
(3) Precast concrete
(4) Steel materials and cast steel for structures
(5) High-tension bolt and bolt
(6) Cables, wire lopes and similar products for structures
(7) Welding materials (carbon steel and stainless steel welding)
(8) Turn buckles
(9) Vibration controllers
0203.3.2 Approval Procedure
In order to use new materials and materials that are not defined in the specified
standards, a performance experiment report prepared by a professional academic
institution or an accredited laboratories testing body and concrete data on the technical
standards for quality, inspections and accuracy, quality management system and its
actual conditions or equivalent materials should be submitted to the minister of land,
transport and maritime affairs for approval before use.
0203.3.3 Performance Experiment Report
The client shall present technical standards regarding quality prepared by experts who
have research accomplishments in the relevant fields and experimental and
investigational materials that prove required structural performance for the applicable
structures in order to demonstrate the conformity of structures or manufactured products.
0203.3.4 Verification in accordance with Quality Standards

When the quality standards are established, verify the followings:
(1) Verify the inspection items in accordance with quality standards of the Korean
Industrial Standards
(2) Verify quality in accordance with quality measurement methods of the Korean
Industrial Standards
(3) Verify quality of manufacturing, shipment and storage in accordance with quality
standards of the Korean Industrial Standards
0203.3.5 Verification of Accuracy and Performance

Verify whether materials have required accuracy and performance for inspection.
0203.3.6 Verification of Quality Management System

In order to use new materials and materials without specific standards, actual conditions
of conformance of the manufacturer(s) regarding quality management system are
required to be verified.
0203.3.6.1 Specific Standards Management by Manufacturer(s)

Verify quality management system and its actual conditions of manufacturer(s) as
follows:
(1) Verify whether the specified standards of manufacturer properly consist of the
following items:
• Quality check and storage of products
• Quality check and storage of materials
• Management items and methods of processes, quality properties, inspection methods
and work methods
• Manufacturing and inspection facilities
• Outsourcing management
• Control of nonconformity
(2) Verify appropriate amendment and revision of internal specified standards of the
manufacturer and whether employee training is well performed.
0203.3.6.2 Inspection and Storage of Products and Materials
Verify whether inspection and storage of products and materials are properly
performed in accordance with internal specified standards of the manufacturer.
0203.3.6.3 Process Management

Verify whether the process management is properly performed for the following
items:
(1) Process management including work records, inspection records and control chart
for nonconformity to verify whether inspection and storage of products and materials
are properly performed for each process in accordance with internal standards of the
manufacturer.
(2) Treatment of non-conforming and rejected products occurred during process,
dealing with abnormality during process, and recurrence prevention plans
0203.3.6.4 Manufacturing and Inspection Facilities
Verify whether check, inspection, calibration and maintenance are properly managed
in accordance with internal standards of the manufacturer and maintain proper level
and performance of facilities.
0203.3.6.5 Outsourcing Management

Verify whether outsourcing management is properly performed in accordance with
internal standards of the manufacturer.
0203.3.6.6 Claim Management

Verify whether claim management is performed in accordance with internal standards of
the manufacturer.
0203.3.6.7 Management of Products, Materials, Processes and Facilities
Verify whether the records of product management, materials management, processes
management, facility management, outsourcing management and claim management are
retained for necessary periods and reflected in the quality management.
0203.3.7 Verification of Operation of a Quality Management Organization

(1) Verify whether quality management plan and operation for each process are
appropriate.
(2) Verify whether the responsibility and authority of each organization are clear and an
organic solidarity is established between each organization under the direction of the
principal manager of quality management promotion.
(3) Verify whether a training program is regularly performed for quality management
promotion.
0203.3.8 Roles of Principal Manager of Quality Management
Roles of the principal manager of quality management are as follows:
(1) Set up and promote quality management plans
(2) General management of establishment and amendment of internal standards of the
manufacturer
(3) Assess quality level
(4) Provide instructions and advice on quality management practice, and intervene in
inter-departmental affairs
(5) Provide instructions on abnormality during works, claim management and
measurements
(6) Promote educational trainings on quality management for persons in charge
(7) Provide instructions on outsourcing management
0203.3.9 Assessment and Post-Inspection
When it is difficult to manufacture the applied products for approval to use for outer
appearance inspection according to 0202 (Approval), the applicant may substitute the
inspection by submitting a report about similar existing products or identical products
used in other sites in advance. In this report, detailed information including technology
on the products, product compositions, test results and similar information should be
described.
0203.3.10 Approval Record and Notification

Approval records including approval conditions and restrictions about approved
structural materials shall be kept and notified.
0204 Special Inspection
0204.1.1 Special Inspector

The client shall hire a special inspector for the inspection on work types defined in this
paragraph during construction period. The special inspector shall meet the requirements
of the principal structure engineer.
0204.1.2 Inspection on Manufacturer
If structural members or assemblies are manufactured within work house in the
manufacturer, a special inspection shall be performed on manufacturing items.
0204.2 Steel Structures

The special inspection on steel structures consists of on-site inspections and inspections
at the manufacturing plant before delivery on site.
0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection

In an inspection on structure manufacturing, the following items shall be inspected and
approved by the special inspector to get a due diligence grade, except for manufacturing
in a plant that is conformed with a production capacity grade according to the size of the
relevant structures and holds a certificate of steel structure manufacturing plant in
accordance with under construction technology management act, article 24-3
Certification of Steel Structures Manufacturing Plant.
0204.2.1.1 Inspection Items

An actual inspection shall be performed regarding the items in the following <Table
0204.2.1> to verify whether they are appropriate.
<Table 0204.2.1> Inspections items for steel structure fabrication
Category Classification Items
(1) Factory site size
(2) Area of workhouse for product processing
(3)Tentative assembly site size
(4) Mold loft size
1. Factory (5) Contract power
Factory Overview
Overview (6) Number of employees (full-time workers only)
(7) Number of regular skilled workers from outsourcer
(8) Annual processing performance
(9) Size of dedicated warehouse for subsidiary materials
(10) Years of operations
(1) Actual number of administrative technicians
(2) Steel structure technicians
(3) Welding technicians
(4) Nondestructive testing personnel
2. Technical Administrative (5) Nondestructive testing technicians (UT,RT)
Manpower Technicians (6) Nondestructive testing technicians (MT,PT)
(7) Persons in charge of drawings or inspections
(8) Persons in charge of product inspection
(9) Persons in charge of materials management
(10) Persons in charge of quality management
<Table 0204.2.1> Inspections items for steel structure fabrication (continue)
Category Classification Items
(1) Welding-related technicians
(2) steel frame-related technicians
(3) Other production-related technicians (including
unqualified personnel)
2. Technical Manpower Technicians
(4) Cran drivers
(5) Crane hand signal operator
(6) Welding master craftsman
(7) Welding technicians
(1) Rounding or band cutters

(2) Removable automatic gas cutter, special purpose
machines for improvement process, large automatic gas
cutters, NC large gas cutters
(3) Upright drill >16Φ, radial drill > 30Φ, girder radial drill
> 30Φ, magnetic electric drill > 16Φ, 3-direction multiple
Machine axes drill (for H-shaped steel) >16Φ, NC drill >12Φ
building (4) Press (> 1,000 Noy), Flange calibrators
facilities (5) Shot blasting machine, grit blasting machine and blast
automation facilities
(6) Facing machine and milling machine
(7) Bending rulers, angle benders, pipe benders, high-speed
grinder cutters, friction saw cutter, angle cutters, shear
cutters (shearing), automatic gas steel tube cutters, hydraulic
drills, drills other than, press < 1,000kN
(1) Manual arc welder

(2) Semi-automatic arc welder
3. Manufacturing and
(3) Automatic welder
testing facilities Welding
(4) Dryer with temperature controller
equipments
(5) Arc air gouging AC, Arc air gouging DC
(6 ) Rotating devices such as positioner rotators, totaling
roller and vertical devices
Crane (1) In-plant ceiling crane (including L type)
equipments (2) Other cranes and forklift trucks
(1) Universal testing machine (Capacity > 500kN furnaces)
(2) Supersonic flaw detector
(3) Magnetic particle devices, penetration detecting devices
(4) Surface thermometer, temperature chalk
(5) Thermo-hygrograph
Inspection and (6) Welding gauge
testing (7) Space gauge
equipments (8) Under cut gauge
(9) Ammeter (including clamp type)
(10) Steel band tape (with KS grade-1 calibration table)
(11) Paint gauge
(12) Axial force meter of the bolt
(13) Torque wrench > 200 N.m times)
(1) Management policy and its conditions of quality

4. Actual conditions of General assurance of the management
quality management management (2) Status of management organization
(3) Activities for training and quality improvement
0204.2.1.2 Weld zone inspection
Welding inspection shall be performed in accordance with "Nondestructive inspection
standards for steel structure weld zone". The inspector of welding must be qualified
according to the certified process.
0204.2.1.3 Detailed Inspection on Connections

The special inspector shall perform inspections to verify whether manufacturing is
conformed to details in drawing documents where braces and stiffeners of steel frames,
appropriate application of connection details in connection parts and locations of
members are approved.
0204.2.1.4 High-tension Bolt Inspection

The special inspector shall determine whether bolts, nuts, washer sets, paints and friction
surface treatment, signed areas, and installation and assembling are properly conformed
to the requirements.
0204.2.1.5 Evaluation and Post Inspection
According to 0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection, the manufacturing plant shall submit

required materials for due diligence to the special inspector, who will perform the due
diligence based on the submitted materials and approve if it is conformed. According to
the construction progress, a post inspection shall be determined and performed if
necessary.
0204.2.1.6 Written Approval
According to 0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection, the special inspector shall record and
keep the due diligence information and notify whether it is approved or not in writing.
0204.2.1.7 Approval Records
According to 0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection, results of the due diligence shall be

recorded and kept with the construction journals.
0204.2.2 On-site Inspection
0204.2.2.1 Colum Base Inspection

Column base with Anchor bolts, base mortar and nut fastening shall be constructed
according to drawing documents and specification and the special inspector shall
perform either continuous special inspections or periodic special inspections.
0204.2.2.2 Inspection on Conformity of Installation Plan

The special inspector shall determine installation plans such as fetch method, installation
order, machines to install and hoisting methods based on building size, appearance,
ground and process, and verify whether partial furniture during installation and entire
furniture after installation are safe against dead loads, live loads, wind loads, seismic
loads, snow loads, and shock loads of installed machines.
0204.2.2.3 Connection Part Inspection

(1) High-Tension Joint
A construction summary for high-tension joint shall be prepared and submitted to the
special inspector for approval.
(2) On-site Welding
When selecting welding methods other than those are instructed in drawing documents, it
must be approved by the special inspector.
0204.2.2.4 Inspection on Deck Plate and Stud

Welding methods of deck plates and studs must be approved by the special inspector.
0204.3 Concrete Structure
0204.3.1 Procedure of Special Inspection

Special Inspection on concrete materials, structural members and construction shall be
performed according to the procedures provided in the Korean Industrial Standards as
shown in <Table 0204.3.1>and applicable provisions of chapter 5 (Concrete Structure).
0204.3.2 Roles of Special Inspector
If there is no information or documents supporting that the quality of materials are
conformed with concrete standard specifications, the special inspector may request
submission of material test-related information or documents performed according to
concrete standard specifications or specified standard specification for such materials.
0204.4 Other Structures
0204.4.1 Masonry Structure

Construction of masonry structures shall be inspected and assessed by applying relevant
provisions of chapter 6 (Masonry Structure) according to the types of resident, building
or construction type defined in this Code.
0204.4.2 Wooden Structure
Special inspection on manufacture process regarding assembling wooden structured
members shall be based on chapter 8 (Wooden Structure).
0204.4.3 Base Foundation
0204.4.3.1 Pile Foundation

The special inspector must be permanently present on site during installation of piles or
initial derived and load test. The special inspector shall prepare installation records about
all piles and results of load test, and submit these to supervisors and the client.
0204.4.3.2 Pier Foundation
A special inspection must be performed for pier foundation of a building which is subject
to the earthquake-resistant design of 0306 (Earthquake Load).
<Table 0204.3.1> Special Inspection on the Construction of a Concrete Structure
Continuous Periodic Applicable
Inspection Content Special Special Specifications
Inspection Inspection and Standards
Chapter 5
1. Inspection on reinforced steels and rebar locations ᄋ Concrete
Structure
2. Inspection on welding of reinforced steels
1) Steel for reinforcement that are not welded by
welding test method of KS B 0816~KS B 0892 ᄋ KS B 0816 ~
(2) Ordinary or ductile moment frames, and reinforced KS B 0892
steels resistant to torsion and axial force in shear walls ᄋ
that have boundary elements, shear reinforcement
Chapter 5
3. Inspection to verify whether the mixing used is
ᄋ Concrete
identical with the mixing design
Structure
4. Temperature of unconsolidated concrete during
specimen production for conformance test of strength of KS F 2401
ᄋ
unconsolidated bulk sample collected for measurement KS F 2409
of slump value and air volume
Chapter 5
5. Inspection on technological congruence of placing
concrete and installation methods
ᄋ Concrete
Structure
6. Inspection to verify whether curing temperature and
ᄋ
methods are appropriate
7. Prestressed Concrete Inspection Chapter 5
1) Applied towing tension ᄋ Concrete
2) Grouting for tensioning tendon installed on seismic ᄋ Structure
structure system
Chapter 5
8. Inspection on installation of precast concrete
ᄋ Concrete
members
Structure
9. Strength inspection of on-site placing concrete before Chapter 5
applying post tension in concrete and before removal of ᄋ Concrete
supporting posts and molds installed in beams and slabs Structure
0205 Strength of Materials
0205.1 Conformance of Materials in Use

The client shall verify whether structural materials that are used in important areas for
safety such as foundations and key structures are conformed with design standard
strength and mechanical functions that are applied in designing phase.
0205.2 Strength of New Materials

For materials that are not specifically defined in this Code, the design strength and
tolerable stress value should be determined in accordance with procedures defined in
0203 (General Inspection) and 0206 (Alternative Test).
0206 Alternative Test

The constructor shall present required test and investigation criteria when applying new
materials or assemblies that are not specified according to certified standards, and
possess the reports on quality and usage of such materials from Accredited laboratories
and inspection bodies.
0206.2 Test Criteria

If suggested construction and design methods are not conformed with this Code,
alternative tests for system related to methods or structural members and connection
parts must be performed to verify conformance and safety.
0206.3 Test Procedure

Alternative tests shall be performed in accordance with 0203 (General Inspection).
0207 Certification Test of Steel Structured Connection Areas

When applying new steel structured earthquake resistant connection areas that are not
specified in this Code, reports of certification test of steel structured connection areas
according to the certification test criteria or experimental research articles with the
identical content should be submitted to relevant professional academic institutions such
as "Korean Society of Steel Construction" to be certified as conformance of connection
areas of the earthquake resistant system and submit this certification to Ministry of land
transport and maritime affairs to be approved according to Structural Standards, Section
3, Article Deliberation Procedure before applying this to earthquake resistant design and
construction.
0207.2 Test Criteria of Certification Test of Steel Structured Connection Areas

Test Criteria of Certification Test of Steel Structured Connection Areas shall be
established by relevant professional academic institutions such as "Korean Society of
Steel Construction" and approved by Minister of land transport and maritime affairs
before notified.
0208 Wind Tunnel Test

For evaluation of wind load of buildings or constructions that are subject to 0305.1.3
special wind load of this Code, structure design shall be performed according to the
results of the wind tunnel test.

The wind tunnel test shall meet the following conditions:
(1) Altitude distribution and turbulence intensity distribution of average wind speed and
wind fluctuation properties in the wind tunnel shall be reproduced to be conformed with
conditions of natural atmosphere boundary layer of the construction site.
(2) Surrounding buildings including the target building and topology conditions shall be
reproduced to be conformed with on-site building conditions.
(3) The section closure rate by the target building and surrounding models in the wind
tunnel should be less than 5 % against the experimental section of the wind tunnel.
(4) Pressure distribution within the wind tunnel should be constant.
(5) Test should be performed by minimizing impact of Reynolds number.

The wind tunnel test shall be performed in accordance with the wind tunnel test
procedure established by wind engineering experts.
0209 Field Load Test

Structural designers of building or constructions may request a structural evaluation to
the client if the safety is questionable for the whole structure or part of the structure
against expected loads. If reserved strength of the structure is less than the strength
defined in this Code according to the results of a structural assessment, the client must
perform a field load test. When such buildings or construction are under construction,
the client must stop construction and correct this.
Struts, structural members and connection areas shall be tested according to appropriate
test procedures. If there is no such test procedure, the test procedure must be validated by
the principal structure engineer.

The field load test should be performed in accordance with the load test procedure
established by the principal structure engineer.
0209.4 Tolerance Criteria

The field load test should be performed by the criteria established by the principal
structure engineer.
0210 Load Test prior to Construction

When the principal structure engineer uses a construction method that may not be
reviewed by this Code, or if he/she cannot evaluate the structure properties with this
Code, the principal structure engineer should verify its structural conformance by load
tests performed prior to the construction and apply to the structural design.
0210.2 Design Standard Load Test

Applicable provisions of chapter 3 (Design Load) shall be applied to load test procedure,
load factor, design standard strength and mechanical performance. However, if
applicable provisions are unavailable, tolerance and performance may be verified by a
special load test according to 0210.3.
0210.3 Special Load Test

If there are no applicable provisions for load test procedures, the load test in accordance
with 0209 should be performed to verify the tolerance of structural members and struts.
0210.4 Specimen
Production of specimens and test structures for load tests prior to the construction shall
be conformed with the same materials, appearance and details with the actual structures
that are approved by the principal structure engineer. The tests must be performed at an
accredited laboratories and inspection body.
Chapter 3 Design Loads
0301.1 Scope
This chapter applies to calculation of various loads that work on buildings and
constructions. However, this Code may not be applied for calculating of design loads and
exterior forces by special investigation studies. In this case, the grounds shall be
specified.
0301.2 Definition of Terms

Braced frames: Central type or eccentric vertical truss or its equivalent constructs in
building frame or dual-frame approaches to resist to the side force.
Gust Effect Factor: A factor described in a static value of the ratio of the maximum
displacement against the average displacement which displaying dynamic behavior
elements of a building that are occurred by wind turbulence.
Rigid Structure: Static structures that may ignore additional load effects occurring by
dynamic interactions of wind and structures (using gust effect factor without considering
the resonance and classified according to the shape ratio)
Rigid Diaphragm: Septum that is not divided by flexible diaphragm.
Open Type Building: A building where total of opening areas located in walls with
constant pressure is more than 80% of its wall areas or a building where more than 80%
of each wall structure is open.
Building Framing Method: A structural method that three-dimensional frames are
resistant to vertical loads and shear walls or braced frames are resistant to seismic loads.
Boundary Element: Tensile or compressive elements and collecting materials in the
edges of diaphragms or shear walls, internal openings, discontinuities and reentering
angled areas.
Light Weight Wall Partition: Movable wall structure with load less than 1 kN/m2
Dead Load: Gravity load that works continuously during the stripping time of a structure
by the weight of struts and their attached nonbearing parts, and various facilities.
Tunnel Wind Effect: A phenomenon of rapid increase of the wind speed as the
streamline converges in parallel when the wind blows between valleys of mountains.
Unstable aerodynamic vibrations: A phenomenon of vibration increase or diffusion as
additional aerodynamic occurred by vibrations of the building itself works to reduce the
damping force of the building.
Resonance Factor: A factor indicating the distribution of frequency components near
natural frequency of displacement fluctuations of a building.
Scale Factor: A factor indicating the reduced turbulence effects which occur according to
the building size.
Basic Wind Speed: Reproduced expected wind speed in 100 years against the average
wind speed measured for 10 minutes at the height of 10 meters from the ground of a
point of roughness classification C considering effects of the ground type.
Basic Gradient Wind Height: A height where the wind speed is almost constant as there
is no effect of the friction force which is caused by roughness of the ground.
Turbulence Intensity: A dimensionless ratio calculated the standard deviation divided by
the average wind speed to indicate the quantitative wind jitters.
Bearing Wall Method: A structural method by which shear wall bear vertical loads and
side forces.
Pressure-resistant Gust Effect Factor: A ratio of the maximum room pressure against the
average room pressure as a scale indicating fluctuations of pressure resistance inside of
building according to the size of its openings.
Room Pressure Factor: A factor indicating the level of room pressure occurring by air
entry into a building through gaps on exterior walls or openings of a building.
Seismic Importance Group: Classification of the usage of a building and the seismic
importance according to <Table 0306.4.1>.
Independent Side Roof: A roof structure with only side roofs on column members and
without walls.
Atmospheric Boundary Layer: An area where the wind speed changes according to the
height from the ground due to the friction forces affected by the ground.
Starting Height of Atmospheric Boundary Layer: The starting height of the atmospheric
layer where the vertical wind speed changes due to the ground effect (a constant wind
speed at the height is applied under the starting height of the atmospheric layer according
to the classification of the ground roughness)
Moment France Method: A structural method by which Rahmen frames consisting of
beams and columns resist to vertical loads and side forces.
Closed Building: A building without outstanding openings and with closed windows to
prevent wind entry and an entrance door equipped with closure devices against a strong
storm and the area of openings and gaps is less than 0.1% of the total wall areas.
Base: A reference base where the horizontal seismic force works by the ground motion.
Shear Force of Base: Total shear force that works on the base of a structure.
Side Ratio: A ratio of the breadth B divided by the depth D, i.e., B/D
Ordinary Moment Frame: Moment frame that does not use specific specifications to
achieve ductile behaviors.
Additional Frame: Secondary structural members that are installed to transfer wind loads
given on windows and exterior wall panels to the main frames.
Partially Open Type Building: A building with openings which are less than 1% of the
wall areas. The openings are not equally distributed in the wall structure.
Weld Deposits: Devices for connecting components or supporting objects to the
earthquake resistant system of a building or reinforcing them (including anchor bolt,
welded joints and mechanical fixation devices)
Load Area: A scale of the load that vertical load transferring structural members bear
indicated by a floor area
Non-building Structure: Free standing structures without vertical loads that are not
classified as buildings, vehicles, viaducts for rail, nuclear power stations, marine docks
or dams.
Non-resonance Factor: A factor indicating the distribution of frequency components out
of the natural frequency of displacement fluctuations of a building
Non-structural Members: Composing members of a building that are excluded from the
structural analysis such as canopies, non-bearing walls and other similar parts.
Non-structural Elements: Construction, electric and mechanical system and their
components that are designed to have the importance factor Ip > 1.
Torsion Vibration: A type of vibration which cause unstable torsions in a building due to
abnormal movements of the turbulence and detachment.
Design Velocity Pressure: Equivalent static velocity pressure of an average wind speed
to determine the wind load for building design.
Design Spectrum Acceleration: Response spectrum acceleration of a short-tem cycle and
one-second cycle for the design earthquake (SDS,SD1)
Design Earthquake: Earthquake effects to which a building or a construction must be
resistant in accordance with this Code.
Design Wind Velocity: Wind speed that is basis of the design velocity pressure
calculation considering the altitude distribution of the wind speed according to the
ground conditions of the building point, the wind speed increase according to the ground
conditions and the design return period according to the importance of the building
against the basic wind speed.
Design Load: The load to which struts of a building or a construction must be resistant
according to this Code.
Gathering Materials: Members or elements that are installed to transfer the side force
from a part of a structure to the vertical element of the side force resistance system.
Ductile Moment Frame Method: A moment frame method which increases ductility of
members and connection areas to improve the resistant capacity against the side force.
Effect Area: Load effect that affects the vertical load transferring structural members
indicated in the floor area (4 times of the load area is applied to columns or foundations
while 2 times of the load area to large or small beams).
Vortex vibration: Vibration of a building that occurs from side to side regularly in rear of
the building by vortex effect
External Pressure Gust effect factor: External Pressure Gust effect factor: The scale
indicating the fluctuation of an external pressure, described as the ratio of the maximum
external pressure against the average external pressure.
External Pressure Factor: The ratio of the average wind pressure given on any hydraulic
pressure of the external surface a building and the velocity pressure at the standard
height.
Wind Load for Exterior Design: Wind load to design exterior decoration of a building to
which wind loads are applied including windows, exterior walls, etc. and the secondary
structural material and its connection areas that receive the wind load directly or through
the exterior decoration material to transfer to main frames such as fastener, purline, gut,
stud, etc.
Flexible Structure: A structure that is sensitive to the wind occurring additional loads due
to the dynamic interaction of the wind and a structure (Gust effect factor calculated
considering dynamic effect shall be used and this structure is classified according to a
ratio of building appearance).
Flexible Diaphragm A diaphragm where the lateral displacement of the diaphragm
exceeds two folds of the average inter-floor displacement on a given floor (Classified as
the flexible diaphragm for distribution of the story shear force and torsion)
Effective Hydraulic Pressure Area: An effective area that serves as the basis for wind
load calculation. Reflected area against the vortex induced angle. for exterior decoration
materials, the surface bearing exterior decoration materials loads.
Dangerous Materials: Materials that may affect the public safety as substances hazardous
to health, hazardous substance to environments or physical hazardous substances under
the Decree of the Toxic Chemicals Control Act or Industrial Safety and Health Law.
Dual Frame Method: A structural method that ductile moment frames bearing more than
25% of the side force are combined with shear walls or braced frames.
Equipment Elements: A part of mechanical elements of interior or exterior of a building,
electrical elements or machine systems, or a part of the electric system
Return Period: Statistical period of years until a certain scale of the wind returns.
Reduction Factor: A factor which is multiplied to the live load to consider the reduction
effect according to the effect area.
Snow Load: A load that works on a building or a construction by the weight of snow
coverage.
Shear Wall: A wall designed to support the side force in parallel with the surface of wall.
Shear Wall – Frame Interaction System: A combined structural system of shear walls and
frames designed to resist to the side force in proportion to the rigidity considering
interactions between shear walls and frames.
Main Frame: A set of structural frames or structural members that are arranged to
support or stabilize the entire structure resisting to the wind load, including columns,
beams, purline, etc. (If structural members such as brace, shear wall, roof truss, roof
diaphragm, etc. Are used to transfer the entire load, they are considered as main frames.)
Wind Load for Main Frame Design: Wind load used to design structural members that
are resistant to the wind loads applied to a whole structure.
Concentric Braced Frame: Braced frame of which the side force works mainly in
members
Importance Factor Is： A factor that varies the scale of snow loads according to the
importance of a building <Table 0304.3.4>
Importance Factor Iw: A factor that varies the design wind speed according to the
Importance Factor Ie： A factor that varies the seismic response factor according to the
Type of the Ground: A grade to classify the ground based on engineering properties
<Table 0306.3.2>
Wind Load for Roof Frame Design: Wind Load used in roof frame design of a building.
Roof Live Load: The work load caused by workers, equipments or materials during
maintenance work, or the loads that work on the roof by movable objects such as flower
pots or similar small decoration items irrelevant to occupancy or use.
Local Factor: a factor determined by Table <0306.3.3>and Table <0306.3.4>，Fa and Fv
Seismic Zone: A zone classified according to the same seismic risk ratio.
Seismic Force: A force determined to design a structure and its components according to
the response of the structure against the seismic movement.
Seismic Force Resistance System: A structural system that is configured to resist to any
given seismic force.
Seismic Response Factor: A factor determined according to Formula (0306.5.2) 〜
(0306.5.4), Cs
Earthquake Load: A load that works on structures with the ground movement caused by
earthquake.
Classification of the Ground Roughness: A state of the ground roughness classified as
the exposure level of an obstacle which corresponds to the ground roughness in a given
zone to the wind.
Subsurface Water Pressure: A load that works on a structure by the level of the
underground water.
Topography Factor: A factor which increases the wind speed near the peak of hills,
mountains or slopes as the wind speed is increased neat the peak of such places.
Floor Drift Displacement: Relative horizontal displacement between adjacent floors.
Floor Drift Displacement Angle: A value of the floor drift displacement divided by floor
height
Floor Earthquake Load A load which distributes the base shear force on each floor of a
building.
Outstanding Opening: The opening area of a wall is twice larger than the total area of all
openings and gaps of the entire walls such as plant building with ventilation ducts and
open type doors and temporary buildings with an open space.
Eccentric Braced Frame: Braced frames that are connected to beams. Tilted bracings are
installed for one or more of the extreme ends to be connected to the beams by keeping a
certain distance from beam - column connection.
Special Wind Load: A case where the wind load has to be assessed only by the wind
tunnel test due to the absence of methods to assess the wind because the phenomena
occurring in the target building or construction which is affected by the wind directly or
indirectly are irregular and complicated.
Wind Factor: A factor to calculate the design wind pressure of a structure, roof frame or
any other structures (the calculation is performed by using directly the wind factor Cf for
other structures or independent side roof while the wind factor for struts is calculated by
considering the wind pressure factor (exterior and interior pressure factors).
Wind Spectrum Factor: A factor indicating the power of the wind fluctuation in terms of
the first natural frequency of the wind direction of a building.
Wind Direction Vibration Acceleration: Accelerated speed caused by vibration of a
building toward the wind direction due to the turbulence movement of the wind.
Windward Side: A side to where the wind is blown.
Altitude Distribution Factor of the Wind Speed: Vertical distribution factor indicated by
the exponential law of the increased distribution of the wind speed up to the height of the
reference gradient wind according to the ground altitude.
Wind Fluctuation Factor: A factor to reflect the effects of turbulence intensity which
changes according to the ground conditions for evaluation of Gust effect factor.
Wind Pressure Factor: A factor consisting of the exterior pressure factor Cpe and interior
pressure factor for calculation of the design wind pressure, and consisting of the peak
exterior pressure factor GCpe and the peak interior pressure GCpi for calculation of the
design wind speed of exterior decoration materials.
Vortex induced Vibration: A type of vibration of a building caused by the perpendicular
direction of the wind due to the irregular movement of turbulence and the vortex flows
which occur regularly in both sides of the rear of the building.
Vortex induced Vibration Acceleration: The accelerated speed caused by vibration of a
building toward the perpendicular direction of the wind due to the vortex flows which
occur regularly from both edges to both sides of the rear of a building.
Leeward Side: The side where the wind slips away to the opposite side to which the wind
is blown.
Peak Interior Pressure Factor: A maximum value at a given moment considering both
Gust effect factor and the interior pressure factor required for the calculation of the wind
load to design exterior decoration materials.
Peak Exterior Pressure Factor: A maximum value at a given moment considering both
Gust effect factor and the exterior pressure factor required for the calculation of the wind
load to design exterior decoration materials.
Load Combinations: A total of each design load that works simultaneously multiplied by
the load factor
Appearance Ratio: The ratio calculated by the height of a building H which is divided by
√BD of the bottom side (this refers to H/ √BD, B = breadth of the building, D = depth of
the building)
Active Faults: The faults that shows geological evidence of seismic movements for the
last 11,000 years (alluvial epoch) or more than 1mm of the average annual slip in history
Live Load: The load that occurs by occupancy or use of a building or a construction.
0301.3 Key symbols

A ： Affected areas (A≥36m2)
A ： Effective pressure area, m2
A ： Factor of regional difference
a ： Width where local pressure is given, m
Ae : The area of a shear section of the shear wall in parallel with the earthquake load
direction on the 1st (ground) floor,m2
At: Load area
B : Representative width of a building, Vortex induced directional dimensions of a
building or vortex induced directional roof dimension of an independent side roof, m
b : Width of a billboard, width of load distribution of the roof，m
bc : Width of column plunges
Bf : Non-resonant factor for main frame design (a factor indicating frequency components
other than specific frequency of displacement fluctuations of buildings)
Bpe : Non-resonant factor for roof design
C : Live load reduction factor
C : Performance factor
Cb : Basic roof snow load factor
Ce : Exposure factor
Cf : Wind factor for main frame design
Cp : Horizontal load factor
Cpe : External pressure factor
Cpe1 : External pressure factor of windward side
Cpe2 : External pressure factor of leeward side
Cpi : Pressure-resistant factor of closed type buildings
Cs : Slope factor
Ct : Temperature factor
D : Depth and vortex induced measurement of a building, vortex induced roof dimension
of an independent side roof, m
d : A diameter of the circular cross section, or minimum dimension of the square,
hexagonal or oxagonal cross section, m

d’ : Depth of overhanging elements such as rib and spoiler, m
De : Length of a shear wall which runs parallel to the seismic direction on the ground
floor, m
F : Wind power spectrum factor (a factor indicating the power of wind speed fluctuations
in the primary specific frequency of wind direction to the building)
f : Height of the roof level of a curved roof, m
Fi : Floor earthquake load of I floor

Fp : Side earthquake load
Fx : Side earthquake load of floor x
g : Acceleration of gravity
Gf : Wind direction Gust effect factor for main frame design
gf : Peak factor
Gi : Pressure-resistant gust effect factor

Gpe : gust effect factor of roof
Gpi : Pressure-resistant gust effect factor
GCpe : Peak external pressure factor for exterior decoration material design
GCpi : Peak internal pressure factor for exterior decoration material design
H : Reference height of building, average height of roof side, height of hill 'mountain'
slope, m
h0 : Height from roof level to obstacles, m
hb : Height of balanced snow load, m
hc : Net height from higher roof adjoining the upper part of balanced snow load on the
lower roof to the upper part of parapet, m

hc : Height of similar structures such as smokestacks and tanks, m
hd : Depth of smow deposit, m
hi, hx : Height from the bottom of a building to i, x floor, m
hn : Height of a building from the bottom to the highest level, m
hr : Height from surface to eaves of a curved, m
hs : Height of a billboard, m
IE : Importance factor in earthquake load

IH : Turbulence intensity of the reference height H
Is : Importance factor of snow load
Iw : Importance factor of wind load
KZY : Distribution factor of max wind
KZt : Topography factor
L : Wind direction dimension of a building, and depth or wind direction roof dimension
from an independent side roof, m
l : Roof span of a curved roof, m
LH : Turbulence scale at the reference height H，m

Lu: A horizontal distance from H/2 point downward from the central peak of hill,
mountain or slope to the supporting point of a windward slope, m
lu : Maximum distance from the protrusion of a parapet as a length to the roof edge, m
M : Ultimate load factor
m : Longer side of a billboard, m
n : Shorter side of a billboard, m
n0 : First natural frequency of wind directions, vortex induced directions or torsional
directions of the building or first natural frequency roof, HZ

2
pc : Design wind pressure for exterior decoration material design, N/m
2
pf : Design wind pressure for main frame design, N/m
2
pr : Design wind pressure of roof, N/m
2
qh : Design velocity pressure against average height of roof side H from the ground, N/m
qZ : Design velocity pressure against height Z from the ground，N/m2

R : Response modification factor
r : Ratio of curved roof side height / against roof span( l )
Rf : Resonance factor for main frame design (a factor indicating the specific frequency
components of fluctuation of a building)
rf : Wind fluctuation factor
Rpe : Resonance factor for roof design

S : Effective ground acceleration of the maximum expected earthquake in 2400 according
to the return period
s : Proximity between structures, m
2
Sd : Additional snow load due to deposit weight, kN/m
SDs : Spectral acceleration with a period of 1 second
SDI : Spectral acceleration with the short period
Sf : Snow load on flat roof，kN/m2

Sf : Scale factor (a factor indicating reduced effect of turbulence by building scale)
2
Sg : Snow load on the ground, kN/m
2
Ss : Snow load on curved roof, kN/m
T : Fundamental vibration period of a building (second)
V : Base shear
V0 : Basic wind speed, m/s
VH : Design wind speed against average height of roof level H from the ground, m/s
Vx : Story-shearing force of X floor
Vz :Design wind speed against any height z from the ground, m/s
W : Total weight of a building
w : Width of additional snow load due to deposit weight, m
2
Wc : Wind load for exterior decoration material design, N/m
2
Wf : Wind load for main frame design, N/m
Wi, Wx : Weight of a building between I, x
Wp : Total weight of non-structural members
2
Wr : Wind load for roof frame design, N/m
Xc : A distance from the endpoint of eaves to the central point of the wind pressure on the
independent side roof, m
z : Any given height from the ground, m
Zb : A height where atmospheric boundary layer begins, m

Zg : Height of standard gradient wind, m
a : Wind speed altitude distribution exponent
δx : Horizontal displacement of X floor
δxe : Horizontal displacement of X floor calculated by elastic analysis
ζf : 1st attenuation constant of wind direction, vortex induced direction or torsional
direction of a building
ζr : 1st attenuation constant of roof
Ө : Inclined angle of roof, º
k : Karman integer (≒ 0.4)

vf : Number of level crossings, Hz
ξ : Substantial rate of a trust tower (effective hydraulic pressure area/total outline areas)
φ : Substantial rate of open type thin walled structures (effective hydraulic pressure
area/total areas of thin walled structures)
φ : Windward slope of the most unfavorable conditions (φ=H/2L u )
φd : Average slope from the peak of a hill, a mountain or a sloping ground to a 5 hour-
distance by leeward side hypertense
0301.4 Types of design loads
The types of designs loads applying to the structural design of a building or a
construction are as follows. Requirement of each design load is based on 0302 to 0310.
(1) Dead load (D)
(2) Live load (L)
(3) Live load of roof (Lr)
(4) Snow load (S)
(5) Wind load (W)
(6) Earthquake load (E)
(7) Underground water pressure, earth pressure (H)
(8) Temperature load (T)
(9) Fluid pressure and container’s contents load (F)
(10) Transporting equipments and accessories load (M)
(11) Other load
0301.5 Load Combinations
(1) Buildings and constructions shall be designed to resist to the loads defined in this
chapter and the load effects by the load combinations defined in each chapter by
materials.
(2) For the defined load combinations except for the dead load, it is important to review
the possible situation where one or more loads may not work.
0302 Dead load
0302.1 General aspects
Dead load means the self weight of buildings and structures or the vertical load working
on the structure continuously during the existence of structure.
0302.2 Keynote
The dead load of each part of a building of a construction shall be calculated according to
the actual conditions of each part. The weight of each part shall be calculated by using
material density, unit volume weight and combined weight.
0303 Live load
(1) This paragraph defines the minimum value of the live load that should be applied to
the design of a building and a structure.
(2) The live load must be the maximum expected load by occupancy and use.
(3) If the requirements of this paragraph is not applied, or for the uses not defined in this
paragraph, the live load should be calculated by a reasonable method and its basis of
calculation should be explained.
(4) The live load is divided into the equal-distributed live load and the concentrated live
load, and one of the two which causes the larger stress in the relevant structural member
should be applied.
0303.2 Equal-distributed Live Load
0303.2.1 Basic Equal-distributed Live Load
Minimum value of basic equal-distributed live load which is applied a structure as live
load according to its use is shown in <Table 0303.2.1>.
<Table 0303.2.1> Basic equal-distributed live load (Unit: kN/m2)
Use Part of Structure Live load
A. Living room, common room and corridor of residential
2.0
1 Houses building
B. Balcony of apartment houses 3.0
A. Wards and corridors 2.0
2 Hospitals
B. Operation rooms, common room and corridors 3.0
Accommodation A. Guest rooms and corridors 2.0
3
Facilities B. Common room and corridor 5.0
A. General offices and corridors 2.5
B. Lobby 4.0
4 Offices
C. Offices for special use and corridors 5.0
D. Archives 5.0
A. Class rooms and corridors 3.0
B. Lobby 4.0
5 Schools
C. General laboratories 3.0
D. Laboratory for weight materials 5.0
A. Stores, departments stores (ground floor part) 5.0
6 Stores B. Stores, departments stores (2nd and higher floor parts) 4.0
C. Warehouse-style megastores 6.0
A. Lobby, corridor 5.0
B. Stage 7.0
Assembly and C. Restaurant 5.0
7 amusement D. Kitchen (for business) 7.0
occupancies E. Theaters and assembly occupancies (immobile) 4.0
F. Assembly occupancies (removable) 5.0
G. Banquet hall, ballroom 5.0
A. Gym floor, outdoor stadium 5.0
8 Sports facilities B. Stands (immobile) 4.0
C. Stands (removable) 5.0
A. Reading rooms and corridors 3.0
9 Libraries
B. Book shelves 7.5
A. Passenger cars only 3.0
Indoor
B. For light duty trucks and empty buses 8.0
parking
C. For trucks of total weight > 18 tons and medium duty
areas 12.0
vehicles
Indoor A. Passenger cars only 3.0
parking drive lanes B. For light duty trucks and empty buses 10.0
10
Lots. and tilted C. For trucks of total weight > 18 tons and medium duty
drive lanes 16.0
vehicles
A. For passenger cars, light duty trucks and empty buses 12.0
Outdoor B. For trucks of total weight > 18 tons and medium duty
16.0
vehicles
A. Storage houses for light weight goods 6.0
11 Warehouse
B. Storage houses for medium weight goods 12.0
A. Light goods factories 6.0
12 Plants
B. Heavy industry plants 12.0
A. Occupancy " roofs that are not used (roof live load) 1.0
13 Roofs B. Used for promenade walk 3.0
C. Used for garden and assembly occupancy 5.0
D. Heliport 5.0
14 Machine Rooms HVAC room, break rooms. Mechanical rooms, etc. 5.0
15 Open space Outdoor square 12.0
1) Load scale shall be defined by considering actual vehicle weight for design load of
trucks of total weight > 18 tons.
0303.2.2 Increase by Vibration and Shock
When it is inappropriate to apply <Table 0303.2.1> due to vibrations or shocks, the live
load shall be calculated by increasing the scale of the live load according to the actual
conditions.
0303.2.3 Wall Partitioning Load
When it is possible to install movable light weight wall partitioning in an office or a
building for similar use, at least 1kN/m2 should be added to the basic equal-distributed
live load as the wall partitioning load. This may be excluded when the basic live load is
higher than 4kN/m2.
0303.3 Concentrated Live Load
0303.3.1 Basic Concentrated Live Load
The minimum values of the concentrated live loads that are applied to the structures by
usage are shown in <Table 0303.3.1>.
0303.3.2 Working Point
The concentrated live load should work on the points where the stress of each location of
a member is maximized.
0303.3.3 Contact Surface of Load
The concentrated live load should be assumed to be equally distributed on the contact
surfaces of the load as shown in <Table 0303.3.1>.
<Table 0303.3.1> Basic Concentrated Live Loads
Live Load Load contacts
Use Relevant Parts of the structure
(kN) (m×m)
A. Wards and corridors,
1 Hospitals B. Operation rooms, common rooms and corridors 10.0 0.75X0.75
A. General offices and corridors

B. Lobby
2 Offices C. Offices for special use and corridors 10.0 0.75X0.75
D. Archives
A. Class rooms and corridors

B. Lobby
3 Schools C. General laboratories 5.0 0.75X0.75
D. Laboratory for weight materials
A. Stores, departments stores (ground floor part)

4 Stores B. Stores, departments stores (2nd and higher floor parts) 5.0 0.75X0.75
C. warehouse-style megastores
A. Reading rooms and corridors
5 Libraries 5.0 0.75X0.75
B. Book shelves
A. Passengers only 15.0 0.11X0.11
Parking
6 B. Trucks and buses Maximum
Lots 0.11X0.11
wheel loads
A. Light factories 10.0 0.75X0.75
7 Plants
B. Heavy industry plants 15.0 0.75X0.75
A. Any roofs that are given loads of maintenance workers 1.5 0.75X0.75
Maximum acceptable taking off load
28.0 0.20X0.20
< 20kN
B. Heliports Maximum acceptable taking off load
< 60kN 84.0 0.30X0.30
C. Panel points of Upper roofs used for plant,
8 Roofs main structural warehouse and auto service center.
10.0
materials and
truss bottom
chord members Upper roof for other use
of roof which is
exposed to the 1.5
upper part of
working site
9 Stair treads 1.35 0.05X0.05
0303.4 Reduction of Live Load

0303.4.1 Reduction Factor
When the effect area is larger than 36m², the equally distributed live loads except the
roof live load may be reduced by multiplying the basic equally-distributed live loads in
<Table 0303.2.1> by the following live load reduction factor C.
C = 0.3 + 4.2/√A (0303.4.1)
In this formula, C： live load reduction factor

A : Effect area (A≥36 m2)
0303.4.2 Effect Area
4 times of the load area is applied to columns or foundations, 2 times of the load area
beams and the actual live load to slabs. For cantilever part of the load area, 4 or 2 times
of the load area is not applied but simply added to the effect area.
0303.4.3 Restrictions
(1) The reduction factor C for members supporting one floor shall be < 0.5 and C for
members supporting two floors shall be < 0.4.
(2) The live load exceeding 5kN/m2 cannot be reduced but the reduction factor C of
members supporting more than 2 floors may be applied up to 0.8.
(3) The live load may not be reduced for the use of a public gathering with less than
5kN/m2 of the live load.
(4) The live load for passenger cars only parking lot cannot be reduced but the reduction
factor C of members supporting more than 2 floors may be applied up to 0.8.
(5) The effect area of 1-direction slab shall be calculated by multiplying the breadth by
the slab span. In this, the breadth of the slab shall be less than 1.5 times of the slab span.
0303.5 Reduction of the Roof Live Load
The roof live load may be reduced in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
0303.5.1 Reduction according to the Load Area and Roof Pitch
The roof live load L0 in <Table 0303.2.1> may be reduced by the formula (0303.5.1)
according to the load area of members and the roof pitch.
Lr = L0 R1R2 (0.6≤ L r≤ 1.0)(0303.5.1)
Here, Lr: roof live load against horizontal projection area (kN/m2)
Reduction factor tables R1 and R2 are calculated by the following formula:
1.0 (At ≤ 20.0m2)
R1= 1.2- 0.01At (20.0m2＜ At＜ 60.0m2)
0.6(A t ≥ 60.0m2)
Here, At: Load area of members (m2)

1.0 (F ≤ 1/3)
R2 = 1.2 — 0.6F (1/3 < F < 1)
0.6(F ≥ 1)
Here, F: Pitch of the tilted roof

Height of arch and dome (height/span) × 8/3
0303.5.2 Reduction according to usage
When roof top is used for a garden or assembly occupancy, the live load shall be reduced
by applying 0303.4 (Reduction of the Live Load).
0303.6 Quasi Live Load
0303.6.1 Hand-rail Load
The concentrated load of 0.9kN for hand-rails of roofs, balconies and staircases, 0.4
kN/m for residential building and the horizontal equal-distributed load of 0.8 kN/m for
other structures shall be considered.
0303.6.2 Side Load of Interior Walls
Any interior wall more than 1.8 m installed in a building must be designed to be safe
against the equal-distributed load > 0.25 kN/m2 that works on the wall surface in
perpendicular angle direction, except for light weight movable wall partitions and similar
items.
0304 Snow Load
(1) When the effect of snow load on the roof is superior to the minimum live load
defined in 0303.2 (Equal-Distributed Live Load) and 0303.6 (Quasi Live Load), the
snow load defined in this paragraph shall be applied.
(2) For wall surfaces or surfaces of other structures where the snow load is expected to
work, the effects of the snow load should be considered.
(3) The roof snow load for design shall be calculated based on the basic value of the
ground snow load considering basic roof snow load factor, exposure factor, temperature
factor, importance factor and appearance factor of the roof as well as other load
distribution state.
(4) The basic value of the ground snow load is based on the biggest vertical loose snow
for 100 years of the return period and using basic values of <Table 0304.2.2>. When the
100-year-return period is not applied depending on usage of a structure, the ground snow
load value calculated by adjusting the return period may be used.
0304.2 Ground Snow Load
0304.2.1 Applying Conditions of Ground Snow Load
(1) The ground snow load for calculation of the roof snow load is based on <Table
0304.2.1>. When using <Table 0304.2.1>, it is important to consider the fact that local
changes may be caused according to local climate and topology. Under certain
topological conditions such as highlands or mountain areas, <Table 0304.2.1> may not
be used even in the same region.
(2) The ground snow load of certain areas may be calculated by considering the biggest
vertical loose snow and average snow weight obtained from field researches.
(3) The minimum ground snow load shall be 0.5 kN/m2.
0304.2.2 Basic Ground Snow Load
The basic value Sg of the ground snow load for a structure according to the 100-year-
return period for each region is shown in <Table 0304.2.2>.
<Table 0304.2.2>Basic ground snow load Sg
Regions Ground snow load (kN/m²)
Seoul, Suwon, Chuncheon, Seosan, ChoungJu, DaeJeon,
ChupungRyungm Pohang, Gunsan, Daegu, Jeonju,
0.5
Ulsan, Kwangju, Busan, TongYoung, Mokpo, Yeosu,
Jeju, Seogwipo, Jinju, Icheon
Jeongeub, Uljin 0.65
Incheon 0.8
Sokcho 2.0
Kangneung 3.0
Uleungdo, Daekwanryung 7.0
0304.3 Snow load on flat roof
Snow load on flat roof Sf calculated by the following formula (0304.3.1):
Sf = Cb⋅Ce⋅Ct⋅Is⋅Sg (kN/m2) (0304.3.1)
0304.3.1 Basic roof snow load factor Cb
Basic roof snow load factor Cb is generally 0.7.
0304.3.2 Exposure factor Ce
Exposure factor Ce is generally determined as shown in <Table 0304.3.2>.
< Table 0304.3.2> Exposure factor Ce
Surrounding environments Ce
A. An area with exposed roofs due to the absence of wind
screen in any side by the surrounding environment of
0.8
topology, highly built structures and trees and where
strong wind blows
B. An area where strong wind blow and with a few
windscreens 0.9
C. A location where the reduction of the roof load by

removal of snow by the wind may not be expected due to 1.0
topology, highly built structures or a few trees nearby.
D. An area where the wind effect is not significant and with
presence of windscreens provided by topology, highly 1.1
built structures or a few trees.
E. A dense forest area where the wind effect is almost
absent and with roofs located between densely populated 1.2
needle leaved trees.
Note) (1) The surrounding environment refers to the environment which is sustainable
for the life span of structures.
(2) Obstacles within a distance of 10 h0 (height from the roof level to an obstacle) may be
windscreens.
(3) For obstacles formed by deciduous trees from which the leaves fall in winter, Ce may
be reduced by 0.1.
0304.3.3 Temperature Factor Ct
Temperature Factor Ct is generally determined as shown in <Table 0304.3.3>.
<Table 0304.3.3> Temperature factor Ct
Heating conditions Ct
Heated structure (snow load controlling
1.0
structure)
Non-heated structure (snow load non-
1.2
controlling structure)
0304.3.4 Importance factor IS

Importance factor Is is generally determines by < Table 0304.3.4>.
< Table 0304.3.4> Importance factor Is
Importance Special 1 2 3
Importance
1.2 1.1 1.0 0.8
Factor Is
0304.3.5 Snow Load on Low Slope Roof

(1) The minimum tolerance of the flat roof snow load shall be applied to gable roofs
with lower slope (attics and over-hanged ridge < 15) and curved roofs with < 10° of a
contact angle from eaves to the top based on the ground level.
(2) The flat roof snow load in an area where the ground snow load is less than 1.0kN/m2
shall be higher than the value calculated with the ground snow load multiplying by the
importance factor.
(3) The flat roof snow load in an area where the ground snow load is higher than
1.0kN/m2 shall be higher than the value of 1.0 kN/m2 multiplying by the importance
factor.
(4) The reduction of the live load is not considered for the snow load.
0304.4 Snow Load on Slope Roof
The slope roof snow load Ss shall be calculated by the following formula defined in
(0304.4.1): multiply the flat roof snow load defined in (0304.4.1) by the roof slope
factor Cs.
Ss= Cs⋅Sf (kN/m2)(0304.4.1)
The slope factors for warm roofs and cold roofs are based on 0304.4.1 up to 0304.4.4.
0304.4.1 Warm Roof Slope Angle Coefficient
(1) If Roof Surface is easy to slip and is warm delivering heat, Roof Slope angle
Coefficient shall be made by the dotted line [figure 0304.4 (a)].
(2) If Roof Surface is not easy to slip and is warm delivering heat, Roof Slope angle
Coefficient shall be made by the dotted line [figure 0304.4 (a)].
0304.4.2 Cool Roof Slope angle Coefficient
(1) If Roof Surface is easy to slip and cool not delivering heat, Roof Slope angle
Coefficient shall be made by the dotted line [figure 0304.4 (b)].
(2) If Roof Surface is not easy to slip and cool not delivering heat, Roof Slope angle
Coefficient shall be made on the solid line [figure 0304.4 (b)].
Not easy to Not easy
slide surface to
Not easy Not easy

slide surface
Roof slope angle Roof slope angle
(a) Heated Roof, C =1.0 (b) Non Heated Roof, C >1.0

t t
[figure 0304.4] Roof Slope angle Coefficient Cs

0304.4.3 Curved Roof Surface Slope angle Coefficient
(1) For Slope angle Coefficient of The curved Roof Surface [figure 0304.4] shall be
applied by considering the angle of a level surface with slope of each tangent from eaves
to the top as the roof slope angle. In this case, where the angle of tangential slope in the
curved roof with the level surface is 70º shall be eaves. Snow load should not be applied
for the parts with angle exceeding 70º.
(2) Curved Roof Surface Slope angle Coefficient shall be based on [figure 0304.], Slope
angle means angle (viewpoint) of a level surface with tangential slope from the eaves to
the top.
0304.4.4 Continuous Plate, Cylindrical and saw blade Type of Roof Slope angle
Coefficient
Cc Continuous Plate, Cylindrical and saw blade Type of Roof Slope angle Coefficient is
1.0 regardless of slope angle.

0304.5 Unbalanced Snow Load of Roof
Snow Load of Roof should consider the impact of the wind for t calculation of unbalanced
loads in all directions, and should be divided into balanced load and unbalanced load.
0304.5.1 Unbalanced Snow Load of sloped Roof
(1) If Roof Slope angle is less than 15º or exceeding 70º, it shall not consider in
Unbalanced Snow Load.
Wind
Balanced load
Unbalanced load
* If the roof gradient exceeds 15 or 70 degree, the unbalanced weight doesn’t need to be considered.
[Figure 0304.5.1] Balanced Snow Load and Unbalance Snow Load of Sloped Roof,
(2) In other cases, snow load of Roof Surface that hugs shall not consider as in [figure
0304.5.1]. Snow Load on the other side of, sloped shall consider1.5Ss/Ce.
0304.5.2 Unbalanced Snow Load on curved Roof
(1) In curved Roof, the part that tangential slope angle with level surface is above 70º
shall not consider Snow Load.
(2) The slope angle of straight line that connects the top of the roof where Slope or eaves
exceeds 70º can be considered as equivalent slope angle of curved roof to use [Figure
0304.4].
(3) If an equivalent slope is more than 60º, less than 10º or the tangential slope angle of
curved roof exceeds 70º with surface level, Unbalanced Load shall not be considered.
(4) In other cases, an unbalanced snow load is calculated following the load distribution in
[figure 0304.5.2], The Wind Blowing Direction shall not consider the Snow Load.
Wind
Eaves Peak
(a) Eave slope 30°
Wind
Eaves Peak
30 Point eave
Table is load distribution when other roofs support
(b) 30° Eave slope 70°
Wind
Eaves Peak 30 area 70 Area eave

Table is load distribution when other roofs support
(c) Eave slope 70°
[Figure 0304.5.2] Unbalance Snow Load Distribution of The curved Roof

(5) In case, the ground or different roof is accessible within 0.9m from the eaves of the
curved roof (b) or (c) [figure 0304.5.2].it is not considering the Snow Load Reduction
due to the increased slope.
0304.5.3. Unbalanced accumulated snow weight on the consistently folded, cylinder,
and saw blade shape roofs
(1) It is assumed to have a constant value 2Ss/Ce, as it shows the Loading Point between
eaves and 30º slope angle with dotted line.
Balanced Load
Unbalanced Load
* this figure may be smaller than 〔0304.5.3 compare)
[figure 0304.5.3] Balanced Snow Load and Unbalanced Snow Load of Saw blade Type
of roof.
(2) The Snow Height of the Roof Cast is calculated by the value divided form [figure
0304.5.1] snow load expression. Roof Cast Snow Surface will not be higher than the
Snow Surface of Roof Floor. Therefore, Unbalance Snow Load of The Roof Cast can
be able to replace a value less than 3Sf /Ce.,
0.43Sg + 2.3≤5.6 (kN/m2) (0304.5.1)
0304.5.4 Partial Loading
It should be considered that the adverse effect may occur when removed a Half Load
Balancing or any part inside the roof structure to support Snow Loads.
0304.6 Local Snow Load of Roof.
It should be considered Local Snow Loads due to the amount of the Snow Accumulation
around protrusions or High Adjacent Structures or slips.
0304.6.1 Lower Side Roof.
For the adjacent Buildings or such as High Portion of the Structure. The roof which
positions are lower than the Environment, load by additional amount of snow
accumulation due to wind influence shall be considered.
0304.6.1.1 Areas with smaller Snow Load.
In areas with ground Snow Loads smaller than 0.5 kN/m², it does not consider additional
loads by the amount of snow deposit weight.
0304.6.1.2 Lower Side Roof in Structure
Additional loads that are super positioning to balanced snow load by the amount of the
snow accumulation to lower side roof is calculated as in [Figure 0304.6.1]. If hc/hb is
smaller than 0.2, it does not need to consider loads by the amount of snow accumulation.
hd, is the depth of snow accumulation requested fromThe Tt [figure 0304.6.2] , it does not
need to be larger than hc. W is the width of snow accumulation or equal to 4hd. If Length
of Low Side Roof is greater, the portion beyond the end of the roof is ignored. The Load
Accumulation Maximum is multiplying of type [figure 0304.5.1] and hd.
Additional load due to accumulating amount
Balanced accumulated snow load
[Figure 0304.6.1] Distribution of accumulation amount load of lower side roofs

In case
hd
D
e
p
t
h
o
f
In case Use
Sg : Ground Snow Load (kN/m2)
[figure 0304.6.2] The Amount of Depth Accumulation is hd

0304.6.1.3 Adjacent Structures and N-Environment.
Additional Load by amount of accumulation from the N-Environment or high structure
within 6 m is obtained with the applied method to the above 0304.1.2, 0304.6.1.1.
Calibration base on adjacent distance S is used by multiplying (6 – S)/6 by additional loads.
However if it is over than 6 m, the additional load
shall not be considered.
0304.6.2 Projecting Part Roof
(1) If the Length of Projecting Part Roof is over than 4.5, It shall apply 0304.6.1 in all
projecting part directions which additional load is calculated by the amount of
accumulation.
(2) The amount of accumulation of surrounding Roof that is caused by Parapets is
calculated by using 0.5hd, ½ of the depth of amount of accumulation in [Picture 0304.6.2].
Where is, lu the length of parapets does not go over 15m and it is the maximum distance
from Projecting Part to the edge to the roof.
(3) The amount of accumulation where Projecting Part are intersecting uses the greater
value between 2(unit) of amount of accumulation.
0304.6.3 Snow Slip
(1) Snow Load functioning as additional load to slide down in Low Side Roof is
calculated under the assumption that the balance snow load of high side roof slips toward
Low Side Roof. Roof Slope angle Coefficient regardless of the state of the high side roof
surface when calculating total additional load output uses value are shown as the value of
the solid line [figure 0304.4].
(2) In the condition that that it is expected that the snow from the high side roof cannot be
pushed down further due to already accumulated snow or, snow from the high side roof is
sliding and pushing down the snow on the low side roof, sliding snow load can be
reduced.
(3) The Snow Load Slip is considered and applied by overlaying with the Balance Snow
Load, Additional Load does not have to be consider by slip if you separated more than 6m
or hc between Low Side Roof and High Side Roof.
0304.6.4 Eaves Projecting
If eaves are projected in support points of the roof structure, snow load with regular
minimum 2.0Sf is assumed to apply to the projecting part by considering if snow is being
frozen or accumulated.
0304.7 Snow and Rain Mixed Loads
0304.7.1 Additional Load by Rain
If a Heavy Rain falls on the roof where there is Snow pilled already in area additional load
of <Table 0304.7.1> by rain pouring on snow should be considered.
<Table 0304.7.1> Additional Load by Rain and Snow
Roof Slope angle Mixed loads following additional loads of snow and rain
< 1/24 0.25kN/m2
≥ 1/24 0
0304.7.2 Water Condensate Load

When water Condensate Load is formed from rainwater above snow or snow melt water,
if appropriate slope is not given for drainage, deflection in the roof should consider loads
since formed.
0304.8 The Others Snow Load
If you recognize the effect the following Rest of Snow Load has on the safety of structure,
its influence should be considered.
(1) Out Side Wall Structure is considered a side pressure by the amount of the snow to
expose directly.
(2) When structure is likely to be buried in the middle of the snow. it is considered the
load based on the snow sedimentation.
(3) If snow is blowing at veranda etc., it is considered the Snow Blowing Load.
0305 Wind Load
0305.1 General Items
0305.1.1 Scope
(1) This section is applied if the calculation calculates a minimal wind load with
assumption of elastic movement of buildings and the structure by the wind.
(2) Main Frame Design of Wind Load is applied to the design of buildings main frame.
(3) Exterior Design of Wind Load is applied to design of exterior and minor frame
(hereinafter referred to an exterior) to support Exterior.
0305.1.2 Basic Principles
(1) Wind Load is classified into wind load for exterior design and roof wind load, main
frame for the design, horizontal wind load and, is determined by multiplying valid area by
each designed wind pressure.
(2) Main Frame Design of Wind Pressure Design is determined by multiplying external
pressure coefficient or wind velocity coefficient, gust effect factor, designed speed
pressure. However, it should also be considered the influence of inside pressure when
calculating roof wind load and part of an open-type building.
(3) Designed Wind Pressure for exterior design is determined by multiplying designed
speed pressure by peak internal pressure coefficient, peak external pressure coefficient
that are considered along with external pressure coefficient, internal pressure and gust
effect factor.
(4) Designed speed Pressure is determined by multiplying the square of designed wind
speed and density of air.
(5) In normal typical buildings, the standard height is the average height of a roof, and
based on the standard height at the rate of pressure, the wind loads is based on speed
pressure rate of the standard height.
(6) The Calculation Method of The Wind Load in this section shall be applied when
evaluating wind load of the wind directions caused by the disturbance of winter wind.
0305.1.3 Special Wind Load
If in each of the following conditions special wind load should be calculated with the
special effects to occur on the buildings and structure due to wind in addition to wind load
which is calculated according to 0305.1.2
0305.1.3.1 Building that should be considering wind vibration affect.
In the following flexible structure with the great aspect ratio (1), (2) wind load should be
calculated considering the dynamic affect by the torsional vibration and Vibration in the
perpendicular direction of wind in addition to the wind direction vibration by the wind
tunnel experiment.
(1) Rectangular Flat Buildings
H
√BD ≥ 3.5(0305.1.1)
In here, H: Height of Buildings (m)

B: Width of Buildings (m)
D: Depth of Buildings (m)
(2) Circular Flat Buildings
H ≥ 7 (0305.1.2)
d
In here, d : External Diameter of Buildings (m)
0305.1.3.2 Special Roof Framing and Exterior decoration for Constructions
If the exterior is unsuitable to apply this section due to vibration by scale and cases,
construction method of the roof framing that is expected unstable air force vibration
because of and low stiffness lightweight of air membrane roof, long span suspension,
wind loads should be calculated by Wind Tunnel Experiments.
0305.1.3.3 Tunnel Wind Effects to occur in Construction Branch
If you are concerned about the construction branch where the tunnel Wind Effect is being
serious caused by the effect of local ground branch type and product.its effectiveness
through the Wind Tunnel Experiments should be determined.
0305.1.3.4 Buildings with concern of the Effect of Adjacent effects
If due to the construction of new buildings, wind loads of adjacent existing building can
be increased, interactive effectiveness with adjacent buildings through wind tunnel
experiments should be reviewed.
0305.1.3.5 Buildings with Special Shape
If this section does not apply to the building with special shape, wind load should be
evaluated by Wind Tunnel Experiments.
0305.2 Main Frame Design for Horizontal Wind Load
Wf is Main Frame Design for Horizontal Wind Load and is calculated by the following
equations :
Wf = Pf A (N)(0305.2.1)
Where, Pf ： Main Frame Design for Designed Wind Pressure (N/m²)
A: Effective Water Pressure Area (m²)
From above, Wind Pressure Design is calculated as follows, based on the degree of the
closed and opened building.
0305.2.1 Enclosed Buildings
Pf Main Frame Design for Wind Pressure Design of Enclosed Buildings is calculated with
the following expression:
Pf= Gf(q zC pe1 – q HC pe2) (N/m2) (0305.2.2)
where, qH : the average height of the roof surface for designed speed Pressure in H (N/m2)
qz : Designed speed Pressure for any height on the surface(N/m2) Z (Following 0305.5)
Gf : Main Frame Design for Wind Direction Gust Effect Factor (Following 305.6)
Cpe1: The External Pressure Coefficient of Wind Upper Wall(Following 0305.7.1)
Cpe2: The External Pressure Coefficient of Wind Lower(Following 0305.7.1)
0305.2.2 Part Open-Type Buildings
Main Frame Design for Design Wind Pressure for Part Open-Type Buildings is
calculated by dividing into the following two kinds as below.
(1) Wind Upper Wall
Pf =qz Gf Cpe – qH G pi C pi (N/m2)(0305.2.3)
(2) Side wall and Wind Lower Wall
Pf =qH(Gf Cpe – G pi Cpi) (N/m2)(0305.2.4)
In here, qH : Designed speed Pressure (N/m2) for the average height H of the roof
surface
qz : Designed Speed Pressure (N/m2) of any height z on the surface(N/m2)(Following
0305.5) Following 0305.5)
Gf : Main Frame Design for Wind Directions Gust Effect Factor (Following 0305.6)
Gpi : Internal Pressure Gust Effect Factor (Following 0305.7.2)
Cpe : External Pressure Coefficient (Following 0305.7.1)
Cpi : Internal Pressure Coefficient (Following 0305.7.2)
0305.2.3 Open Type of Buildings and Other Different Structures
Main Frame Design for designed Wind Pressure for Open Type of Buildings and other
Different Structures Design is calculated according to the following expression :
Pf =q zG fC f (N/m2) (0305.2.5)
where, qz ： for Rate Pressure Design (N/m2) for any height z on the surface
(Following 0305.5)
Gf : Main Frame Design for Wind Directions Gust Effect Factor (Following 0305.6)
Cf： Wind Velocity Coefficient (Following 0305.7.3)
0305.3 Main Frame Design for Roof Wind Load
Wr is Main Frame Design for Roof Wind Load is calculated with the following
expression :
Wr= PrA (N)(0305.3.1)
where, pr : Designed Roof Wind Pressure (N/m2)
A : is Effective water Pressure Area (m²)
From above, designed Wind Pressure is calculated as follow, based on Special shape of
Buildings.
0305.3.1 Enclosed Type of Buildings and Part Open-Type Structures
pr Roof Wind Pressure Design in Main Frame Design of Enclosed Type Buildings and
Part Open-Type Structures is calculated as the following expression.
pr = qH(G pe C pe – G piC pi) (N/m2) (0305.3.2)
where, qH : Designed Rate Pressure for the table of the average height H of the roof
surface(N/m2)
Gpe : Roof External Pressure Gust Effect Factor (Following 00305.6.3)
Gpi : Internal Pressure Gust Effect Factor (Following 0305.7.2)
Cpe : External Pressure Coefficient (Following 0305.7.1)
Cpi : Internal Pressure Coefficient (Following 0305.7.2)
0305.3.2 Self-Support Roof Surface
Designed roof Wind Pressure Design in Main Frame Design of Self-Support Roof Surface
is calculated with the following expression:
pr = qH G pe C f (N/m2) (0305.3.3)
where, qH : the average height H of the roof surface for designed speed Pressure (N/m2)
Gpe : External Pressure Gust Effect Factor of the Roof(Following 00305.6.3)
Cf: : Wind Velocity Coefficient of Self Support Roof Surface (Following 0305.7.3.2)
0305.4 Wind Load for Exterior Design
Wc is Wind Load for Exterior Design is calculated with the following expression
Wc = p cA (N)(0305.4.1)
In here, pc : Wind Pressure for Exterior Design (N/m2) however, it must not be smaller than
500n/m2
A : Effective water Pressure Area (m²)
Designed wind Pressure Design in the above expression is calculated based on the
Height of Roof Surface as below.
0305.4.1 The average height of the roof surface is more than 20 m in the building
pc , the designed Wind Pressure for Exterior Design, of the average height of the roof
surface that is more than 20 m of the building is calculated by devising into the
following two kinds.
(1) Exterior wall with Static Pressure
pc = q z(GC pe – GC pi) (N/m2) (0305.4.2)
(2) Exterior walls and Roof Surface with Partial Pressure
p c = q H(GC pe – GC pi) (N/m2) (0305.4.3)
Where, qH : the average height H of the roof surface for designed speed Pressure(N/m2)
qz : Designed speed Pressure for any height z on the surface(N/m2)
GC pe : Peak External Pressure Coefficient for Exterior Design (Following 0305.8.1)
GC pi : Peak internal Pressure Coefficient for Exterior Design (Following 0305.8.2)
0305.4.1 The average height of the roof surface is less than 20 m in the building
Designed Wind Pressure for Exterior Design of the building with the average height of
the roof surface that is less than 20 m is calculated with the following calculation.
However, qH is applied with the designed speed Pressure C of surface roughness
section
pc = qH (GC pe – GC pi) (N/m2) (0305.4.4)
Where, qH : Designed speed Pressure (N/m2) of the average height H of the roof surface
qz : Designed speed Pressure(N/m2) any height z on the surface
GCpe : Peak External Pressure Coefficient for Exterior Design (Following 0305.8.1)
GCpi : Peak internal Pressure Coefficient for Exterior Design (Following 0305.8.2)
0305.5 Designed Velocity (Speed) Pressure
qz is designed Velocity Pressure for H-Design and is calculated by the expression
(0305.5.1 a) and qH is the designed Velocity Pressure for average roof surface height
and is calculated by the expression (0305.5.1 b)
q z= ½ pV 2z (N/m2) (0305.5.1 a)
q z= ½ pV 2H (N/m2) (0305.5.1 b)
Where, p : 1.251kg/m3 applied as equal density air.
VH : Designed wind velocity (m/s) for the average height H of the roof surface from the
surface design area
VZ : Any height z from the surface design area for the wind velocity design (m/s) in z
0305.5.1 Wind Velocity(=Speed) Design
V z,V H is Wind Velocity Design calculated by the following equation:
V z = V 0 · K zr · K zt · I w (m/s) (0305.5.2)
Where, V 0: Basic Wind Velocity (m/s) (Following 0305.5.2)
Kzr : Wind Velocity height Distribution Coefficient (Following 0305.5.3)
Kzt : Ground Type Coefficient (Following 0305.5.4)
I w : Important Coefficient in Building(Following 0305.5.5)
0305.5.2 Basic Wind Velocity
Basic Wind Velocity (V0) shall be determined by [figure 0305.5.1] and construction
points<based on table 0305.5.1. However, if construction areas are located between line
and Isotachs line, as shown in [figure 0305.5.1] interpolating values between isotachs can
be interpolated to be used.Also, if there is an valid observational data nearby construction
point, it can be set by this.
<Table 0305.5.1> V0 Basic Wind Velocity in each Area for reproduction in 100 years period.
V0
Area Area (m/s)
Seoul, Incheon, Gang-Hwa,Ongjin, Kimpo, Guri, Suwon, Gunpo,
Seoul City, Osan, Hwaseong, Ansan, Sihong, Euihwang, Pucheon, Goyang, 30
Incheon Si, Pyongtaek, Anseong, Anyang, Gwacheon, Gwangmyeong.
Gyeong-Gi Euijeongbu, Dongducheon, Yangju, Paju, Yeoncheon, Pocheon,
Do Nam Yangju, Gapyeong, Hanam, Seongnam, Gwangju, 25
Yangpyeong, Yeoju, Incheon, Yong-in.
Sokcho, Yangyang, Gangrung 40
Goseong, Donghae, Samcheon 35
Gangwon-Do Yanggu, Cheolwon, Hwacheon, Chuncheon, Hongcheon,
Huingseong, Wonju, Pyeongchang, Jeongseon, Yeongwol, Inje, 25
Taebaek.
<Table 0305.5.1>V0 Basic Wind Velocity in each Area for reproduction in 100 years period
(continue)
Area Area V0 (m/s)
Taejeon Seocheon, Boryeong, Hongseong, Yesan, Seosan, Taean, Asan,
35
Metropolitan Cheonan, Yeon-gi, Cheongju, Cheongwon.
City Taejeon, Gyeoryong, Jincheon, Jeungpyeong, Dangjin. 30
Chungcheon Cheongyang, Gongju, Buyeo, Noksan, Geumsan, Eumseong, Chungju,
25
Province Jecheon, Danyang, Gwesan, Boeun, Yeongdong, Okcheon.
Pohang, Ulrung(Dokdo) 45
Pusan Pusan, Gijang 40
Province Gyeongju, Yeongdeok, Uljin, Yangsan, Kimhae, Jinhae, Changwon,
35
Daegu Masan, Tongyeong, Geoje, Goseong, Namhae, Sacheon, Ulsan, Ulju
Province Haman 30
Ulsan Bonghwa, Yeongju, Yecheon, Mungyeong, Sangju, Chupungryeong,
Province Andong, Yeongyang, Cheongsong, Euiseong, Gunwi, Gumi, Chilgok,
Gyeongsang Kimcheon, Seongju, Goryeong, Daegu, Dalseong, Gyeongsan, 25
Nam-Buk Do Yeongcheon, Cheongdo, Changnyeong, Euiryeong, Jinju, Geochang,
Sancheong, Milyang, Hapcheon, Hamyang, Hadong,
Gunsan 40
Gwangju Iksan, Wando, Haenam, Jindo, Mokpo, Yeosu, Goheung, Sin-an 35
Metropolitan Gimje, Suncheon, Yeonggwang, Hampyeong, Gwangju, Hwasun, Naju,
30
Jeonla Nam Muan, Yeongam, Gangjin,Jangheung, Boseong,Gwangyang.
Buk Do Wanju, Muju, Jeonju, Jin-an, Jangsu, Imsil, Jeongeup, Gochang,
25
Sunchang, Namwon, Jangseong, Damyang, Gokseong, Gurye, Buan
Jeju Do Seogwipo, Jeju, Seongsanpo 40
Footnotes) (1) Area names from “South Korea Province Category” based on January 1,
2008 from the national statistical office
was created with cities and counties as the smallest unit.
(2) For the area names shown in [figure 0305.5.1] and the table area (Bold Post), the
places with a meteorological office is where there is a meteorological office is and
where there is no meteorological office is where there are cities and counties.
(3) If construction site is in any other areas other than county, city hall locations that
isn’t specified in the table or due to the large range of city, is far from the county and
city hall location, this table cannot be used and you should use the Basic Wind
Velocity corresponding to the construction point from [figure 0305.5.1].
0305.5.3 Wind Velocity height Distribution Coefficient

(1) Wind Velocity height Distribution Coefficient (Kzr) for flat areas shall be
determined by table 0305.5.2. With Wind Velocity height Distribution Coefficient α
and standard atmospheric boundary layer Height Wind Zb, Start gradient wind Height
Zg according to surface roughness of construction point in (2) as below.
0305.5.2 Kzr Wind Velocity height Distribution Coefficient for horizontal area
Z height from ground Surface Roughness Section

surface (m) A: B: C: D:
Z ≤ Zb 0.58 0.81 1.0 1.13
Zb < z ≤ Zg 0.22 za 0.45 za 0.71 za 0.97 za
(2) Surface Roughness Section set by <table 0305.5.3>following ground state of

surrounding areas of construction point and, value a and Zb, Zg shall be <table
0305.5.4>following Surface Roughness Section
<Table 0305.5.3>Surface Roughness Section
Surface surrounding area ground state
Roughness
Section
A concentrated area (zone) of high-rise buildings with
A:
more than 10 floors in a large metropolitan center.
A concentrated area(zone) of buildings such as homes
B: with height more or less of 3.5m
A concentrated area(zone) scattered with layered buildings
Areas scattered with Obstacle of height about 1.5 ~ 10 m
C:
in and areas scattered with low-rise buildings
Areas with the average height of surrounding obstacles in
D: less than 1.5 m, or almost no obstacles
Seashore, plain, Air-Field
[Figure 0305. 5. 1] V0 (m/s) Basic Wind Velocity for 100 years period of reproduction
<Table 0305.5.4> Zb, Zg, a
Surface Roughness
A: B: C: D:
Section
Zb (m) 20 m 15m 10m 5.0m
Zg (m) 500m 400m 300m 250m
a 0.33 0.22 0.15 0.10
0305.5.4 Topography Coefficient

(1) Kzt Topography Coefficient on flat areas free from slopes and mountains, hills is 1.0
(2) Kzt The scope for the parts that needs proportional increase of wind velocity such as
nearby the peaks, slopes, and mountains, hills is same as <table 0305.5.5>. Topography
Coefficient is calculated as the formula (0305.5.3).
<Table 0305.5.5> Kzt Scope
Proportional Scope
Topography
increase of wind Wind Upper
classification Wind Lower Side
Velocity Scope Side
horizontal
HIlls,
distance(from the Larger value between 1.6 H and 1.5 Lu
mountain
Apex)
horizontal Larger value
Larger value between 4 H and
Slopes distance(from the between 1.6 H
3.5 Lu
Apex) and 1.5 Lu
Wind direction
Horizontal boundary Horizontal boundary surface
surface Peek
Integrated distance until surface (5 H)
Or Or
Bigger value Bigger value
among them among them
(a) Hill, mountain
Horizontal boundary Horizontal boundary surface

surface
Wind direction
Peek
Slope
Or Or
(Bigger value (Bigger value
among them) among them)
(b) Slope area
k tSΦ’
Kzt = 1 + (1 + 3.7 I ) (0305.5.3)
Z
Where, kt: Shape Factor

= 1.4 slopes
= 1.4 + 3.6(Φ d – 0.05) ≤ 3.2 hill, mountain
Φd: Average Slope Distance that is 5 H from the Apex of hill, mountain, slopes to
hypotenuse Wind Lower Side
S: Location Factor
|x| z
= (1 – 1.5L * ) (1 – L ) ; For Φ ≤ 0.3
u
|x| 0.6z
= (1 – 1.5L * ) (1 – H ) ; For Φ ≤ 0.3
Wind Upper Side Moment

L*=Lu
L* = 1.7H；Φ＞(x-0.3)
Wind Lower Side
Larger value of L*= Lu + 1.7H .; Incline, Peak : Large value of 1.7H and Lu = L*
Slope: Larger value between 3.33H and 2Lu = L*
x : Horizontal distance from the Apex, m
z : Any height from local surface, m
H: Peak Height of incline, Peak, Slopes, m

Horizontal distance of from the apex of slopes, hills, mountains down to Wind Upper Side
in H/2 location, m
Φ Smaller Value between 0.3 or ': Φ
Φ: Wind Upper Side Slope (> Slope
I z: turbulence intensity at z height
Z g: Standard gradient wind high, m

0305.5.5 Important Factor
Iw Important Factor shall be determined by table <0305.5.6> depending on the importance
of building category defined in 0103.
<Table 0305.5.6> Important Factor (Iw )
Importance
special 1 2 3
Category
Importance Factor
1.00 0.95 0.90
(Iw )
Chapter) Iw Important Factor of buildings that slenderness ratio or building of 100m up, 35 floor up is 5 or more is 1.1
0305.6 Main Frame Design for Wind Direction Gust Effect Factor
0305.6.1 Rigid Structure
Gust Effect Factor ( G f)condition for wind direction for main frame design is calculated
for the rigid structure that can ignore resonance effect by wind or the wind or Natural
Frequency of Buildings (n 0) exceeding 1Hz as below.
Where, ɣf : Wind Speed Fluctuations Coefficient
I H: Turbulence Intensity in standard height

Bf : Non-Resonant Factor (Factor that shows the ingredient of frequency other than
natural frequency of change and displacement of buildings)
0.33: H > B
k = – 0.33：H <B
H: the height of buildings, m
H: the depth of buildings, m
LH: based on the height scale of turbulence, m
a: Distribution index of high wind velocity (Following 0305.5.3)

Zg: Standard gradient wind high, m (Following 0305.5.3)
0305.6.2 Flexible Structures
Main Frame Design Wind Directions Gust Effect Factor of Condition Flexible Structures
that cannot ignore resonance effects by wind or for n0 natural frequency of buildings are
less than 1Hz is calculated with the following formula.
However, if the H/B value is less than 7, slenderness structures with vertical line such as
funnel are being rigid.
Where, G f：Wind Direction Gust Effect Factor

ɣf : Wind Speed Fluctuations Coefficient
IH : Standards High Turbulence Intensity
Bf : Non-Resonant Factor (Factor that represents ingredient of frequency of vibration of

natural frequency of change and displacement of buildings)
0.33: H ≥ B
k = – 0.33: H < B
H: the height standard of buildings, m
B: Representative width of buildings, m
LH: Based on the height scale of turbulence, m
a: Distribution index of high wind velocity (Following 0305.5.3)

Zg: Standard gradient wind high, m (Following 0305.5.3)
gf : Peak Factor
ν f : Crossing level number, Hz
n 0 : Buildings Wind Direction 1st Specific Frequency Number, Hz(It shall be based on
Dynamic Structural Analysis)
Rf : Resonance Factor ( Factor that represents specific frequency number components of
variation and displacement of the building)
ζf : Buildings Wind Direction 1st attenuation constant(It shall be based on Dynamic

Structural Analysis)
F: Wind Power Spectrum Coefficient(Factor represents power of wind fluctuations in 1st
specific frequency number of buildings wind direction)
S f: Scale Factor (Factor represents degradation of the turbulence effect by the scale of the
building)
0305.6.3 Roof External Pressure Gust Effect Coefficient

External Pressure Gust Effect Coefficient Gpe for the flexible building with long span that
cannot ignore the roof of the resonant effect due to the wind -when the formula H/2 is met
- is calculated by the formula (0305.6.5). However, External Pressure Gust Effect
Coefficient of the roof and dome roof with the roof gradient 10° - 30° with the style of
rectangular flat roof is calculated based on the formula (0305.6.4).
Where, nr0: 1st natural vibration number of the roof

H: the average height of the roof surface (m)
VH: design wind velocity (m/s)
End (or However)

rpe = 2.2I2H+0.19
: When roof beam is parallel to the wind direction
: When roof beam is perpendicular to the wind direction
: When roof beam is lined up with the wind direction
: When roof beam is perpendicular to the wind direction

Where, IH: standard high turbulence intensity
l: Span of roof (m)
b: Load-sharing width (m)
n*r0 : dimensionless natural frequency (= nr0H/VH)
ζ r: 1st damping constant of the roof
0305.7 Wind Pressure Design Coefficients and Wind Coefficient for Main Frame,
Wind pressure and Force Coefficient for main frame design (coefficient of external
pressure, internal pressure coefficient) is determined by wind tunnel experiment or uses
these values that are set forth in this section.
0305.7.1 External Pressure Coefficient
0305.7.1.1 Enclosed Buildings
Main Frame Design for External Pressure Coefficient (Cpe) for enclosed buildings with
flat rectangular sides.0305.7.1 shall be determined by a} for the external pressure
coefficient of exterior walls in table 0305.7.1 and b) for the roof external pressure
coefficients in table 0305.7.1. It shall be applied to only the buildings with H/√BD aspect
ratio 8 or below.
<Table 0305.7.1> Cpe Enclosed Structure External Pressure Coefficient
Wind
(a) Flat side
Wind
(b) Section
a) The external pressure coefficient of the wall, Cpe

Applied pressure
D/B Cpe rates
Wind upper-side
All values 0.8 qz
wall
0~1 一0.5
Wind lower-side
2 一0.3 qH
wall
≥4 一0.2
sidewall All values 一0.7 qH
Foot notes) q z: Surface designed speed pressure for height z, N/m2
qH: Design Speed(velocity)
b) Roof Surface External Pressure Coefficient
Wind upper side
Wind angle of inclination (θ) Wind lower

direction H/D 10~1 side
0 5 20 30 40 50 ≥60
≤0.3 –0.7 0.21) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.010

–0.91) 0.0
orthogon
0.5 –0.7 –0.9 –0.75 –0.2 0.3 0.5 0.01θ –0.7
al ridge
1.0 –0.7 –0.9 –0.75 –0.2 0.3 0.5 0.01 θ
≥1.5 –0.7 –0.9 –0.9 –0.9 –0.35 0.2 0.01 θ
Ridge H/B or H/D≤2.5 –0.7 –0.7
direction H/B or H/D≤2.5 –0.8 –0.8
Foot Notes) (1) It should consider constant and negative pressure

(2) The straight line interpolation is used for intermediate values of slope angles and given
H/D on the table.
(3) B: the width, the direction length of wind right angle of the building, m
D: the depth, the length of the wind direction of the building, m
Z: Any height from local surface, m
H: the average height of the roof surface, m
qz: Designed speed Pressure (N/m2) for any height z = on the surface (Following 0305.5)
qH: Designed speed Pressure (N/m2) for the average height of the roof surface H
θ: Roof inclination, °
0305.7.1.2 Curved Roof

Cpe: Curved Roof Main Frame Design External Pressure Coefficient <Following table
0305.7.2> the external pressure coefficient of curved roof(Cpe )<table 0305.7.2 >
ɣ (f/l) Ratio Cpe

between height part ¼ Wind part ¼ Wind part ¼ Wind
Term
and span Upper Surface Upper Surface Lower Surface
0 ＜ ɣ＜ 0.2
0.2 ≤ ɣ＜ – 0.9 –0.7 ≤ ɣ＜ –0.5
hr ＞ 0 0.3* 1.5ɣ – 0.3 –0.7 ≤ ɣ＜ –0.5
0.3 ≤ ɣ＜ 2.5ɣ – 0.7 –0.7 ≤ ɣ＜ –0.5
0.6
hr = 0 0 < ɣ≤ 0.6 1.4ɣ –0.7 – ɣ –0.5
Footnotes) (1) In ¼ Part of Wind Upper Surface if 0.2 ≤ r ≤ 0.3 can be 6r–2.1 instead of 1.5r-
0.3
(2) ɣ = f/l
f: Height of Roof Surface, m
l: Roof Surface span, m
hr: Height from the ground up to the roof eaves of curved roof, m
Center
Wind upper side Wind lower side
0305.7.2 Internal Pressure Coefficient and Internal Pressure Gust Effect Factor
Internal Pressure Gust Effect Coefficient Cpi and Main Frame Design Internal Pressure
Coefficient Gpi depending on the size of opening part, shall be determined by
<Table 0305.7.3>.
Internal Pressure Gust Effect Coefficient and Cpi Main Frame Design Use Internal Pressure Coefficient Cpi < table 0305.7.3>
Enclosed Classification Cpi Gpi
Enclosed-type structure 0 or –0.4 1.3
+0.55 or
Part open-type structures 1.5
–0.55
Structure that has an excellent
0.7 or –0.7 2.0
opening
Open type of building 0 0
0305.7.3 Wind Force Coefficient

0305.7.3.1 Funnel, tanks, and any other structures similar to these
Cf Main Frame Design Wind Force Coefficient of funnel, tanks, and any other
structures similar to these shall be based on <table 0305.7.4> It is based on the height
ratio of sectional Shape, Surface Condition, and the minimum dimension of height to
cross section.
<Table 0305.7.4> Cf Wind Force Coefficient of funnel, tanks, and any other structures similar to these.
Cf:
Section Form Surface Condition
hc /d =1 hc /d =7 hc /d =25
Trapezium(perpendicular-
All cases 1.3 1.4 2.0
side style of wind)
Trapezium(diagonal cross-
All cases 1.0 1.1 1.5
section cyclone)
Hexagon or octagon All cases 1.0 1.2 1.4
Circle (d √qz>5.3) slippery surface 0.5 0.6 0.7
Rough surface (d'/d 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9
Very rough surface (d'/d
0.8 1.0 1.2
0.08)
Circle (d √qz≤ 5.3) All cases 0.7 0.8 1.2
Footnotes) (1) Value Cf that is not listed above is used with the linear interpolation depending on the hc/d value
(2) d: The minimum dimensions of diameter of circular cross section, or square, hexagonal or octagonal cross-section, m
d': the depth of the projecting elements such as rib and spoiler, m
hc: Height of tunnel, tanks, and any other similar structures, m
qz : Design Speed Pressure (N/m2) for any height z on the surface for (Following 0305.5)
0305.7.3.2 Independent Flight Roof
Main Frame Design for Wind Force Coefficient of Independent Flight Roof follows <table 0305.7.5>
<Table 0305.7.5> Cf, Wind Force Coefficient of Independent Flight Roof

Roof inclination Value Cf based on D/B
θ 5 3 2 1 1/2 1/3 1/5
10 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.45 0.55 0.70 0.75
15 0.35 0.45 0.50 0.70 0.85 0.90 0.85
20 0.50 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.00 0.95 0.90
25 0.70 0.80 0.95 1.15 1.10 1.05 0.95
30 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.30 1.20 1.10 1.00
Roof inclination center of pressure Xc/D
θ D/B = 2~5 D/B = 1 D/B = 1/5~1/2
10~20 0.35 0.30 0.30
25 0.35 0.35 0.40
30 0.35 0.40 0.45
Footnotes) (1) Wind Load functioning perpendicular to the roof surface should consider functioning of
inside surface and outside surface.
(2) Wind Direction considers change of wind direction of ± 10° from the horizontal direction.
(3) D: Wind Direction Roof Dimensions, m
B: Wind right angle direction roof Dimensions, m
Xc : Distance from the center point of wind pressure force from the eaves end-point of wind upper side .
θ: Roof inclination , °
0305.7.3.3 Enclosed Billboard

Main Frame Design Wind Force Coefficient of Enclosed Billboard follows <Table
0305.7.6>
<Table 0305.7.6> Cf Wind Force Coefficient of Enclosed Billboard
The Ground Surface Installation Billboard Lower Opening Billboard
Non height-width ratio of Ratio of short and long
Cf Cf
billboard (hs/b) sides of Billboard(m /n)
≤3 1.20 ≤6 1.20
5 1.30 10 1.30
8 1.40 16 1.40
10 1.50 20 1.50
20 1.75 40 1.75
30 1.85 60 1.85
≥ 40 2.00 ≥ 80 2.00
Footnote) (1) It applies to billboard of Effective Pressure Area in excess 70% of the total area
(2) The open distance from the surface to the bottom of the billboard that is less than 0.25 times of the vertical
height is planned to be installed on the ground surface.
(3) It should also consider. Vertical and inclined wind direction.
(4) b: width of the billboard, m
hs: t he height of the billboard, m
m: Long side of billboards, m
,n: Short side of billboard, m
0305.7.3.4 Open-Type Billboards and Lattice Structures

The Open Billboard Main Frame Design Wind Force Coefficient of Lattice Structure
follows <Table 0305.7.7>
<Table 0305.7.7> Open Type Cf Wind Force Coefficient of Lattice Structure and Billboard
Cf
Φ Circular member
Side member
d √q z≤ 5.3 d √ q z≤ 5.3
Less than 0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8
0.1~0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9
0.3~0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
Footnotes) (1) It will apply to more than 30%, open rate of open type plate structures
(2) ϕ: Stick Rate of Structure (effective pressure area/ outside area)
d: Circular member diameter, m
qz : Design Speed Pressure for any height from the ground surface z, N/m2
0305.7.3.5 Truss Tower
Main Frame Design Wind Force Coefficient of Trust Tower follows < Table 0305.7.8>
<Table 0305.7.8> Cf Wind Force Coefficient of Trust Tower <Table 0305.7.8>
Tower Flat side Cf

2
Trapezium 4.0ξ – 5.9ξ + 4.0
Triangle 3.4.0ξ 2– 5.9ξ + 3.4
Footnotes) (1) Effective water pressure area is projected area of tower member on.
(2) Cf Wind Force Coefficient of this table shall apply to Trust Tower with
side members.
(3) In the case of office tower consisting of steel pipes, coefficient Cf values
in the table above shall be multiplied with following expression
0.51ξ2 + 0.57 ≤ 1.0
(4) In the case of an office tower consisting of steel pipes, coefficient Cf
values in the table above shall be multiplied with following expression
1+ 0.75ξ ≤ 1.2
(5) Wind load applied to the tower members such as elevators, pipes, lighting, pipes
and ladders should be calculated using fit Wind Force Coefficient to each member
image.
(6) ξ: Trust Tower Loyalty Rate (Effective minimal pressure area / outside area)
0305.8 Exterior Designs Wind Pressure Coefficient
Peak Internal Pressure Coefficient and Peak External Pressure Coefficient, Wind
Pressure Coefficient Exterior Design, use the value prescribed in this section or
determined by wind tunnel experiments.
0305.8.1 Peak External Pressure Coefficient
Peak External Pressure Coefficient is calculated as follows depending on the roof
height and the roof shape.
0305.8.1.1 Building with average height of roof surface higher than 20 m GCpe Exterior
Design Peak External Pressure Coefficient of Building of building with average height of
roof surface higher than 20 m should be based on <Table 0305.8.1>. Peak External
Pressure Coefficient is designed to be secure in all condition of static pressure and
negative pressure.
<Table 0305.8.1> GCpe Peak External Pressure Coefficient of Wall Surface and Roof Surface of Building that the
average height of roof surface is more than 20 m.
(Roof surface)
R
o
o
f
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
Roof surface unit valid water pressure area (m2)
(Wall side)
W
a
l
l
s
i
d
e
Exterior wall unit valid water pressure area (m2)
Foot Notes) (1) Effective pressure area, effective pressure area of 2nd unit member that external pressure and sealer
pressure to pass to the main frame.
(2) The inclination of the roof with more than 10° is based on qH of C ground surface roughness zone using b} and c)
of <table 0305.9.3(2).
(3) Each external wall surface is designed with maximum static and negative pressure.
(4) a: 0.1 times the minimum width of buildings, it may not be smaller than 1.0m.
H: the average height of the roof, m
Z: The random surface height, m
0305.8.1.2 Gable roof type buildings with average height of roof surface less than 20m
Exterior Design Peak External Pressure Coefficient on the walls of gable roof type
buildings with the, average height of roof surface less than 20m follows <Table
0305.8.2a> and Peak External Pressure Coefficient of roof surface follows <Table
0305.8.2b>
Peak External Pressure Coefficient is designed to be secure in all condition of static and
negative pressure.
<Table 0305.8.2 a> GCpe Peak External Pressure Coefficient of the wall of the buildings gable roof type building with average
height of roof surface less than 20 m.
(Wall side)
Wall
side
Valid water pressure area(m2)

(Valid water pressure area of exterior material unit 2nd member)
Footnotes) (1) Ordinates axis is the value GCpe using qH.
(2) Each exterior shall be determined by considering maximum static and negative pressure.
(3) If θ≤10,°it can be reduced GCpe value of the surface wall by 10%
(4) a: The smaller value between 0.1 times the minimum width of the building and the value 0.4h. However, it should not be less than 0.04 times of the minimum width, or
1.0m.
<table 0305.8.2 b> GCpe Peak External Pressure Coefficient of the wall of the gable roof type building with the average height
of roof surface less than 20 m.
(Roof surface)
Valid water pressure area (m2)

(Roof surface)
R
o
o
f
s
u
r
f
a
c Valid water pressure area (m2)
e (Valid water pressure area of exterior material unit 2nd member)
(Roof surface)

Footnotes) (1) Ordinates Axis is the value GC pe using qH.

(3) a: The smaller value between 0.1 times the minimum width of the building and the value 0.4h. However, it should not be less than 0.04 times of the minimum width, or
1.0m.
0305.8.1.3 Side roof type of the building with less than 20 m average height of roof
surface Exterior Design Peak External Pressure Coefficient of buildings with less than 20
m average height of roof surface and side roof type follows <Table 0305.8.3>. Peak
External Pressure Coefficient is designed to be secure in all conditions of static and
negative pressure.
<Table 0305.8.3 > GCpe Peak External Pressure Coefficient of roof surface of roof type building with less than 20m average
height of roof surface.
(Roof surface)

(Valid water pressure area of unit finishing material)
(Roof surface)

(Valid water pressure area of unit finishing material)
Footnotes) (1) Ordinates Axis is the value GCpe using qH.

(3) a: The smaller value between 0.1 times the minimum width of the building and the value 0.4h. However, it should
not be less than 0.04 times of the minimum width, or 1.0m.
0305.8.1.4 Multi-gable roof type structure with less than 20 m average height of roof
surface. Exterior Design Peak External Pressure coefficient of building of multi-gable roof
type with less than 20 m average height of roof surface follows <Table 0305.8.4>. Peak
External Pressure Coefficient is designed to be secure in all conditions of static and
negative pressure.
<Table 0305.8.4> Peak External Pressure Coefficient of building of multi gable roof type with less than 20 m average height
of roof surface.
Number GCpe
(Roof surface)

(Valid water pressure area of unit finishing material )
(Roof surface)

(Valid water pressure area of unit finishing material )

(2) GCpe , if θ≦ 10°can use the value of <table 0305.8.3(2)>
(4) a: The smaller value between 0.1 times the minimum width of a span of a building and the value 0.4h However,
it should not be less than 0.04 times of the minimum width of a span or 1.0m
0305.8.1.5 Saw tooth roof type of the building with less than 20 m average height of roof
surface
Exterior Design Peak External Pressure Coefficient of saw tooth roof type of the building
with less than 20m average height of roof surface follows <Table 0305.8.5>. Peak
External Pressure Coefficient is designed to be secure in all conditions in static and
negative pressure.
<Table 0305.8.5 > GCpe Peak External Pressure Coefficient of roof surface of saw tooth roof type of the building with less
than 20 m average height of roof surface.
(Roof surface)

( Valid water pressure area of exterior material unit 2nd member)

(2) GCpe , if θ≦ 10°can use the value of <table 0305.8.3(2)>
(4) a : The smaller value between 0.1 times the minimum width of a span of a building and the value 0.4h
However, it should not be less than 0.04 times of the minimum width of a span or 1.0m
0305.8.2 Peak Internal Pressure Coefficient
GCpi Exterior Design Peak Internal Pressure Coefficient shall be determined by the size
of opening with <Table 0305.8.6>
<Table 0305.8.6＞ GCpi Exterior Design Peak Internal Pressure Coefficient
Enclosed Classification GCpi
Enclosed buildings 0.00 or -0.52
Part opening architecture + 0.83 or -0.83
Excellent opening architecture + 1.40 or -1.40
Opening architecture 0
0305.9 Horizontal Displacement and Acceleration Examination

0305.9.1 Wind Direction Horizontal Displacement
Damage to building frame and exterior material should not be made by building horizontal
displacement caused by the wind.
0305.9.2 Wind Direction Vibration Acceleration
Building shall be appropriately designed for residents not to feel uncomfortable and
unsafe due to the vibration of structures caused by the wind and not to cause any kinds of
building damage.
0306 Earthquake Loads
0306.1 General
This article should be applied in calculating the earthquake weight of the construction
structure and non-structural factors such as construction, machine, and electricity.
0306.1.1Extention
0306.1.1.1 Independent Extention
The extended structures that is independently built from the existing structures should be
designed and built by considering it as a new construction.
0306.1.1.2 Total Extension
If the expanded structure is not independent from the existing structures, all the structures
shall be considered as a new building and this section shall apply to the design and
construction of these buildings. Furthermore, the load required strength including the
increased load of the whole structure will be allowed to exceed the structural internal force
of existing member by less than 5%.
0306.1.2 Repurposing
The structure with the repurposing is included in the group of higher earthquake
importance in the importance classification of the building 0103, this structure should
follow the load standard of the structure include in the changed group.
0306.1.3 Structural Changes
When the required strength calculated by this standard exceeds by more than 5% of the
structural internal force of the existing member due to the change of the existing structure,
measures such as structural reinforcement should be taken to meet earthquake proof
design in this clause and the load defined in this section.
0306.2 Load Combination
0306.2.1 Strength Design
Earthquake Load Coefficient of Load Combination applied to each design method is 1.0 if
(you) do strength design or limit state design.
0306.2.2 Working Stress Design
Earthquake Load Coefficient is 0.7 in the load combination including earthquake load if
accepted to perform stress design. In this case, (you) could increase the allowing stress
according to each material standard.
0306.2.3 Special Seismic Load
You should use special seismic loads (Em) instead of earthquake load (E) in load
combinations including seismic load when designing major members that causes collapse
or instability of all structures or such as piloty or suddenly changes the flow of earthquake
load.
Em= Ω0E ± 0.2SDSD(0306.2.1)
Where Ω0 is System Exceeding Strength Coefficient determined in <table 0306.6.1>, and
SDS is Short Term of The Design Spectrum of The Speed defined 0306.3, D is a fixed
load.
However, Ω0E is no need to exceed maximum load that may be passed by another member
in seismic force resistance system.
If load Combination with special seismic loads is used with allowable stress design
method, increasing 1,7 times allowable stress with 1.0 of resistance coefficient φ, the
design strength can be determined. However, these methods cannot be applied
simultaneously with the reduction of the load combination or increase of any other
allowable stress.
0306.3 Seismic Risk to be Determined
0306.3.1 Seismic Zone and Regional Factors
Its regional Factors Value and Seismic Zone of our country are classified as <Table
0306.3.1>
<Table 0306.3.1> Sensitive seismic zone and regional coefficient
Earthquake Zone Administrative district Local factors S
1 Whole areas except, earthquake zone 2 0.22
2 Gangwondo, Jeonla Nam Do-South West Province, Jeju Do 0.14
Gangwondo North province (county, city): Hongcheon, Cheowon, Hwacheon, Hwengseong, Pyeongchang, Yanggu, Inje,
Geoseong, Yangyang, Chuncheon-Si, Sokcho-Si, Jeolla NamDo South-West province(county, city) : Muahn, Shinan,
Wando, Yeonggwang, Jindo, Haenam, Yeongam, Gangjin, Goheung, Hampyeong, Mokpo-Si.
0306.3.2 Soil Classification

0306.3.2.1 Soil Type
Soil is classified into five kinds as in <table 0306.3> to consider the effect basement
terrain and local soil conditions, soil quality and indicators on the ground motion. The soil
type SD can be applied, if soil Type has no possibility of SE. and do not have enough data
to classify target areas of the ground.
0306.3.2 Soil Classification
average soil characteristics for the upper 30m
Soil standard intrusive test drained shear strength of
the title of fat
type shear wave velocity N (number of strikes / rain water Ratio Su
300mm) (× 10-3mpa)
SA Competent t Ground 1,500 Over(up)
– –
SB Medium rock Ground 760 ~1,500
a very soft rock and

SC 380 ~760 > 50 > 100
dense soil ground
SD hard ground and sand 160 ~360 15 ~ 50 50 ~ 100

SE soft soil and sand Under 180 < 15 < 50
0306.3.2.2 Standard Ground Category

Typically, soil classification shall be determined on the basis of the surface. If the
structure with underground layer soil types using a direct basis and the ground kind of the
basic bottom is solid with SC or more, you can use the basis surface as the standard surface
of the soil category. The safety of the upper structure for the lateral earth pressure on
structural wall of the basement by earthquake should be secured. While using pile
foundations, only if in the design and construction, the soil type of bottom of the
underground structure should be SC or more and the building and vibration transfers
through the bottom of the underground structure, the bottom of the underground structure
can be used as a basic surface. If not so, the ground surface should be the basic surface.
0306.3.3 Spectrum Acceleration Design
During Short term of one second period, designed spectrum acceleration SDS, SD1 shall be
calculated by the following equation.
SDS= S×2.5×Fa×2/3(0306.3.1)
SD1= S× v×2/3(0306.3.2)
Where Fa and Fv are the amplification factor of the ground of <Table 0306.3.3>and
<Table 0306.3.4>. In the above expressions during the 2400 period, valid ground
acceleration S value of return period earthquake can be determined with <Table 0306.3.1>
or obtained with [Figure 0306.3.1] Detailed picture of the earthquake disaster. The value
of S from the Detailed picture of the earthquake disaster should not be smaller than 80%
of the S value that is determined using the [Table 0306.3]
Or using the Seismic Response analysis of Site specific, Values Fa, Fv (site specific) can
be determined. In this case, designed spectrum acceleration SDS, SD1 should be 80% or
more of the values obtained with [table 0306.3.1] & [table 0306.3.3] & [table 0306.3.4].
<Table 0306.3.3> Short Period Soil Amplification Factor, Fa
Seismic Zone
Soil Type
Ss≤ 0.25 Ss≤ 0.50 Ss≤ 0.75
SA 0.8 0.8 0.8
SB 1.0 1.0 1.0
SC 1.2 1.2 1.1
SD 1.6 1.4 1.2
SE 2.5 1.9 1.3
* Ss is the value 2.5 times of S of <table 0306.3.1> Linear interpolation will be made for median value of SS from the table
above.
A second cycle Soil Amplification Factor<table 0306.3.4>, Fv
Seismic Zone
Soil Type
S ≤ 0.1 S ≤ 0.2 S ≤ 0.3
SA 0.8 0.8 0.8
SB 1.0 1.0 1.0
SC 1.7 1.6 1.5
SD 2.4 2.0 1.8
SE 3.5 3.2 2.8
* S is the Value of <table 0306.3.1> Linear interpolation will be made for median value of SS from the table above.
Maximum Expected Earthquake Ground Acceleration (s) % in 2400 Return Period; Seismic Design
Based Research [picture 0306.3.1] II (the Ministry of Construction and Transportation, 1997)
0306.3.4 The Design Spectrum Acceleration Framing
The design spectrum response acceleration spectrum of earthquake is obtained with the
following equation and made with figure. 0306.3.3:
(1) The spectrum Acceleration (Sa) shall be based on expression (0306.3.3), during T≤T0,
(2) During T0≤T≤TS, spectrum Acceleration(Sa) is same as SDS.
(3) Spectrum Acceleration (Sa) shall be based on on expression (0306.3.3), during T>TS,
T: unique cycle of the structure (second)

To= 0.2SD1/SDS
TS= SD1/SDS
[Figure 0306.3.2] Design Spectrum Acceleration

0306.4 Calculation of Seismic Load
0306.4.1 General Items
Each structure belongs to the seismic design category classified by the construction
ground state and purpose. Based on the seismic design category, allowable structural
system, limitation, about atypical and height, seismic design target member, analysis of
lateral force method are determined.
0306.4.2 Seismic Rating and the Importance Coefficient of the Building
Each structure determines the important factor and seismic grade depending on
information priority of the building in <table 0306.4.1> one structure or shared by two or
more parts of the building structure is used for 2 or more usages with not the same
importance degree, the highest importance should be used.
Each part can be classified independently based on 0306.8 when the structure consists of 2
or more structurally separated parts. Structurally separated part in a structure provides
escape or access routes to other parts with higher importance elements or shares safety life
elements, both parts should use high importance degree.
0306.4.1 Seismic rating and Importance Coefficient
Priority of Buildings Seismic Rating Importance Coefficient IE

Priority (Special) Special 1.5
Priority (Special) I 1.2
Priority (Special) II 1.0
0306.4.3 Seismic Design Category Determination

All building determines Seismic Design Category by <Table 0306.4.3> and <Table
0306.4.2> depending on SDS, SD1 Designed spectrum Acceleration determined from
0306.3.3 and Seismic Grade determined from 0306.4.2. If the seismic design category is
different by <Table 0306.4.2> and <Table 0306.4.3>, it is classified as high seismic
design category.
[Table 0306.4.2] Seismic Design Category in accordance with the Design Spectrum Acceleration of Short Period
Seismic Rating
SDS value
Special I II
0.50 ≤ S DS D D D
0.33 ≤ S DS < 0.50 D C C
0.17≤S DS <0.33 C B B
S DS < 0.17 A A A
<Table 0306.4.3> Seismic Design Category based on designed Spectrum Acceleration from 1 second cycle
Seismic Rating
Values of SD1
Special I II
0.20 ≤ SD1 D D D
0.14 ≤ SD1< 0.20 D C C
0.07≤SD1<0.14 C B B
SD1 < 0.07 A A A
0306.4.4 Building Shape

All buildings are classified into plane, vertical type or atypical under this term.
0306.4.4.1 Non-Planar Formations
The building with one or more of the characteristics listed in <Table 0306.4.4> is defined
to have Non Planar Formation.
0306.4.4.2 Non Vertical Formation
The building with one or more of the characteristics listed in<Table 0306.4.5> is defined
to have Vertical, Non Planar Formation. However, the following case is an exception.
(1) If the ratio between Interlayer Displacement angle of any layer and Interlayer
Displacement angle of adjoining Upper Floor is less than 130% during the work of design
seismic load, V–1 or vertical atypical of V–2 of <Table 0306.4.5> will not apply. It does
need to consider torsional effects to calculate interlayer displacement angle. Also,
assessment is not needed for the relationship of layer displacement angle for the top 2
floors of a building
(2) V–1 and V–2, the vertical Non atypical Formation Type of <table 0306.4.5> are not
required to apply to the building with 2 floors or lower.
0306.4.5 Analysis
Structural Analysis is performed by the following ways according to the seismic design
category.
0306.4.5.1 Analysis for “A”B” Seismic Design Category
In the Analysis of “B”or "A" Seismic Design Category can be designed by equivalent
Static Analysis Method in 0306.5
0306.4.5.2 Analysis Method for “C” Seismic Design Category.
Analysis of Building of “C” Seismic Design Category can be designed by Equivalent
Static Analysis Method from 0306.5. However, if it belongs to the one of the following,
you should use Dynamic Analysis Method.
(1) The type structure with height 70m or more, or more than 21 floors.
(2) The atypical structure with height 20m or more, or more than 6 floors..
0306.4.5.3 Analysis Method for “D” Seismic Design Category
Analysis of“D”Seismic Design Category should use the Analysis Method in <Table
0306.4.6> or or more detailed analysis. In this case, for the structure without atypical
plane of H–1 or H–4 of <table 0306.4.4> table 0306.4.5> or without Vertical atypical
Formation corresponding V–1, V–4 or V–5 of <Table 0306.4.5>, it can be seen as a type.
<Table 0306.4.4> Type and definition of Planar atypical Formation
Applied Seismic
Type Number Type Definition Related Item
Design Category
Considering if Diaphragm is not flexible 0306.5.6.4 C, D
Torsional atypical is assumed if Maximum
displacement is great than 1.2 times of the average <table 0306.4.6> D
H–1 Torsional atypical
floor displacement of both ends with the consideration
of accidental eccentricity in one end of a building 0306.5.7.1 C, D
perpendicular to an axe.
It is assumed to have uneven flat panel if the
H-2 uneven flat side dimensions of the projecting portion exceeds 15% of – –
dimension of the flat side.
the diaphragm with changes in stiffness or a sudden
discontinuity that the diaphragm stiffness change of
discontinuity of interlayer adjoining or if the perforated portion or the
H-3 – –
diaphragm severed portion in diaphragm excess 50% of the entire
area of the diaphragm or change of stiffness,
diaphragm between layers exceeds 50 %.
Discontinuity in transverse force transfer path such as
H-4 Plane discrepancy 0306.8.3 B, C, D
plane discrepancy of the vertical member
Lateral force resistance vertical factor is not parallel
H-5 Unbalanced system or symmetric to the main spindle perpendicular to the 0306.8.4.2 C
whole lateral force resistance system.
0306.8.4.3 D
<Table 0306.4.5> Types and Definitions of vertical atypical

Seismic Design
Type number Type Definition Related section
Category
If there is buffy layer that the upper part floor lateral rigidity
of a layer is less than 70% of the upper part floor lateral
Stiffness atypical buffy
V-1 rigidity or less than 80% of the average stiffness of the top 3 Table 0306.4.6 D
layer
floors, it is assumed that there is stiffness of atypical
distribution
It is assumed that it is a typical of weight distribution when
valid weight of a layer exceeds 150 % of adjoining valid
V-1 Weight atypical 0306.4.6 D
weight. However, it does not apply, if the bottom floor of the
roof is greater than the roof floor.
When horizontal dimensions of the lateral force resistance
V-3 Geometrical atypical system exceeds 130%, it is assumed that geometrical atypical 0306.4.6 D
exists.
if internal surface discrepancies of the lateral force resistance
Atypical element of element is greater than the length of the elements or stiffness
V-4 vertical lateral force reduction occurs in adjoining bottom layer resistance factor, it 0306.8.3 B, C, D
resistance factor is assumed that there is atypical by internal surface
discrepancies of the vertical force resistance element .
If there is an approximate layer that lateral strength of any
The discontinuity - floor is less than 80 % of the lateral strength of direct upper
V-5 approximate floor of layer, it is assumed that atypical by the discontinuity of 0306.8.1 B, C, D
strength strength exists. Lateral strength of each layer means the sum
of strength of resistance direction of seismic factors.
<Table 0306.4.6> Analysis Method for seismic design category “0”

Structural forms Analysis methods for Seismic Design
A structure of seismic rating II with light weight frame structure with 3 or less Equivalent static analysis method or dynamic
floors and other structures with 2 or less floors with flexible diaphragms analysis method
Equivalent static analysis method or dynamic
Other than section 1, a typical structure with height less than 70m.
analysis method
A structure of 5 floors or 20 m or more height or a typical structure with 70 m or
more height with the type 1, 2 or 3 of vertical atypical formation from <table Dynamics Analysis Method
0306.4.5.> or type 1 of atypical from <Table 0306.4.4〉.
Availability of other kinds of flat and vertical atypical structures. Dynamics Analysis Method
0306.4.6 Deformation and Lateral Displacement Limit.

The designed side sway Δ which was determined according to 0306.5.7 should not exceed
the allowed side sway Δ a that is regulated in <Table 0306.4.7>, in any story.
<Table 0306.4.7> Permitted Interlayer Displacement Δ a
Seismic Grade
Special I II
Permitted interlayer
0.010hsx 0.015hsx 0.020hsx
displacement Δa
hsx Floor high of x floor
0306.5 Equivalent Static Analysis Method

0306.5.1 Base Shear Force
V Base Shear Force is obtained with the following equation:
V= CsW (0306.5.1)
Where, Cs seismic response coefficient calculated by 0306.5.2
W Effective Building Weight including Load described below and Fixed Load
In the space used as a warehouse minimum 25% of live load. (Live load of the
building with public garages and open parking not need to be included)
Larger Value between 0.5kN/m2 and actual weight of compartment when the load of
compartment wall is included in bottom load.
Total Load of Permanent Equipment
20% of snow load in flat roof for the flat roof with over 1.5kN/m2.
0306.5.2 Seismic Response Coefficient
Cs Seismic Response Coefficient is obtained with the following equation:
Cs calculated according to the seismic response coefficient in the formula (0306.5.2) does
not need to exceed the following values:
However, Cs Seismic Response Coefficient must be at least the following values:

Cs =0.01(0306.5.4)
Where, IE: Importance Coefficient of buildings determined by <Table 0306.4.1>
R: Response Modification Factor is determined by <Table 0306.6.1>
SDS: Short Period Spectrum Acceleration Design followed by 0306.3.3
SD1: Designed spectrum Acceleration Design of 1 second cycle by 0306.3.3
T: Natural period (second) of Building calculated according to (table03063)
0306.5.3 Natural period Calculation Method
Natural period of Building is calculated based on the simple expression of 0306.5.4 or
other appropriate methods that considers the change and structure properties of resistance
factor.. However, natural cycle calculated by other appropriate methods cannot exceed
natural cycle Ta obtained by the simple formula multiplied by upper limit Cycle
Coefficient (Cu) of <table 0306.5.1.
<Table 0306.5.1> Upper Limit Cycle Coefficient, Cu
SD1 Cu
0.4 or up 1.4
0.3 1.4
0.2 1.5
0.15 1.6
0.1 below 1.7
0306.5.4 The Weak Acid Review Cycle Law (Method)

Ta Approximate unique Cycle (second) is obtained by the following equation:
Where, CT =0.085: Steel skeleton Moment Frame

= 0.073: Reinforced Concrete Moment Frame, Steel-skeleton Eccentric brace frame
= 0.049: More all other buildings
hn= overall height from the bottom to the top the floor of building (m)
However, Ta approximate unique cycle can be obtained by the following equation for the
resistance frame of reinforced concrete and steel frame with more than minimal 3m of
height and not more than 12nd floors.
Ta= 0.1N (0306.5.6)
Where, N: Floors Number
If the 9 trillion days of reinforced concrete shear walls is available type (0306.5.7) or type
(3306.5.5)
i.e. De/hn≤ 0.9

Where, Ae: cross-sectional area of shear walls parallel to Seismic Load Directions on the
1st Floor (m2)
De: the length of shear walls parallel to Seismic Load Directions on the 1st Floor,(m)
0306.5.5 Seismic Forces Vertical Distribution
Each layer lateral load Fx with the vertical distribution of bottom shear is determined by
the following equation.
Fx = CvxV(0306.5.8)
Where, Cvx: vertical distribution coefficient

k: Distribution coefficient based on building cycles
k = 1 the building with cycle of 0.5 seconds or less
k = 2 the building with cycle of 2.5 seconds or more
However, k, in the buildings with the cycle between 0.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds, is direct
interpolated with the value between 1 and 2.
hi,hx : height of i or x floor from the bottom
V: bottom shear
wi,wx weight on the bottom of i or x floor
n: Number of floors
0306.5.6 Horizontal Shear Distribution
The floor shear force Vx of x floor is determined by the following equation:
Where, Fi earthquake force applied to the bottom of the I floor.

0306.5.6.1 Strong Diaphragm
When the diaphragm is classified as a strong diaphragm, design floor shear force is
distributed by the vertical members that consist of seismic force resistant system of the
floor.
0306.5.6.2 Flexible Diaphragm
When it is classified as a flexible diaphragm, shear force of design floor on the basis of the
work area of diaphragm located on each resistance line.
0306.5.6.3 Horizontal Torsional Moment
Torsional moment at the design level should be considered if diaphragm is not flexible.
Horizontal torsional moment is the total of torsional moment body and accidental torsional
moment Mta by eccentricity between the structure center and sensors.
The signs of the torsional moment is determined by multiplying the floor shear force by
eccentricity distance. The accidental torsional moment Mta is the moment calculated by
multiplying the accidental eccentricity, direction, by floor shear force. The center of mass
for accidental eccentricity should consider both directions.
0306.5.6.4 Dynamic Amplification of Torsion
When atypical torsional building (type h-1) by <table 0306.4.4> is classified as Seismic
Design Category ‘C’,‘D from the 0306.4.2, Ax the torsional amplification factor should be
multiplied by accidental torsional moment Mta in each floor.
Where, δ max: the maximum displacement of x floor bottom.

δavg: the average displacement of each corner of x floor bottom.
However, there is no need to exceed. Torsional Amplification Factor Ax,3.0.
The most unfavorable load condition should be considered for each design of member.
0306.5.6.5 Conducting Moment
Buildings shall be designed to resist, conducting moment due to seismic loads determined
in 0306.5.
Conducting moment Mx of x floor is determined by the following equation:
Where, earthquake force action on Fi = I floor bottom

Height of floor bottom I from hi and hx = bottom or x
τ = Conduction Moment Reducing Coefficient determined by the following:
From the top until 10th floor:1.0
From the top until 20th floor: 0.8
Between the 10th floor and 20th floor from the top floor, a value of linear interpolation
between 0.8 ~ 1.0
0306.5.7 Interlayer displacement determination and p–Δ effects
0306.5.7.1 Determination of Interlayer Displacement
Δinterlayer displacement is calculated with the difference of the lateral displacement for
the center of mass of top and bottom. If the building is classified as Seismic Design
Category “C” and “D” and Unstructured type H-1 Type is classified by <table 0306.4.4>,
Δ should be the maximum value out of the difference between corner displacements of top
and bottom of the given floor.
For allowed stress design, Δ is calculated not by multiplying seismic load by load
coefficient 0.7.δ x, floor displacement of x is determined of x floor is determined by
the following equation.
Where, Cd: displacement amplification factor by <table 0306.6.1>

δxe: The layer displacement by elasticity analysis of resist seismic forces resistance system.
IE: Building Importance Coefficient by <table 0306.4.1>
Displacement δ x of the x floor shall be calculated according to this provisions in decision
of the Interlayer Displacement Allowed in <table 0306.4.7>.
For the purpose of only displacement interpretation, it does not need to apply the upper
limit value of the proposed cycle in 0306.5.3 to the calculation of the unique cycle T of the
buildings.
Or, Δ Design Interlayer Displacement is determined by multiplying ad= 1.0/(1–θ) a
amplified factor in P–Δ effect. Where, θ is stable coefficient defined in 0306.5.7.2
0306.5.7.2 P–Δ Effect
(1) θ, if a stable coefficient calculated in the following expression is less than 0.1,It does
not consider the P–Δ effects in calculating interlayer displacement and member force due
to moment.
where, Px : Sum of vertical load of x Floor and its upper floor. However, when Px is
calculated, load coefficient of each load does not need to exceed 1.0.
Δ Design Interlayer Displacement by Vx
Vx: Seismic Load Shear force between x-1 Floor and x Floor
hsx: the height of the floor below x Floor.
Where, Cd: displacement amplification factor by <table 0306.6.1>
(2) Stable coefficient(θ) calculated according to formula (0306.5.14) cannot exceed θmax
by the following equation. Because it should be re-designed because of the possibility of
unstable structures:
Where, β = 1 can be used for the safety side without a separate calculation without
separately calculating the, required shear strength for the floor design shear strength
between x and x-1 floor is not.
(3) If stable Coefficient (θ) is greater than 0.1 and less than θmax, the member force and the
interlayer displacement should be obtained with the analysis P–Δ with reasonable method.
The member force and the interlayer displacement can be increased by multiplying
ad = 1.0/(1–θ) amplification factor to substitute p–Δ analysis.
(4) Even for the Effect P–Δ automatically considered interpretation, if the limit value of
the expression (0306.5.15) shall be met. In this case, θ of the expressions (0306.5.14) is
calculated with the resulting value from P–Δ Analysis and the limit value of the formula
(0306.5.15) can be reviewed by considering the value by dividing this value by the value
of (1+θ) as a stable factor θ.
0306.5.8 Soil - Structure Interaction
The structure analysis can be performed by considering basic bottom as a fixed platform
or basic stiffness of basic lower ground.
If the structure with basement uses the bottom of the underground structure as the ground
of standard category in 0306.3.2.2, lateral stiffness of the ground adjacent to the basement
walls should be ignored.
0306.6.Seismic Force Resistance System
When estimating the interlayer displacement and bottom shear, member force, Cd,
displacement amplification factor and Ω0, the system exceeding strength coefficient, R-an
appropriate response modification factor specified in <table 0306.6.1> should be used.
If using Non Listed Seismic Force Resistant System in <table 0306.6.1> or the others
structure of <table 0306.6.1>, Cd. –displacement amplification factor, and Ω 0-the
exceeding strength coefficient, R-the system response modification factor of the system
can be used if energy dissipation capacity and ability to resist lateral forces are proven to
be similar to one structural system listed in <table 0306.6.1> through analysis and
experiments.
<Table 0306.6.1> Design Coefficient for Seismic Resistance System
The system limitations and
Design Coefficient
height (m) limitation
System
Response Seismic Seismic
Basic Seismic Force Resistant System exceeding Displacement
modifica- design Design Design
strength amplification
tion factor category Category Category D
coefficien factor Cd
R A or B C
t Ω0Ω0
1. Bearing Wall System
1–a special reinforced concrete shear walls 5 2.5 5 – – –
1–b reinforced concrete within common
4 2.5 4 – – 60
shear walls
1–c reinforced concrete bricklaying shear
2.5 2.5 1.5 – 60 disapproval
walls
1–d non–reinforced bricklaying shear
1.5 2.5 1.5 – disapproval disapproval
walls
2. building framing system
2–a eccentric brace steel frame (other end
8 2 4 – – –
link of moment resistance junction)
2–b eccentric brace steel frame ( other end
link of non moment resistance 7 2 4 – – –
junction)
2–c steel framing special center brace 6 2 5 – – –
2–d the common center brace frame of the
3.25 2 3.25 – – –
steel frame
2–e synthesized frame eccentricity brace 8 2 4 – – –
2–f synthesized special center brace frame 5 2 4.5 – – –
2–g synthesized common center brace
3 2 3 – – –
frame
2–h composite steel plate shear walls 6.5 2.5 5.5 – – –
2–i special composite shear walls 6 2.5 5
2–j composite common shear walls 5 2.5 4.5 – – 60
2–k special steel plate shear walls of steel
7 2 6 – – –
frame
2–l. a new steel frame to prevent buckling
8 2.5 5 – – –
(updated moment–resistance junction)
2–m. a new steel frame to prevent buckling
7 2 5.5 – – –
(updated moment–resistance junction)
2–n. special reinforced concrete shear
6 2.5 5 – – –
walls
2–o. reinforced concrete within shear walls 5 2.5 4.5 – – 60
2–p. reinforced concrete reinforced shear
3 2.5 2 – 60 disapproval
walls
2–q. unstructured non–reinforced shear
1.5 2.5 1.5 – disapproval disapproval
walls
3. moment - resistant framing system
3–a. special steel moment frame 8 3 5.5 – – –
3–b. intermediate steel moment frame 4.5 3 4 – – –
3–c. usually steel moment frame 3.5 3 3 – – –
3–d. composite special moment frame 8 3 5.5 – – –
3–e. composite intermediate moment
5 3 4.5 – – –
frame
3–f. usually moment composite frame 3 3 2.5 – – –
3–g. butterfly semi–finals composite
6 3 5.5 – – –
moment frame
<Table 0306.6.1> Design Coefficient for Seismic Resistance System
The system limitations and
Design Coefficient
height (m); limit
The
Response system Seismic Seismic
Basic Seismic Force Resistant System Displacement
modificat exceeding design Design Design
amplification
ion intensity category Category Category D
coefficient Cd
factor R coefficient A or B C
Ω0
3–h reinforced concrete special moment
8 3 5.5 – – –
frame
3–i reinforced concrete middle moment
5 3 4.5 – – –
frame
3–j reinforced concrete common
3 3 2.5 – – disapproval
moment frame
4. dual–frame system with special moment
frames
4–a Eccentric brace steel frame 8 2.5 4 – – –
4–b steel special brace framing center 7 2.5 5.5 – – –
4–c synthesized brace frame eccentricity 8 2.5 4 – – –
4–d synthesized steel special brace
6 2.5 5 – – –
framing center
4–e composite steel plate shear walls 7.5 2.5 6 – – –
4–f special composite shear walls 7 2.5 6 – – –
4–g composite common shear walls 6 2.5 5 – – –
4–h steel frame buckling prevention
8 2.5 5 – – –
brace
4–i special steel plate shear walls of
8 2.5 6.5 – – –
steel frame
4–j special reinforced concrete shear
7 2.5 5.5 – – –
walls
4–k reinforced concrete common shear
6 2.5 5 – – –
walls
5. Double frame system with middle moment
frame
5–a Steel special framing brace center
6 2.5 5 – – –
frame
5–b special reinforced concrete shear
6.5 2.5 5 – – –
walls
5–c reinforced concrete common shear
5.5 2.5 4.5 – – 60
walls
5–d synthesized specialty center brace
5.5 2.5 4.5 –
frame
5–e synthesized common center brace
3.5 2.5 3 – – –
frame
5–f composite common shear walls 5 3 4.5 – – 60
5–g reinforced concrete bricklaying
3 3 2.5 – 60 disapproval
shear walls
6. Reversed weight system
6–a cantilever column system 2.5 2.0 2.5 – – 10
6–b special steel moment frame 2.5 2.0 2.5 – – –
6–c usual steel moment frame 1.25 2.0 2.5 – – disapproval
6–d Reinforced concrete special moment
2.5 2.0 1.25 “ “
frame
7. reinforced moment common concrete
4.5 2.25 4 – – 60
frame
8. steel structure standards that satisfy only
3 3 3 – – 60
the general rules of steel structural systems
1) system–specific details shall be based on each material special design standards and / or reliable research
instituted conducted experiment, interpretation.
0306.6.1 dual-frame system
In the moment frame and shear walls or double frame system with brace frame
While the whole seismic Force should be distributed proportional to the lateral stiffness of
each frame, the moment frame should bear the minimal 25% of the performance of
earthquake design.
0306.6.2 Shear Wall - Frame Interaction Systems
The shear strength of shear walls from the shear wall and frame interaction system should
be at least 75 % of the minimum shear design floor from each floor. The frame should be
able to resist minimum 25% of shear frame of design floor of each floor.
0306.6.3 The system Combination of The Same Axis
If you use combination of different structural systems to resist the lateral force in the same
working direction, Response Modification Factor R value should be the minimum value of
response modification factor of each system.
0306.6.4 The Combination of Framing Systems
If you use The Different Seismic Force Resistant System along with two orthogonal axis
of a structure, the system exceeding strength factor (Ω0), R-response modification factor
and displacement amplification factor Cd).corresponding to each system in <table
0306.6.1> should be used.
0306.6.4.1 Combination Frame Coefficient
R-response modification factor of analysis direction from any floor except for the roof
should use the minimal value of R values in same way seismic force resistant system of
upper floors. The system exceeding strength coefficient of analysis direction from any
floor Ω0m should be more than the largest value for seismic resistance forces system in the
same direction for the upper floor.
However, the following cases are exceptions.
(1) Lightweight frame independent housing units in one and two furniture unit.
(2) The system exceeding strength coefficient (Ω0) and Response Modification Factor(R)
of superstructure of the system that is less than 10% of the total structure weight R and Ω0
can be determined independently from R and Ω0 of the entire structure.
(3) If the structures meets the and can use the static analysis of step 2 in and .
The stiffness of the lower portion should be more than 10 times of the upper portion.
All structures period does not exceed 1.1 times of basic period obtained with the
assumption that the upper portion is a separate structure with a fixed bottom.
Flexible upper portion using the appropriate r values are designed as separate
structures.
Strong Sub section is designed as a separate structure appropriate by using
appropriate R value. Upper part on the lower portion of the R value is obtained from the
upper part value of the interpretation from the upper portion reaction. The upper portion
reaction is obtained from by multiplying the reaction value obtained from the upper
portion interpretation by the ratio of upper portion value R for lower portion R value. This
Ratio should be 1.0 or over.
0306.6.4.2 Combination Frame Design
In the case of structural members that Response Modification Coefficient are shares by
different systems. it should be designed to have the details corresponding to R , the largest
of Response Modification Factor.
0306.6.5 Seismic Design Category “D” for the system limits
Structures of seismic design category “D shall be satisfying the following and the system
limitations in <table 0306.6.1>
0306.6.5.1 Interaction Effects
Moment frame that connects non-structural elements with the large rigidity should be
designed for vertical loads and seismic forces resistance ability not to be interrupted by
effects of these elements. The design should consider effects of this elements for the
structure system in the variations corresponding to △θ interlayer displacement design
calculated in 0306.5.7.1. Also, the affect of the elements should be considered when
determining some structure has one or more of atypical defined by 0306.4.4.
0306.6.5.2 Relevance of the Transformation
All structural elements not included in the considered direction of Seismic Force Resistant
System should be designed to deliver the soft skills that can resist vertical loads, moments
and shear forced caused by Design interlayer Displacement determined by 0306.5.7.1 If
using allowable stress methods, △ is calculated not by multiplying load coefficient 0.7 by
Seismic Force. The moment and shear force occurring in the member not included in the
considered direction of Seismic Force Resistant System should be calculated by including
the effect of increasing stiffness of adjacent strong structure and Non Structural Elements.
0306.6.5.3 Building Height Restrictions
Height restrictions of <table 0306.6.1> should be applied to Seismic design category “D”.
0306.7 Dynamic Analysis Method
0306.7.1 How to choose Analysis Method
If performing a dynamic analysis, one of the following ways can be chosen, detailed
procedure shall be based on the provisions of this section.
(1) Response Spectrum Analysis Method
(2) Linear Time History Analysis
(3) NonLinear Time History Analysis Method
0306.7.2 Modeling
Building Mathematical Models of the mass spatial distribution and stiffness is able to
express. In a typical structure with lateral force resistance system perpendicular to and
independent from each other, two-dimensional model of an independent stand can be
used. In case of a typical structure with resistance system not independent to each other,
third dimensional model with minimum 3 freedom degrees with displacement of two
perpendicular directions and the rotation of a vertical axis should be used. If the
diaphragm is more flexible than the vertical member of the lateral force resistance system,
analysis Model should include additional degrees of freedom to consider the diaphragm
flexibility and its effect on Dynamic Response Effect. For the case of bricklaying with
reinforced concrete, you must consider the impact of the crack section and the impact of
panel zone in calculating the displacement of the steel moment framing.
if it is a large p–Δ effects, the model whit this consideration should be used or the p–Δ
effects should be reflected in the interpretation results.
If the floor area of basement structure is much larger than the floor area of ground floor,
the ground structure and be separated and interpreted. Otherwise, the underground
structures must be modeled with a surface structure. If you use the bottom of the
underground structure as the criteria surface for ground category in 0306.3.2.2 for the
structure with the basement, lateral stiffness of the ground adjacent to the basement walls
should be ignored.
0306.7.3 Response Spectrum Analysis Method
0306.7.3.1 Characteristics of Mode
Authorized analysis method should be used with the assumption that the bottom is fixed
by elastic stiffness and mass of lateral force resistant system such as characteristics for the
vibration mode of the structure such as natural frequency, mode type vector, mass
participation coefficient. Mode number to be used for the interpretation is determined for
the mass parts rate to be more than 90% for each orthogonal direction.
0306.7.3.2 Bottom Shear Force Mode
Vm the bottom Shear Force by Vm mode should be obtained with, the following expression.
Where, Csm is the seismic response coefficient by the formula (0306.7.3)
Wm: effective load gravity mode
wi : W: the effective weight of the ith floor among the effective weight loads W includes all
fixed loads with the following loads:
in the case of buildings used as warehouse space, minimum of 25% active load (Public
garages and open parking not needed to include the dynamic load)
when the compartment wall load is Included in the bottom load, the larger value
between 0.5KN/m2 and actual weight of compartment
total load of equipment facilities
If snow load of flat roof is more than 1.5kn/m2, 20% of flat roof snow load. φim : the
ingredient of first floor i-of φth mode vector
mode seismic response coefficient Csm is determined by the following equation
Where, IE is the importance factor determined in <table 0306.4.1>

Sam : Mode design spectrum acceleration corresponding to mode period Tm determined by
design spectrum,
response spectrum corresponding to land characteristics.
Csm Mode seismic response coefficient Csm is determined by the following equation.
R , Response correction factor by <table 0306.6.1>
However, in the case of SD, SE ground conditions, Csm seismic, seismic response
coefficient Csm of high mode that the cycle except the first mode is less than 0.3 seconds
can be obtained with the following formula.
Where, IE is the importance factor in <table 0306.4.1>

R, Reaction correction factor by <table 0306.6.1>
SDS, the design spectrum acceleration of short cycle by <table 0306.3.3>
Tm : m (unit) the mode of vibration cycles
0306.7.3.3 Mode Floor Earthquake Force, Displacement, Interlayer Displacement
The mode load Fxm for each layer is calculated as follows.
Fxm = CvxmVm(0306.7.5)
Here, Cvxm : Vertical distribution coefficient of the mth mode.

Vm : mth mode bottom shear strength calculated according to formula (0306.7.1)
wi, wx : Effective weight of the layer i and x
Φim : Layer i components of the mth mode vector.
Φxm : Layer x component of the mth mode vector.
The mode displacement δxm of each layer is calculated according to the following formula.
Here, Cd : Displacement amplification coefficient according to <Table 0306.6.1>

IE : Occupancy importance factor according to <Table 0306.4.1>
δxem : Displacement of the layer x’s mass center of the mth mode calculated according to the
tension analysis. The tension displacement δxem may be calculated according to the
following formula.
Here, Fxm: Earthquake strength of the x layer of the mth mode

g : Gravity acceleration
Tm : The period of vibration of the mth mode.
Wx : Effective weight of the x layer
Displacement between mode stories Δm may be calculated by the layer displacement
differences δxm between the upper and lower stories.
0306.7.3.4 Mode Shear Force, Moment, Member Force
Layer shear strength, layer over-turning moment, member strengths, etc., caused by the
seismic load calculated according to 0306.7.3.3 are calculated by using the linear static
analysis by mode.
0306.7.3.5 Design Value Calculation
(1) For Designed values of bottom area shearing force Vt, layer shearing force, side sway,
layer displacement, member force, etc., the effects of each mode are calculated by
(Square Root of Sum of Square: SRSS) or (Complete Quadratic Combination: CQC)
(2) When the bottom area shearing force Vt from the response spectrum analysis, using the
unique period calculated according to 0306.5.3,
is less than 85% of bottom area shearing force V ,calculated according to the equivalent static
analysis, then the following correction coefficient Cm is multiplied to the Design value
calculated from 0306.7.3.5(1).However, the correction efficient Cm is not multiplied to the
side sway.
0306.7.3.6 Lateral Displacement Determination and the p – Δ Effect

Determination of the inelastic lateral displacement and consideration on the p – Δ effect
follows 0306.5.7. However, if p – Δ effect is considered in the analysis, the p– Δ effect
should not be considered additionally.
0306.7.4 Time Historical Analysis
0306.7.4.1 Design Earthquake Wave Selection.
The time historical analysis is conducted using a minimum of at least 3 tectonic movement
records corresponding to the ground condition. When conducting a 3-dimensional analysis,
each tectonic movement consists of 2 component pairs that cross at a right angles on the
plane. For cases in which it is impossible to calculate the measured tectonic movement, the
tectonic movement pairs of the required number of proper fillets can be created and used.
A responding spectrum of the 5% dampering ratio separated by individual tectonic movement
components needs to be created and the SRSS (Square Root of Sum of Square) needs to be
acquired by period to calculate the SRSS spectrum. Then the average of these SRSS
spectrums must not be smaller than 10% more than 1.3 times the Designed spectrum, for
periods which are between 0.2 to 1.5 times the basic vibration period of the structure. When
controlling the size of the tectonic movement, the same magnification needs to be applied to
the two components that cross at a right angle. When analyzing using three tectonic
movements, Designing must be done using maximum response, and when analyzing using
seven or more tectonic movements, Designing can be done using the average response.
In case of conducting a 2-dimentional analysis, the average of the 5% dampering ratio,
created for each individual tectonic movement, should not be smaller than the Designed
spectrum for the period between 0.2 to 1.5 times the unique period of the structure in the
direction of the conducted analysis.
0306.7.4.2 Elastic Time Historical Analysis
The Designed values for layer shearing force, layer over-turning moment, member force, etc.,
are calculated by multiplying the occupancy importance factor to the results from the time
historical analysis and then dividing by the response correction factor. The resultant Designed
values need to be adjusted according to the regulations in 0306.7.3.5.
0306.7.4.3 Non-Linear Time Historical Analysis
Non-linear ability or features of the members need to be modeled appropriately to the
experiments or analysis results by considering the occupancy importance factors.
Response is not reduced by R/IE .
The maximum inelastic displacement response must satisfy 0306.4.6.
0306.7.4.4 Consideration of the Ground Effects
In order to directly consider the effects of tectonic movement, the analysis may be
performed by including the nearby ground of the structure. Modeling needs to be
performed for the bedrock located at the top, but a wider area of bedrock should be used
so the the tectonic movement far from the structure doesn’t get affected by the interaction
between the structure and the nearby ground. Use the earthquake wave that contains the
bedrock features to conduct the analysis on the earthquake input of the bedrock.
0306.8 Designs of Structural Elements
The Designs of each element of the seismic resistance system should satisfy the
regulations of this sub-section. However, the structures that qualify for seismic-resistance
Design criteria ‘A’ are an exception.
0306.8.1 Discontinuity of the Vertical System
The lateral force resistance ability must be discontinuous like Type 5 of the vertical
irregularity, defined in <Table 0306.4.5> and the height of a structure, where the strength
of the weak layer is less than 65% of the upper layer, must be less than two stories or 9m.
However, if the weak layer can bear the earthquake force, which multiplies the system
over strength factor Ώ0 and the Design load, the height limitation is not applied.
0306.8.2 Inverted Pendulum Type Structure
The pillars that support the inverted pendulum type structures must be Designed for the
moment that changes linearly between the bending moment on the base, determined
according to 0306.5, and the top moment that corresponds to ½ of the base bending
moment.
0306.8.3 Members Supporting Discontinuous Walls or Frames
The discountious wall, pillars, and other members that apply to the plain irregularity type
H-4 of <Table 0306.4.4> or the vertical irregularity type V-4 of <Table 0306.4.5> must
be Designed to resist the combined load of the special seismic load from 0306.2.
0306.8.4 Direction of Seismic Load
0306.8.4.1 Earthquake Resistance Design Criteria ’B’
The seismic Design force is applied in the direction where the largest loading effect arises
in each member. This rule is considered satisfied when the seismic force is applied in any
two perpendicular directions.
0306.8.4.2 Earthquake Resistance Design Criteria ’C’
It must meet the regulations from 0306.8.4.1 and the Design member strength of the
structures that apply to the plane irregularity type H-5 regulated in <Table 0306.4.4> shall
be determined by using one of the following two methods.
(1) Add the absolute values of the load effects for 100% of the unidirectional earthquake
load and 30% of the right angle earthquake load, but select the bigger value among the
two combinations.
(2) Combine 100% of the two directional right angle load effects by using the SRSS
method.
0306.8.4.3 Earthquake Resistance Design Criteria ’D’
The Design member strength of a structure needs to be determined by using one of the
following two methods.
(1) Add the absolute value of the load effect for 100% of the unidirectional earthquake
load and 30% of the right angle directional earthquake load, and then select the bigger
value among the two combinations.
(2) Combine 100% of the two directional right angle load effects by using the SRSS
method.
0306.8.5 Vertical Earthquake Force
The lateral overhanging beam of the structure categorized as earthquake resistance Design
criteria ‘D’ and the horizontal factors that receive free stress are added to the qualifying
load combination and Designed to resist the uplifting load that is more than 20% of the
fixed load.
0306.8.6 Distances between Buildings
The structures categorized as earthquake resistance criteria ‘D’ need to maintain a certain
distance from the neighboring structures. Two adjoining structures on the same area of
land need to be separated by at least the following value δMT.
Here, δ M1 and δ M2 are the lateral displacement of each structure calculated according to
0306.5.7 or 0306.7.4.
When the structure is adjacent to the boundary line of the site, the structure must be
separated from the boundary line of the site by the minimum lateral displacement δ M.
0306.9 Construction, Mechanical, and Electrical Non-Structural Elements
Non-structural elements of buildings, devices, electric facilities, etc. that are permanently
installed to a structure, must be Designed to bear the equivalent static load and
displacement that are determined according to this subsection. However, if the weight of a
structure that is supported by a different structure exceeds 25% of the total weight, follow
the regulations from 0306.10.
0306.9.1.1 Applicable Scope
The non-structural elements shall be deemed to belong to the same earthquake resistance
criteria (0306.4.3) of the structure in which the non-structural elements will be installed.
However, the non-structural elements that meet the following conditions shall not be
applied to this regulation.
(1) Non-structural elements installed in the structure from the earthquake resistance
criteria ‘A’.
(2) Non-structural elements, excluding guardrails, installed in the structure from the
earthquake resistance criteria ‘B’ and it’s occupancy importance factor Ip is 1.0, also
supported by a bearing wall or shear wall.
(3) Mechanical or electrical non-structural elements installed in the structure from the
earthquake resistance criteria ‘B’.
(4) Non-structural elements that are installed in the structure from the earthquake
resistance criteria ‘C’ and have an occupancy importance factor Ip of 1.0.
(5) Mechanical and electrical non-structural elements installed in all the structures in the
earthquake resistance criteria with an occupancy importance factor Ip of 1.0, consisting of
flexible materials in the connection parts with duct or pipe, and with an installation height
less than 1.20 and a weight less than 1,800N, while not significantly affecting the
structural functions.
(6) Mechanical and electrical non-structural elements installed in the structures in the
earthquake resistance criteria ‘D’ with an occupancy importance factor Ip of 1.0 and with a
weight less than 100N, consisting of flexible materials in the connection parts with duct or
pipe.
0306.9.1.2 Equivalent Static Load
Equivalent static load Fp from an earthquake shall be calculated according to formula
(0306.9.1). Fp should be independently applied to the longitudinal and perpendicular
direction by considering the movable loads that apply to the non-structural elements. If the
wind load on the non-structural external wall exceeds Fp, proper Designing is required for
the wind load.
There is no need for Fp to exceed the following value.

Fp = 1.6SDSIpWp(0306.9.2)
However, Fp should be more than the following value.
FP = 0.3SDSIpWp(0306.9.2)
Here, ap: Amplification factor with a value between 1.0~2.5 (<Table 0306 . 9.1> or
<Table 0306.9.2>).
Fp : Designed earthquake force working on the center of the non-structural element mass
IP : As the occupancy importance factor of a non-structural element, 1.0 or 1.5
(0306.9.1.4)
h : Average height from the base to the roof layer of the structure
RP : As a response correction factor of non-structural elements, a value between 1.0~5.0
(<Table 0306.9.1>or <Table 0306.9.2>)
SDS : Designed spectrum acceleration in a short period determined according to 0306.3.3.
WP : Movable load of non-structural elements
z : Height from the base of a structure to where a non-structural element is attached.
z = 0: When a non-structural element is attached below the base of a structure
z = h: When a non-structural element is attached above the roof layer
0306.9.1.3 Relative Displacement
The relative displacement Dp by an earthquake should be calculated as follows. The Dp is
for the two connection points of which the vertical positions for two identical structures
or structural systems are x and y.
However, Dp doesn’t need to excceed the following value.

Dp is for the two connection points of which the vertical positions for two independent
structures or structural systems are x and y.
However, Dp doesn’t need to exceed the following value.
Here Dp: Relative displacement by the earthquake that the non-structural elements must
accommodate
hsx: Floor height used to define the allowable side sway in<Table 0306.4.7>
δ x A , δ y A , δ y B : Displacement on the vertical position x or y of the A or B structure,
calculated by multiplying the Cd value of <Table 0306.6.1> to the value calculated from
the elastic analysis
X: Height from the base of the structure to the top installation point x.
Y : Height from the base of the structure to the bottom installation point y.
ΔaA, ΔaB: Structure A or B specified in <Table 0306.4.7> or the allowed side sway.
0306.9.1.4 Occupancy Importance Factor
The occupancy importance factor of a non-structural element IP is set at 1.0. However, if
it meets the following conditions, IP is set to 1.5.
(1) If the non-structural element is related to life safety and is supposed to be working
after an earthquake.
(2) If a hazard material or flammable material is contained in the non-structural element.
(3) If it is aloading equipment opened to the public, for instance installed in large
warehouse style stores.
(4) Non-structural element that is required for consistant operation of a facility or can
affect the consistant operation in case damaged in a structure that is categorized at
earthquake resistance level (Special) from <Table 0306.4.1>.
0306.9.1.5 Anchorage
The anchorage of a non-structural elements needs to adhere to the following conditions.
(1) The load on the non-structural element’s connection area is determined according to
0306.9.1.2. However, if the non-structural element is an expandable fixture or chemical
fixture, or fixed in low by a (low distortion level) field fixture, then Rp calculates the
connection area force using 1.5.
(2) The fixtures that will be buried in concrete or masonry structures must be Designed to
transfer the power of the smallest value from the following items.
Design Force of the Connection Area
1.3 times the force from the Fp Rp of the connection area.

The maximum value of the force delivered to the area where a non-structural system
is connected.
(3) The internal force of the anchorage is calculated while considering the influence of
the eccentricity and prying effects.
0306.9.2 Non-Structural Elements in Construction
The non-structural elements in construction, specified in <Table 0306.9.1>, and their fixtures
must be Designed according to the regulations in 0306.9.1
〈Table 0306.9.1〉Design Factor of the Non-Structural Elements in Construction
Non-structural elements or members in construction ap1) Rp
1. Interior non-structural walls or curtain walls
a. Unreinforced masonry walls 1.0 1.25
b. Other walls or curtain walls 1.0 2.5
2. Cantilever member (In case it is not laterally supported or supported by a frame under the
mass center.)
a. Parapet or interior cantilever non-structural walls 2.5 2.5
b. Vertical exhaust pipe supported by a chimmey or 2.5
2.5
frame structure.
3. Cantilever member (In case it is not laterally supported or supported by a frame above the
mass center.)
a. Parapet 1.0 2.5
b. Chimneys and exhaust pipes 1.0 2.5
c. Exterior non-structural walls 1.0 2.5
4. Exterior non-structural wall members and connection areas.
a. Wall members 1.0 2.5
b. Body of the wall board connection area 1.0 2.5
c. Tightening area of a connection system 1.25 1.0
5. Surface finishing material
a. Members and extraneous matters of which the 1.0
2.5
distortion is limited.
b. Members and extraneous matters of which the 1.0
1.25
distortion is low.
6. Roof top (Excluding the extended frame from the 2.5
3.5
building)
7. Ceiling 1.0 2.5
8. Cabinet
a. Storage cabinet and experiment devices 1.0 2.5
9. Access way floor
a. Special access way floor 1.0 2.5
b. Others 1.0 1.25
10. Annexs and Decorations 2.5 2.5
11. Signs and Billboards 2.5 2.5
12. 1~11 Other hard non-structural elements
a. Members and extraneous matter that can be highly 1.0
3.5
distorted.
b. Members and extraneous matter of which the 1.0
2.5
c. Members and extraneous matter of which the 1.0
1.25
distortion is low.
13. 1~11 Other soft non-structural elements
a. Members and extraneous matter that can be highly 1.0
3.5
distorted.
b. Members and extraneous matter of which the 2.5
2.5
c. Members and extraneous matter of which the 2.5
1.25
distortion is low.
1) When it is proved by detailed dynamic analysis, a lower ap can be used, but its value
should be more than 1.
Reduced ap has a value between 1 and 2.5. 1 is used for strongly attached devices
and 2.5 is used for weakly attached devices.
0306.9.3 Mechanical and electrical Non-structural Elements
The machanical and electrical system non-structural elements, specified in <Table
0306.9.2>, and the fixtures and facilities that support this, must be Designed according
to the regulations in 0306.9.1
<Table 0306.9.2〉Designed Coefficients of the Mechanical and Electrical Non-structural Elements
Mechanical and electrical non-structural ap Rp
elements of members
1. General Mechanical Devices
a. Boiler and heater machine room 1.0 2.5
b. Covered independent pressure container 2.5 2.5
c. Vertical exhaust pipe 2.5 2.5
d. Cantilever chimmey 2.5 2.5
e. Others 1.0 2.5
2. Manufacturing and Handling Machines
a. General 1.0 2.5
b. Conveying machine (except for riding
2.5 2.5
machines)
3. Piping System
a. Materials and extraneous matter that can be
1.0 3.5
highly distorted.
b. Members and extraneous matter of which
1.0 2.5
the distortion is limited.
c. Members and extraneous matter of which
1.0 1.25
the distortion is low.
4. HVAC System Equipment
a. Separated from the vibration 2.5 2.5
b. Not separated from the vibration 1.0 2.5
c. Installed with ducts 1.0 2.5
d. Others 1.0 2.5
5. Elevator non-structural elements 1.0 2.5
6. Escalator non-structural elements 1.0 2.5
7.Tower that is supported with a truss
(independent type or supported by cables) 2.5 2.5
8. General electrics
a. Dispersed system (generator duct, wiring,
1.0 3.5
cable board)
b. Devices 1.0 2.5
9. Electrical lighting devices 1.0 1.25
0306.10 Earthquake Resistance Design of Structures

0306.10.1.1 Applicable Scope
This subsection applies when Designing all the structures (hereinafter referred to as Structures) among
the structures that receive vertical load that are not categorized as buildings, vehicles or train bridges,
nuclear power plants, docks, or dams.
0306.10.1.2 Structures that are Supported by Other Structures
(1) If a structure is supported by another structure and the weight of the structure is less than 25 % of the
total sum between the structure and the supporting structure, then the Designed seismic force on the
structure should be determined according to 0306.9.
(2) If the weight of a structure is over 25% of the sum between the weights of the structure and the
supporing structure, the Designed seismic force, for the total system made up of the structure and the
support structure, must be calculated according to 0306.10.
(3) The response correction factor should meet the following conditions.
If the structure is relatively flexible in the whole system, the response correction factor
of the whole system should not exceed 3.
If the stiffness of the structure is relatively significant in the whole system, the
supporting structure value should be applied to the response correction factor of the whole
system.
0306.10.1.3 Construction, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment of the Structure.
Design of the construction, mechanical and electrical equipment that are supported by the
structure should follow 0306.9.
0306.10.2 Earthquake Resistance Design Regulations
Designing structures that resist the earthquake force should adhere to the following
conditions,
0306.10.2.1 Effective Net Weight
The effective net weight for calculating the seismic Design force is the sum of the fixed
load and movable weight, including the storage tank, the contents inside containers and
pipes, etc. If the load from snow and ice is over 25% of the effective net weight, then this
load must also be included.
0306.10.2.2 Natural Period
The natural period must be calculated by an appropriate method that takes into
consideration the distortion and structural characteristics of resistance elements, like the
method in 0306.7.3.1, or it must be calculated using Rayleigh's period calculation formula
from the structural analysis.
0306.10.2.3 Displacement Limit
The displacement limit follows the rules of 0306.4.6. However, when it is verified that
there is no hindrance to structural stability, the rules of 0306.4.6 do not have to apply.
0306.10.2.4 Seismic Design Force
Seismic Design force of the structure should be determined by considering 0306.5.1 and
the following conditions. The vertical distribution of the Designed seismic force should
follow 0306.5.5.
(1) The response correction factors should be the smaller value among the values from
<Table 0306.10.1> or <Table 0306.6.1>.
(2) If a response factor from <Table 0306.10.1> is used, change the formula <0306.5.1>
as follows.
CS= 0.14SDS IE(0306.10.1)
(3) Occupancy importance factor is the value set forth in <Table 0306.10.2>.
<Table 0306.10.1> Design Factors of Structures
Earthquake force resistance system of structures R Ω0 Cd
1. Frame system
a. Concentrically braced steel frame 5 2 4.5
2. Moment resistance frame system
a. Moment frame of the steel frame 4 3 3.5
b. Central moment frame of reinforced concrete 5 3 3.5
c. Regular moment frame of reinforced concrete 3 3 2.5
3. Steel loading equipment 4 2 3.5
4. Elevated storage tank, storage container, storage box or funnel box: 3 2 2.5
a. Supported on braced pillars or 3 2 2.5
b. Supported on non-braced pillars 2 2 2
c Irregularly braced pillars supported on a single base or skirt 2 2 2
d Welded steel frame 2 2 2
e. Concrete
5. Lateral weld connected steel frame storage container supported on a base 3 2 2.5
6. A tank or a storage container supported on a structure style tower that is similar to a building. 3 2 2
7 Plane bottom tanks or storage containers supported on the ground.
a. Fixed (welded or bolted steel frames) 3 2.5
22
b. Non-fixed (welded or bolted steel frames) 2.5 2
8. Reinforced concrete or pre-stress concrete
a.Tanks with the reinforced bottom that protects from sliding 23 22 22
b.Tanks with fixed and flexible bottoms
9. Tanks that are not fixed or restricted
1.5
a. Flexible bottom 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
1.5
b. Other materials
10. Concrete silo, flue, and chimmeys that use a consistent wall framing from the base 3 1.75 3
3〉
11. Other reinforced mansonry structures 3 2 2.5
12. Other non-reinforced mansonry structures 3〉 1.25 2 1.5
13. Other steel frames except flue, chimneys, silos, skirt supports, and vertical storage containers,
and cantilever structures that have the mass distribution of a steel concrete structure. 3 2 2.5
14. Truss style towers (independent style or bracing wire style), flue, and chimneys with bracing
3 2 2.5
wire supports.
15. Cooling towers
3.5 1.75
a. Concrete or steel frameworks 33
3.5 3
b. Wooden structure frameworks
16. Telecommunication towers Truss:
3 1.5 3
a. Steel frames.
1.5 1.5 1.5
b. Poles: Steel frames
1.5 1.5 1.5
Wood
1.5 1.5 1.5
Concrete
3 1.5 1.5
c. Frameworks: Steel frame
2.5 1.5 1.5
Wooden s
2 1.5 1.5
tructure Concrete
<Table 0306.10.1> Design Factors of Structures (Cont’d)
Earthquake force resistance system of structures R Ω0 Cd
16. Telecommunications towers
a. Trusses: Steel frames 3 1.5 3
b. Poles: Steel frames 1.5 1.5 1.5
Wood 1.5 1.5 1.5
Concrete 1.5 1.5 1.5
c. Frameworks: Steel frames 3 1.5 1.5
Wooden structures 2.5 1.5 1.5
Concrete 2 1.5 1.5
17. Entertainment facilities and momuments 2 2 2
18. Inverted pendulum type structures (excluding elevated storage tanks)2 2 2 2
19. Signs and billboards 3.5 1.75 3
20. Other independent structures, tanks, or storage containers not mentioned above 1.25 2 2.5
1) Irregular Towers defined in <0306.4.4
2) Lighting rods, spotlights, etc
3) The masonry structures are not applied in earthquake resistance criteria ‘C’’D’.
<Table 0306.10.2> Occupancy importance factor of structures IE and the classification of earthquake resistance grades
Occupancy Importance factors IE=1.0 IE=1.5
Earthquake resistance grades defined in Table
II (Special)
0306.4.1
Danger H-1 H-2
Functionality F -1 F-2
H–1=If the stored materials are not biologically or environmentally

hazardous, or the flammable or physical risk is low.
H–2=If the stored materials are categorized to be environmentally
hazardous or physically dangerous according to the Fire Services Act,
Toxic Chemical Control Acts, or Industrial Health & Safety Acts.
F–1=Structures that are not classified as F-2.
F–2=Structures that are classified as earthquake resistance grades (Special)
or Designated adjuncts that are classified as the earthquake resistance
grades (Special) and are required to operate the structures
(telecommunication towers, fuel storage tanks, cooling towers or
substations, etc)
0306.10.2.5 Structures with Strong Stiffness
A structure with a natural period of less that 0.06 seconds, and its fixed equipment, must
be Designed for the following base shear force. The vertical distribution of the seismic
force follows 0306.5.5.
V = 0.35SDSWIE(0306.10.2)
Here, IE: Occupancy importance factor defined in <Table 0306.10.2>
SDS: Short term Design spectrum acceleration defined in 0306.3.3.
V: Total base shear for of the structure
W: Effective weight of the structure defined in 0306.10.1
0307 Earth Pressure and Underground Water Pressure
These regulations shall be applied in calculating the earth pressure and underground water
pressure that affect the construction and structures.
0307.2 Earth Pressure and Underground Water Pressure that Affect Wall Frames
(1) When Designing the underground exterior walls, effects of the earth pressure,
underground water pressure, and the static and dynamic loads on the ground surface must
be considered.
(2) Reduced soil weight from the buoyancy and underground water pressure must be
considered at the same time when calculating the earth pressure under the ground water
level.
0307.3 Underground Water Pressure Acting on the Ground
The ground structure that borders the soil must be safe from the water pressure that acts
across the entire lower bottom area.
0308 Thermal Load
This section applies to the calculation of thermal loads acting on structural bodies of
buildings and structures.
0308.2 Thermal Load
When Designing a structure, the load effect from the temperature must be taken into
account.
0309 Fluid Pressure and Container Content Load
This section applies to the calculation of fluid pressure and container content loads acting
on structural bodies of buildings and structures.
0309.2 Fluid Pressure
(1) As containers that are on the ground, matters related to fluid pressures, such as water
tanks, oil tanks, etc, must be taken into consideration.
(2) When Designing the container, the horizontal pressure acting on the walls and the
vertical pressure acting on the floor must be taken into consideration. In addition, where
there is pressure from such things as air pressure on the surface of the liquid, then the
horizontal and vertical force created by this pressure must additionally be taken into
consideration.
0309.3 Container Content Load
0309.3.1 Liquid Pressure
The liquid pressure of the container content follows 0309.2 (Fluid Pressure).
0309.3.2 Pressure of Powder and Particle-Shape Materials
0309.3.2.1 Conditions to Calculate the Design Pressure of Storage Materials
The pressure used in Designing storage materials is not just a static pressure, but must
take into consideration all the expected variations of pressure, such as when the materials
are loaded, released, or when the storage materials that were loaded in an arch form
suddenly collapse, or when air pressure and eccentricity are released. For cluster
containers, this must be considered combining when each container is full and when each
container is empty.
0309.3.2 2 Static Pressure of Storage Materials
Static pressure, acting on the container by stored materials in a static state, can be seen as
unit static pressure in a vertical direction, static pressure in a horizontal direction, friction
in a vertical direction, etc.
0309.3.2 3 Design Pressure from Stored Materials
Design pressure from stored materials is calculated by multiplying the appropriate over
load factor or impact factor to the static pressure.
0309.3.2.4 Design Pressure of Air Pressure Containers
The Design pressure of air pressure containers is selected from the greater value between
(1) and (2) below.
(1) The calculated Design pressure that ignores the air pressure
(2) When the air pressure is considered, then the Design pressure in a state where the
particles in the air are not touching each other so the density is less than the static state
(the vertical friction per unit length of the wall is the same as when there is no air
pressure)
0309.3.2 5 Increase or Decrease of Pressure From Asymmetrical Flow of Materials
When Designing a container, the influence of the asymmetrical flow from the outlet is
considered, and the circumferential bending moment according to pressure changes
around the container are reflected in the wall Design. 0310 Conveying Equipment and
Attached Equipment Load
This section applies to the calculation of conveying equipment and attached equipment
load acting on structural bodies of buildings and structures.
0310.2 Conveying Equipment and the Load from its Installation
0310 3 Power Interlocking Device Support Structures
For structures that support power interlocking devices, the load from shock or vibrations
according to the rotation of their shaft and their weight
0310 4 Load of all construction equipment, piping, duct, and any other supplementary
equipment
Chapter 4 Foundation Structures
0401 General Items
0401.1 Applicable Scope
(1) This chapter applies to the basement walls, retaining walls and earth retention,
foundation of buildings and structures (hereinafter referred to as "buildings et al."), etc.
(2) When Designing from a special survey or research, this chapter does not have to
apply. In such a case, the basis must be clearly explained.
(3) This chapter regulates such matters as the allowable bearing capacity based on the
allowable stress Design, but when using yield bearing capacity or ultimate bearing
capacity, strength Design based on performance or limit state Design is also possible.
0401.2 Definition of Terminology
Steel piles : Steel pipe piles or section steel piles
Readymade piles : Concrete piles or steel piles already made in a factory
Foundation :It means a foundation plate and foundation, and it is also called foundation
structure when it is called to be identified from the upper structure
Wood piles : piles made of raw trees
Independent foundation : The foundation that allows the axial force from piles to go to the
foundation and the ground
Friction piles : The piles resisting the most of bearing force with the surrounding friction.
Piles: The foundation that transfers load to the ground of a column shape made in the
middle of the ground below the foundation plate in order to transfer the load of the
foundation plate to the ground
Maximal bearing force of a pile : The maximal vertical load that a pile can bear
Allowable soil bearing force of a pile : The load that allows sinking or differential
settlement to be within the allowable limits within the allowable bearing force of a pile
Allowable bearing force of a pile: the maximal bearing force divided by a safety factor
Embedded piles : The piles embedded in the ground whose entire length of a readymade
pile is dug out
Combined foundation : The foundation that allows the stress of one or more piles to be
conveyed to the ground or the foundation through a foundation plate
Negative friction force : The friction force reacting downward around the piles when the
ground around the piles driven near bearing layers is sunken
Quick sand : The phenomenon of sand grains swollen at sand layers due to the difference
of water pressure. Boiling
Sounding : The method of investigating the condition of a fondation based on the
resistance to penetration, rotation, and pull-out by inserting resistant materials into the
ground
Design method based on performance : The method of designing buildings to meet the
required performance at the use limit status, the damage limit status, and the maximal
status against the set external force.
Slime: Remnants of soil collected at the bore wall or the bore base when making a hole in
the ground
Liquefaction:The phenomenon that the loose sand saturated in the water lose shear
resistance because clearance water pressure is rapidly increased by vibration and impact
Floating foundation:The foundation that conveys the stress in the broad area of the upper
structure to the foundation or the ground by connecting it with single foundation plates
In- situs testL : Test in which the properties of the foundation are investigated at the
subject site by using points or boring holes
Emergence phenomenon: The phenomenon that the bottom face of the dug area is
swollen due to the weight of the soil outside the dug area in the weak clay
ground.Heaving
Joint piles : The pile made by jointing the type of 2 or more piles
Contact pressure : The pressure reacted between the edge and the ground by spread
foundation at foundation plates or pile foundations.
Wall footing, continuous foundation : The foundation that conveys the stress from walls
or various columns to the foundation or the ground by making it as a form of a band
Improvement of foundation : Improving engineering performance of foundation by
dehydration, soil rodding, and replacement of soil for the purpose of improving the soil
required for increasing the bearing force of foundation or restricting its sinking
Maximal bearing force of foundation : The maximal force resisting structures Allowable
bearing capacity of foundation: the maximal bearing force of foundation divided by a
safety factor
Rough stone foundation : the part of the rough stones , piles, or gravels provided beneath
the foundation for bearing the foundation plate
Bearing piles : the piles resisting most of the bearing force with the end of piles by
making it reach the solid foundation or bed rock through weak soil layers
Spread (thin) foundation : The foundation conveying load directly to foundation from
foundation plates
Lateral pressure : The soil pressure and water pressure reacting horizontally
Caisson : ground part in case it is sunk down the bearing layers after establishing the
underground part of basic structures made by sinking the large empty structures down the
bearing
Driven piles : The readymade piles whose entire length is driven or pushed into the
foundation
Allowable soil bearing force : The load that allows sinking or differential settlement to be
within the allowable limit within the allowable bearing force
In-site pouring concrete piles : The piles made by pouring concrete at the site after holes
are already made in the foundation
Sheeting : Temporary structures installed to prevent collapse of foundation and risk of
sinking of surrounding areas when digging the ground
Ground digging : Digging the ground to set up the foundation of a structure or part of
underground
0401.3 Major symbols
A :Area of the lower part of foundation (m2) ,Reacting area of the load of foundation(m2)
A : Cross sectional area of a polygon column surrounded by the plane made by jointing
the external sides of group piles (m2)
Ac: Clear area of a pile at an inspected cross sectional area(m2)
AGPi :Loading area of each pile (m2)
An :Governing area of each column selecting 1/2 of the distance to the adjacent
column(m2)
Ap : Actual area of a pile (m2)
Apn : Area of the circle whose radius is the distance from the center of a pile to the center
of an adjacent pile (m2)
As : Length of the shorter side of oval foundation(Diameter in case of a circle (m) 81 ：
Width of a loading plate(m)
B : Length of the shorter side of oval foundation(Diameter in case of a circle)(m)
B1 : Width of a loading plate(m)
B2 : Width of foundation(m)
Βt : Width of a loading plate for a test(m)
Cp : Type of soil and empirical factor as per the piling method
C : Cohesion of the lower ground of the lower plane of foundation(kN/m2)
Df : Depth from the minimal ground adjacent the foundation to the lower plane of
foundation (m)
D : Width or diameter of a pile(m)
D0 : The minimal center to center distance that can ignore the effect of group piles
d : Diameter of a pile(m)
ES : Modulus of elasticity of foundation (kN/m2)
Ep : 일어나는 부재에서 이에 저항하도록 배치하
e1 : Clearance ratio to stress σ 1Z
e2 : Clearance ratio to stress σ 2Z(＝ σ 1Z＋ Δ σ Z)
FS : Safety factor (3.0 at limit load 3.0, 2.0 at yield load)
fe : Allowable soil bearing force (kN/m2)
fs : Short-term allowable stress of pile materials(kN/m2)
H1 : level of ground water (m)
IS : Factor determined by the shape and the strength of the bottom of the foundation
IS1 : Settlement factor of a laoding plate
IS2 : Settlement factor of foundation
Ksp : Empirical factor(the value in consideration of the distance of rocks)
L : Length of a pile(m)
Lb : Driven depth of a pile(m)
Ln : Distance from the head of a pile to the neutral point(m)
L : Length of a longer side of a oval foundation(m)
M' : Moment(Bending moment of a column at the column base)
M : Moment acting on the center of the bottom of foundation (= M +Qz')
Nc,Nr,Nq : Factor of bearing force(function of internal friction angle)
n : number of group piles (piece)
n : Limit of slenderness ratio where allowable compressive stress of materials does not
have to be decreased (Table 0407.7.3.1)
P : Vertically concentrated load acting on the ground surface(kN)
P: Vertically concentrated load acting on the bottom of the foundation (kN)(= P'+
Ws＋WF)
P : Vertical load acting on the foundation plate including the self weight of the foundation
(kN)
Pn : Vertical laod of an each column including the self weight of the foundation in the
governing area (kN)
ΣP : Sum of vertical loads including the self weight of the foundation(kN)
P' : Vertical load from a column(kN)
P：말뚝머리에 작용하는 장기하중(kN)
Po : Fixed load applied to the head of a pile(kN)
PFN : The maximal axial force generated at the neutral point by negative friction(kN)
Q' : Horizontal force from a column (shear strength of a column at the column base)(kN)
Q : Horizontal load acting on the bottom of the foundation(kN)(＝ Q')
z : Distance between Q' reaction point and the bottom of the foundation
qd : Limit end bearing force per the area of a pile (kN/m2)
Qa' : Allowable bearing force modified in consideration of negative friction of a prime
plane (kN/m2)
Qpa : Load conveyed to the end of a pile when design load is loaded at a pile(kN)
Qfi : Load conveyed to the prime plane of a pile when design load is loaded at a pile (kN)
Qnf : Negative friction of a prime plane (kN/m2)
Qu' : Limit bearing force of a pile by the foundation below the neutral point, namely, the
sum of the limit bearing force of the end of a pile and the friction force of the prime plane
between the neutral point and the end of a pile. (will be ignored in case of friction piles)
(kN/m2)
qa : Allowable bearing force(kN/m2)
q : Load per area acting on the foundation(kN/m2)
qa : Allowable bearing force (kN/m2)
r : Radius of a pile(m)
R : The distance from the reacting point of load to a certain point(m )
tRa : Allowable pull-out resistant force in consideration of the effect of group
piles(kN/piece)
RF : Limit bearing force by the friction around the piles below the neutral point(kN)
Rup : Limit bearing force of the end of a pile(kN)
S : Shear strength of soil(kN/m2)
S : Settlement(mm)
SE : Immediate settlement(m)
S1 : Settlement of a flat plate(mm)
S2 : Settlement of foundation(mm)
Uc : Average uniaxial compressive strength of a rock presented in ASTM D2938～71
W : Building weight(kN)
W : Buoyancy will be considered at the part below the water level with the weight per area
of the soil and pile acting on the lower plane of the group piles (kN/m2)
W : Effective weight of the soil of the pile and inside it.(kN)
W' : Effective weight of the pile located above the neutral point (kN)
Ws' : The effective weight of the soil replaced by the piles located lower than the
neutral point (kN)
W s' : Self weight of the foundation(kN)
WS : The weight of the soil for filling right above the foundation(kN)
Z : The depth from the ground surface to a certain point(m)
Z : The depth measured downward and vertically from the point where the amount of
settlement is calculated(m)
Z : Depth from the ground surface(m)
α s : Factor as per the distribution of friction force around a pile
α : Eccentricity of load and the factor of contact pressure defined by the shape of the
lower plane
β i : The ratio of the loaded area of each pile and As (AGPi/AS)
α,β : Shape factor of the foundation
α t,βt : Shape factor of the load plate used for a test
γ 1 : Unit volumetric weight of the lower ground of the lower foundation (kN/m3)
γ 2 : Unit volumetric weight of the upper ground of the lower foundation(kN/m3)
γ : Humid unit volumetric weight of the ground (kN/m3)
γ ' : Submerged unit volumetric weight of the ground (kN/m3)
λ : Factor as per the shape of the end of a pile
μ : Decrease rate of slenderness ratio(%)
μ : Friction coefficient of the foundation bottom and the ground
ν : Poisson ratio of the ground
Δ σ z : Vertical stress increment at a point of the ground (kN/m2)
σ 1Z : effective ground stress at the point Z before construction(kN/m2)
σ 2Z : effective ground stress at the point Z after construction(kN/m2)
σ y : Yield stress of pile materials(kN/m2)
σ e : contact pressure for design(kN/m2)
τ : Negative friction stress around the piles (kN/m2)
ψ : The length of a pile(m)
ψ : The circumference of the polygon column surrounded by the plane jointing the
external pile surfaces of the outside of the group piles
(m)
0402 Soil Survey
The soil survey, which is necessary to obtain the materials needed for foundation Design,
is divided and conducted as a preliminary survey and a main survey.
0402.2 Preliminary Survey
(1) The preliminary survey is conducted to map out the form of the foundation and to set
up a plan for the main survey, and it used to grasp an outline of the soil components
within the work site, the hardness and softness of the layer soils, the position of the ground
water, etc.
(2) The preliminary survey is a survey carried out in connection with the foundation of
nearby buildings and with the determination of the overall soil condition, based on the
topography and the collection of foundation soil survey data. When this is thought to be
insufficient, then depending on the conditions of the site, appropriate surveys are
implemented, such as drilling surveys, standard penetration tests, sampling, geophysical
prospecting, trial digging, etc.
0402.3 Main Survey
The main survey is conducted to obtain various data necessary to Design and build the
foundation, so by conducting a drilling survey or by some other method, the state of soil
components within the site, bearing capacity of the foundation, underground water,
settlements, and various properties of the soil, which are within the scope of influencing
construction, are surveyed.
The survey scope and survey conditions of the main survey are according to the following.
0402.3.1 Survey Scope
The survey space, survey place, and survey depth are determined according to the scale of,
and the type of, buildings and soil conditions measured in the preliminary survey.
0402.3.2 Survey Conditions
Depending on the conditions of the soil, an appropriate in-situs test and soil test are
conducted, and the necessary soil properties are determined for the construction of the
foundation and the calculation of the bearing capacity and settlement amounts.
0402.4 Survey Method
The soil test, the standard penetration test, sample, in-situs test, and the ground water
survey are conducted in the following way.
0402.4.1 Soil Test
The soil test and the sampling method are done in accordance with Korea industrial
standards.
0402.4.2 Plate Bearing Test
The bearing plate of the bearing plate test has a standard diameter of 300mm, and the
maximum bearing load is three times the predicted long-term Design load or the ultimate
bearing capacity of the diameter. The bearing is carried out divided into at least 5 steps,
and for each load step the load increases in a state recognizing that the settlement has
stopped.
0402.4.3 Pile Load Test
In the load test of the pile, the maximum load is in principle three times the predicted
long-term Design load or the ultimate bearing capacity of the pile, and follows the
appropriate enforcement methods.
0402.4.4 Pile Driving Test
For the pile-driving test, an appropriate pile driving device is selected and then in principle
the amount of rebound and penetration of each test is measured at the necessary depth.
0402.4.5 Ground Water Survey
The survey for ground water measures the water level and the coefficient of permeability
for each layer.
0403 Foundation Plan
0403.1 Fundamentals of Plan
(1) The foundation of buildings et al. must sufficiently understand the structural
performance of the superstructure, and the foundation must be planned taking into account
the balance of the entire building.
(2) The performance of the foundation structure must be planned to ensure the safety and
serviceability of the superstructure.
0403.2 Soil Survey Plan
0403.2.1 Plan Set-Up
In order to obtain the necessary soil information needed for the foundation Design, the soil
survey must be planned taking into account the predicted building site conditions and the
structural conditions.
0403.2.2 Selecting Examination Items
An effective soil survey plan must be set up by selecting the following examination items
that can satisfy the performance of the foundation structure.
(1) Bearing Capacity and Settlement
(2) Kinetic Properties of the Soil
(3) Water Pressure and Liquefaction
0403.3 Soil Safety
0403.3.1 Understanding Soil Characteristics
The characteristics of the soil must be clearly understood based on the soil survey or site
exploration, or other such surveys.
0403.3.2 Examining Soil Stability
For the following items, evaluations and examinations must be conducted beforehand, or
measured construction methods for such issues as soil improvement must be examined as
needed.
(1) Effects due to soil settlements
(2) Possibility of distortion or collapse of the plane that includes land on an inclined site
(3) Possibility of liquefaction arising at the time of an earthquake
0403.4 Selection of Foundation Type and Bearing Ground
0403.4.1 Selection of Bearing Ground
The foundation as a rule is supported on favorable ground.
0403.4.2 Selection of Foundation Type
(1) The foundation type must be selected in a reasonable manner after examining such
factors as structural performance, constructability, economic feasibility, etc.
(2) The foundation must take into consideration the scale, type, structure, stiffness, etc. of
the superstructure, must be compatible with the conditions of the soil and conditions of the
site, and must not have any dangerous obstacles that can arise.
(3) The influence on the surrounding area of the site must be sufficiently taken into
consideration at the time of selecting the foundation type, and it is better to also take into
consideration the influence of structures and their construction, that will be built on
adjacent sites in the future.
(4) For foundations of the same structure, the combination of possible mixed type
foundations must be avoided.
0403.5 Soil Settlement
0403.5.1 Settlement Predictions
The foundation should be built to prevent excessive settlements, inclines, etc. Therefore,
by examining the results of the soil survey or the data connected with the current soil, then
such factors as the existence of soil settlement, its size, its probability of arising, etc. must
be predicted.
0403.5.2 Establishing Settlement Measures
(1) The structure must ensure the safety and serviceability for the predicted soil
settlement.
(2) When there is a possibility that the soil settlement can damage the structure,
then one of the following measures must be established.
The foundation should have sufficient strength for the stress force arises according to
the soil settlement.
The foundation should also distort according to the soil settlement.
A device that controls the amount of settlement, according to the progression of soil
settlement, is used for the foundation structure.
0403.6 Inclined Ground
0403.6.1 Slope Stability
The slope area of the construction site, especially for slopes that can form during the
construction of the structure, must ensure its stability without fail.
0403.6.2 Suitability of Foundation Type
The foundation type is selected taking into consideration the structure, form, and scale of
the structure, but it must be especially sure to suit the conditions of the soil and the
geographical features of the unique inclined ground.
0403.6.3 Evaluation on the Influence of Slopes and Loosening Earth Pressure
When Designing the foundation, the geographical features and working load of the unique
inclined ground, and the conditions of the soil, must be kept in mind. Also, the bearing
capacity of the soil, the horizontal resistance of the pile, etc., must be evaluated taking into
consideration the influence of the slope
0403.7 Soil Improvement
0403.7.1 Problem of Soft Soil
If a structure is established on soft soil, then either during the construction process or
afterwards, various problems will arise, so an improvement method measure must be set
up through a technical survey of the soft soil.
0403.7.2 Selection of Improvement Method
When selecting an improvement method, a method that is appropriate for the conditions of
the area and for the characteristics of the soil, after sufficiently examining the validity of
each method.
0403.8 Liquefaction of the Soil
0403.8.1 Examining the Possibility of Liquefaction
Foundations that have been place on top of soil that has a high possibility of liquefaction,
such as saturated sand soil, must have the possibility of liquefaction examined in order to
prevent damage from it.
0403.8.2 Liquefaction Evaluation
For soil with a possibility of liquefaction, the liquefaction must be evaluated using the
ground acceleration and the Design earthquake magnitude defined in 0306 Seismic Load,
and using the results of the on-site test according to the seismic category.
0403.8.3 Liquefaction Countermeasures
For soil that requires a countermeasures due to the results of the liquefaction evaluation,
action must be taken to increase the ability to resist liquefaction by applying such methods
as the soil improvement method.
0404 Settlement and Bearing Capacity of Foundation Soil
0404.1 Basic Policy
(1) The foundation must support the superstructure safely, and must not cause harmful
settlements, inclines, etc.
(2) The contact pressure in the foundation must not exceed the allowable soil pressure. In
addition, the settlement of the foundation must be within the allowable amount of
settlement and, if possible, the foundation should be even.
(3) The type of foundation differs depending on the results of the soil survey, and the size
and shape of the foundation's lower layer must be determined for direction foundations,
and for file foundations, its dimensions, quantity, placement, etc. must be determined.
0404.2 Allowable Bearing Capacity of Soil
(1) The allowable bearing capacity of soil is calculated according to formula (0404.2.1)
Long Term Allowable Bearing Capacity:
Here, qa： Allowable bearing capacity (kN/m2)

C : Adhesive force of the foundation's lower layer bottom soil (kN/m2)
γ1 : Aggregate unit weight of the foundation's lower layer bottom soil (kN/m3)
γ2：Aggregate unit weight of the foundation's lower layer upper soil (kN/m3)
(γ1,γ2：When it is under the ground water level, select the submerged aggregate unit
weight)
α, β : Coefficient of form shown in <Table 0404.2.1(1)>
Nc, Nr, Nq : Coefficient of bearing capacity shown in <Table 0404.2.1(2)> function of
internal friction angle φ
Df : The depth from the lowest ground close to the foundation to the foundation's lower
layer (m), if the adjacent site is undergoing soil excavation, when predicted, this affect
must be taken into consideration.
B : Minimum width of the foundation's lower layer (m), when it is circular in shape, the
diameter
(2) The allowable bearing capacity of the soil, if a plate bearing test has been done, can be
calculated using formula (0404.2.1) while considering the size effect and the embedment
effect of the foundation, after calculating the coefficient of bearing capacity from formula
(0404.2.2) and formula (0404.2.3), based on the maximum contact pressure (qtest) from the
bearing test.However, when this is done, caution must be taken concering the stratified
state of the soil, and for the crystalline rock layer, the bearing capacity can also be
calculated throught a field load test and an experimental method.
For clay soil:
C Nc = qtest/α t (0404.2)
For sandy soil:
γ 1⋅Nr = qtest/β t⋅Bt(0404.2.3)
Here, α t, β t : Coefficient of form for the loading plate used in the test
Bt : Width of loading plate (m)
<Table 0404.2.1(1)> Coefficient of Form
Form of Foundation's
Continuous Square Shaped Rectangular Shaped Circular Shaped
Lower Layer
1.0 +
α 1.0 1.3 1.3
0.5 0.4 0.3 81 B/L 0.3
β
0.5 – 0.1 8B/L
B : Short-edge length of square
L : Long-edge length of rectangle
<Table 0404.2.1(2)> Coefficient of Bearing Capacity

ф Nc Nr Nq
0° 5.7 0.0 1.0
5° 7.3 0.5 1.6
10° 9.6 1.2 2.7
15° 12.9 2.5 4.4
20° 17.7 5.0 7.4
25° 25.1 9.7 12.7
30° 37.2 19.7 22.5
35° 57.8 42.4 41.4
40° 95.7 100.4 81.3
45° 172.3 297.5 173.3
48° 258.3 780.1 287.9
50° 347.5 1153.2 415.1
0404.3 Selection of Settlement Amount

0404.3.1 Underground Stress
The vertical components of the underground stress caused by the vertical load of the
foudnation are calculated by forumula (0404.3.1)
Here, Δσz : Vertical stress increment of any underground point (kN/m2)

P : Vertical concentration load applied to the surface (kN)
Z : Depth from the surface to the unorganized point (m)
R : The length from the point where the load is active to the unorganized point (m)
0404.3.2 Amount of Consolidated Settlement
The calculated of the consolidated settlement amount follows (0404.3.2).
Here, S : Amount of settlement (m)

Z : Depth measured vertically downward from the point where the settlement amount is
calculated (m)
e 1 :Void ratio corresponding to the stress force σ 1Z
e2 :Void ratio corresponding to the stress force σ 2Z
σ1Z : Effective underground stress from the Z point before constructing the building
(kN/m2)
＝γH1＋ γ'(Z－H1)
σ 2Z : Effective underground stress from the Z point after constructing the building
(kN/m2)
＝σ 1Z+Δσ Z
Here, γ : Wet unit rate of aggregate of the soil (kN/m3)
γ ' : Submerged unit weight of aggregate of the soil (kN/m3)
H1 : Underground water level (m)
Z : Depth from the surface (m)
0404.3.3 Amount of Immediate Settlement
For the amount of the immediate settlement, the soil is seen as an elastic body and the
amount of the settlement is calculated by formula (0404.3.3), by appropriately setting up
Poisson's ratio and the elasticity coefficient of the soil, based on the theory of elasticity, or
the amount of the settlement is estimated using formula (0404.3.3) for the relationship
between the settlement amount and the load from the plate bearing test.
(1) Calculation from the Theory of Elasticity
SE =IS(1– v2s)qB/Es (0404.3.3)
Here, SE: Amount of immediate settlement (m)
IS : Coefficient determined by the form and stiffness of the foundation's lower layer
<Refer to Table 0404.3.3 >
q : Per unit area load active on the foundation (kN/m2)
B : Short-side length of foundation (For circular shapes, the diameter) (m)
L : Long-side length of foundation (m)
Es : Elastic coefficient of soil (kN/m2)
v : Poisson's ratio for soil
(2) Estimation from the Plate Bearing Test
〈Table 0404.3.3〉Settlement Coefficient IS (For flexible foundations)
Positioning on the Foundation's

Form of Foundation's Lower Layer IS
Lower Layer
Circular Form (Diameter B) Central 1.00
L/B = 1 1.12
1.5 1.36
2.0 1.52
Rectangular Form 2.5 1.68
Central
(B x L) 3.0 1.78
4.0 1.96
5.0 2.10
10.0 2.54
Here, S 1 : Settlement amount of the plate (m)

S2 : Settlement amount of the foundation (m)
I S1 : Settlement coefficient of the loading plate<Refer to Table 0404.3.3>
I S2 : Settlement coefficient of the foundation<Refer to Table 0404.3.3>
B1 : Width of loading plate (m)
B2 : Width of foundation (m)
0404.4 Allowable Settlement Amount
0404.4.1 Differential Settlement
(1) The allowable settlement amount must be determined so as to prevent harmful
differential settlement from arising, while taking into consideration the conditions of the
soil, the type of foundation, the characteristics of the superstructure, and the surrounding
conditions.
(2) When excessive settlement due to the conditions of the soil cannot be avoided, a new
Hooke's joint must be placed in the proper place or the stiffness of the superstructure must
be increased, in order to avoid harmful differential settlement from arising.
0404.4.2 Strengthening of Foundation
The foundation is strengthened when necessary, taking into consideration such factors as
the complexity of the soil, the degree of calculation, faults in the construction, corrosion,
or the influence of adjacent sites, etc.
0405 Load
0405.1 Load - General Items
The load used for foundation Design of buildings et. al. is treated according to the
following.
(1) When calculating the bearing capacity of the soil, set it as the value regulated in
Chapter 3. However, depending on the actual circumstances, the weight of the soil that
borders the superstructure or pile, and influences the bearing capacity, is added.
(2) When calculating the amount of settlement, set it as the value that added the weight of
the soil, the movable load that influences the settlement, and the dead weight of the
building. However, depending on the actual circumstances, the earth displacement weight
from the retaining of earth, or a part of this weight, can be subtracted.
0405.2 Earth Pressure, Water Pressure, Contact Pressure
The earth pressure and water pressure must be taken into consideration for the wall that is
in contact with the soil in the underground structural section, and the contact pressure
corresponding to the load coming from the upper section must be taken into consideration
for the foundation plate.
0405.3 Pile Force
For piles, the axial compressive force and the pull-back force, that correspond to the dead-
weight and the load transferred within the superstructure, are seen as being active, and
depending on the circumstances, the horizontal force transferred within the superstructure,
or a part thereof, must be considered as lateral force. In addition, if there is a concern that
negative side friction will arise from the soil settlement, then this must also be taken into
consideration.
0405.4 Vibration, Repeated Load
Design of foundations under vibration or repeated load must prevent injury from use of
the superstructure, and in addition must determine the load by taking into consideration
the influence on the surrounding area.
0406 Direct Foundation
0406.1 Basic Items
0406.1.1 Definition
Direct foundation refers to a foundation that expands the bottom of a column or wall
through a foundation plate, and then directly transfers the load of the superstructure to the
soil.
0406.1.2 Allowable Soil Pressure
The allowable soil pressure should be less than the allowable bearing capacity regulated in
0404.2, and the amount of settlement of the direct foundation is calculated by 0404.3.
0406.1.3 Safety, Serviceability, Durability
The direct foundation, concerning the predicted maximum load, must prevent the
superstructure from being destroyed or overturned, and in a state where load is usually
active, it must prevent excessive settlement or distortion from arising that would cause
harm to the serviceability or durability of the structure.
0406.1.4 Foundation Depth
The lower layer of the direct foundation must not cause changes in the volume of the
foundation soil due to changes in temperature, and in addition, it must be placed at a depth
that does not scour due to factors such as storm water, etc.
0406.1.5 Earthquake Resistance Design
When Designing earthquake resistance for direct foundations, the load distribution on the
foundation must be taken into consideration, the stability of the entire foundation must be
examined, and especially if liquefaction is predicted in the case of an earthquake,
appropriate countermeasures must be devised.
0406.1.6 Sliding Resistance
When there is a difference in altitude on the surface for both sides of the structure, or
when there in horizontal force active on the structure, such as when there is an earthquake,
the sliding resistance of the foundation, caused by frictional resistance on the floor,
manual resistance of the embedded sections, and other slipperiness prevention processes,
must be examined.
0406.1.7 Soil Improvement
If soil improvement is implemented and the direct foundation is applied, then this must be
done according to (Soil Improvement)
0406.1.8 Cross-Section Design
The cross section Design of the direct foundation must follow 0512 (Foundation Slab)
0406.2 Ground Pressure
0406.2.1 Independent Foundation
(1) When the resultant force of a vertical load is given in the center of an independent
foundation slab, it should be assumed that the ground pressure is distributed evenly and
use the formula (0406.2.1)
Here, σ e : Earth Pressure for Designing (kN/m2)

P : Vertical load on the foundation slab including the foundation weight (kN)
A : Bottom dimensions of the foundation slab (m2)
fe : Allowed bearing capacity of the soil (kN/m2)
(2) The earth pressure of an independent foundation slab under eccentric load can be
calculated according to formula (0406.2.2) by assuming that it is distributed linearly.
Here, σe: Earth pressure for Designing (kN/m2)

a : Earth pressure factor determined by the eccentricity of the load and the shapes of the
botton area.
P : Vertical load (kN) that is active on the foundation slab, including the foundation dead
weight. (kN)
A : Bottom dimensions of foundation slab (m2)
fe : Allowed soil pressure (kN/m2)
0406.2.2 Combined Footing
The earth pressure of a combined footing can be calculated according to formula
(0406.2.3) by assuming that it is distributed linearly considering the eccentricity of the
load.
Here, σ e: Earth pressure for Designing (kN/m2)

a : Earth pressure determined by the eccentricity of the load and shapes of the bottom
section.
ΣP : Sum of the vertical loads (kN) including the foundation dead weight.
A : Bottom area of the foundation slab (m2)
fe : Allowed soil pressure
0406.2.3 Continuous Footing
The earth pressure of a continuous footing can be calculated according to formula
(0406.2.4) by assuming that it is distributed regularly in the controlled area of each pillar.
Here , : Earthquake Pressure for Designing (kN/m2)

An: Controlled area of each column that selected ½ of the distance to the adjoined column
(m2)
Pn: Vertical load of each column including the foundation dead weight in the controlled
area (kN)
fe: Allowed soil pressure (kN/m2)
0406.2.4 Mat Foundation
The mat foundation, if it has enough stiffness, can be considered the same as the combined
footing, and its earth pressure can be calculated according to formula (0406.2.3).
0406.25 Considering Such Factors as Stiffness, etc:
For continuous footing and mat foundations that have big distribution gaps between the
column weights, or that have low stiffness, the earth pressure distribution needs to be
considered.
0407 Pile Foundation
0407.1 Basic Items
(1) The piles that don't affect the construction negatively and have a dependable force
need to be selected.
(2) Follow 0407.3 regarding the allowable force of piles.
(3) The allowed bearing capacity of the pile foundation should only be calculated from the
bearing capacity of the pile and the bearing capacity of the ground foundation for the
foundation slab’s lower section should not be added without special consideration.
(4) The eccentricity of the load needs to be revised when designing the pile foundations.
Especially when a column is supported by one kind of pile, plans for fixing the pedestal by
increasing the stiffness and force of the foundation beam must be put into place.
(5) For the foundations that receive shocks, repeated stress, lateral force, or stress force,
the safety of the resistance of the pile foundation and combined stress on the pile should
be reviewed.
(6) Supporting piles and friction piles should not be used together in the same structure. In
addition, Mixed driven piles, embedded piles, and field concrete piles should be avoided,
as well as using piles of different materials.
(7) The minimum gap between piles should meet the regulations in 0407.10.
(8) Pile heads, connection parts, and linear parts should be able to sufficiently transfer the
stress force.
0407.2 Allowable Bearing Capacity of Piles
0407.2.1 Driven piles
The allowable bearing capacity of a driven pile should be less than the value of
multiplying the minimum cross section to the long-term of allowable compressive stress
force from 0407.2.5 or small value among the value less than 1/2 of the yield load or 1/3
of the ultimate load during the loading test. If the loading test is not conducted, select the
smallest value from 1/3 of the ultimate bearing capacity calculated according to the
bearing capacity formula.
0407.2.2 Augered Pile and Cast-in-Place Concrete Pile
The allowable bearing capacity of augered piles and cast-in-place concrete piles is set at a
value less than the minimum cross-section area multiplied by the long-term allowable
compressive stress force from 0407.2.5, and the lesser value between 1/2 of the yield load
from the load test result and 1/3 of the ultimate load. However, if there was no load test
for the cast-in-place concrete pile, then the value can be set at a value lower than 1/3 of the
ultimate bearing capacity calculated from the bearing capacity calculation formula.
0407.2.3 Open-Head Piles: If the allowable bearing capacity of an open-head pile is
calculated according to the Bearing Capacity formula in 0407.2.1, the effect of closing the
head can be considered.
0407.2.4 Friction Piles: For the friction piles in the cohesive soil, the bearing capacity
should be reviewed according to the soil quality, number of piles, gaps between each pile,
and the length of the pile group.
0407.2.5 Allowable Stress Force of Pile Materials: The allowable stress force and the
short-term allowable force of pile materials should be determined from 0407.6 and the
reduction caused by the connection and slenderness ratio is done in accordance with
0407.7.
0407.2.6 Stort Term Allowable Supporting Force
When evaluating the short-term allowable supporting force, the value should be less than
the value multiplying the short-term allowable stress force to the minimum cross section
or 1.5 times of the value determined in 0407.2.1 or 0407.2.2.
0407.2.7 Consideration of Soil Settlement
Regarding the allowable stress force of the bearing piles that penetrate the ground layer
and have a possibility of soil settling, the negative friction needs to be reduced by
effective methods or the negative frictions given on the piles need to be considered
according to 0407.8.
0407.3 Allowable Bearing Power of Pile
When Designing the pile foundation, the allowable bearing power of the pile must be less
than the allowable bearing capacity of pile regulated in 0407.2, and cannot influence in a
harmful way the supra-structure in accordance with the settlement.
0407.3.1 Group Piles
For the foundations that are supported by a group of piles, the bearing capacity and
subsidence of the group piles need to be reviewed to determine its strength.
0407.3.2 Consolidated Settlement
For the pile foundations that have the possibility of consolidated settlements, the
settlement amounts from the bottom ground foundation needs to be reviewed according to
0404.3 to find out whether or not any harmful settlement will occur on the superstructure.
0407.3.3 Settlement Amount of the Pile Foundations
In calculating the settlement amount of the pile foundation, for friction piles, think of the
side where the combined force of friction and reaction force are active, and for support
piles, think of their line cross sections, as the active plane of the foundation load, and you
can see how the load is evenly distributed within that plane.
0407.4 Horizontal Power of Piles
(1) For piles under horizontal forces, must be checked so that the stress force of the pile
materials does not exceed the allowed values. In addition, it must be confirmed whether
the pile is sufficiently safe from destruction of the ground such as rotation or lateral
movement through the whole depth.
(2) For piles under horizontal forces, it must be confirmed whether its displacement can
harmfully affect the superstructure.
0407.5 Allowable Pull-Out Resistance of Piles
0407.5.1 Long-term Allowable Pull-Out Resistance
The long-term pullout resistance of a pile should be determined as follows.
(1) The long-term allowable pull-out Resistance of a single pile should be less than the
value of the minimum cross section multiplied by the long-term allowable tensile stress,
and also should be less than the value determined in or .
When conducting a pull-out test, the smaller value from 1/3 of the ultimate load or ½
of the yield load should be selected.
When not conducting a pull-out test, the smaller value between the one from the pull-
out Resistance formula of the pile and the one from the estimated value of the pull-out
Resistance from the load test should be selected.
(2) If the pull-out force is acting on a group pile, the value should be less than the value
from formula (0407.5.1) , except for the value determined according to 0407.5.1(1).
tRa= (1.5A⋅W + ψ L⋅S)/3⋅n (kN/piece)(0407.5.
Here, tRa： The allowable pull out resistance in consideration of the effecting of pile
groups (kN/piece)
S : shear strength of soil (kN/m2)
N : number of pile groups (pieces)
L : Length of a pile(m)
A : Cross sectional area of the polygon piles surrounded by the plane joining the external
face of pile groups (m2)
W : The weight per unit cross sectional area of piles and soil acting on the bottom face of
the pile groups. Buoyancy should be considered at the part below the level of underground
water. (kN/m2)
ψ: Length of circumference of the polypyramid that is surrounded by the sides that connect
the pile surface to the exterior of the group piles (m)
0407.5.2 Short-Term Allowable Pull-Out Resistance Force
The short-term allowable pull-out resistance force is less than 1.5 times the long-term
pull-out resistance force calculated in 0407.5.1.
0407.5.3 Tension Strength of Pile Connection
The tensile strength of the pile connection that is effected by the pull-out force should
have a value equivalent to or higher than the parent materials.
0407.6 Allowable Stress of the Pile Materials
0407.6.1 Wooden Piles
For the long-term allowable compressive stress of a wooden pile, the smaller value
between the value from the constant humid state as specified in chapter 8 and the value
from 5MPa needs to be selected for pine tress, larches and Oregon pines and other tress in
5MPa.
The short-term allowable compressive stress should be 1.5 times the long-term allowable
compressive stress. Here, the allowable bearing capacity should be calculated from the
minimum cross section of a wooden pile.
0407.6.2 Precast Concrete Piles
The long-term allowable compressive stress of the precast concrete pile should be a
maximum ¼ of the standard concrete Design strength. Short-term allowable compressive
stress should be 1.5 times the long-term allowable compression stress. The standard
concrete Design strength should be more than 35MPa , and the allowable bearing capacity
should be calculated at the minimum cross section of the pile.
0407.6.3 Field Concrete Piles
The long-term allowable compressive stress of the field concrete pile shall be determined
according to the field situation as follows.
(1) If the whole pile or partial concrete is casted in water or muddy water, it should be 1/5
of the standard strength of the concrete and less than 5MPa. (요) If the concrete is casted
in an excavated hole for piles without water or muddy water,
(2) If the pile is casted when there is no water or muddy water in the excavation hole used
for the pile, it should be 1/4 of the standard Design strength of the concrete used and less
than 6MPa. Also the standard Design strength of the concrete used should be more than
18MPa and the allowable bearing capacity should be calculated on the minimum cross
section of the pile. Short-term allowable compressive stress should be 1.5 times the long-
term allowable compressive stress.
0407.6.4 Steel Piles
In general, the long-term allowable compressive stress of a steel pile should be determined
by considering the yield stress and partial bucking stress of the material on the section but
excluding the corroded area. The short-term allowable compressive stress should be 1.5
times the long-term allowable compressive stress.
0407.6.5 Allowable Tension Stress
The allowable tension tress of pile materials is calculated for the cross-section described
from 0407.6.1 to 0407.6.4.
0407.6.6 Allowable Shear Stress and Allowable Bond Stress
The allowable concrete shear stress for the concrete pile subjected to bending and shear
force and the allowable steel frame bond stress to the concrete should be determined
according to the pile types and construction conditions from 0407.6.2, 0407.6.3 and based
on the allowable concrete compressive stress in Chapter 5.
For wooden piles, refer to chapter 8 and for steel piles, refer to chapter 7.
0407.7 Allowable Stress Reduction of the Pile Materials
For connection piles and piles with a significant slenderness ratio, reduce the allowable
compressive stress of the pile materials specified in 0407.6 as follows.
0407.7.1 Connection Pile Reduction
For connection piles, reduce the allowable compressive stress according to the types and
number of connections.
0407.7.2 Reduction of No-Hitting Piles
The connections of the piles that don’t require any hitting force, ½ of the connection
reduction ratio of the driven pile may be selected.
0407.7.3 Reduction of Slender Piles
For piles that have a significant slenderness ratio, the allowable compressive stress of the
pile materials should be reduced according to the material, cross section shape, ground
conditions, and construction methods by the ratio of µ (%) calculated from the following
formula.
Here, µ: Reduction rate for the slenderness ratio (%)

L/d: Slenderness ratio of pile
n: The limit value of the slenderness ratio where a decrease in the allowable compressive
stress of materials is not necessary 〈Table 0407.7.3〉
〈Table 0407.7.3〉Threshold of Allowable Stress Reduction from the Slenderness Ratio
Pile Type n Maximum value of the slenderness ratio
RC Pile 70 90
PC Pile 80 105
PHC Pile 85 110
Steel Pipe Pile 100 130
Cast in Place 60 80
Concrete Pile
Note) It is better not to Design a long pile that exceeds the max value of the
slenderness ratio, even after considering the allowable stress reduction of
the pile material from the slenderness ratio.
0407.7.4 Reduction of Slender Connection Piles

If the slenderness ratio of the connection pile is larger than n, the reduction ratio applied to
the allowable compressive stress should be the sum of each reduction ratio determined
according to each subsection.
0407.8 Negative Friction on Piles
When Designing the piles that are in the areas where the ground foundation has been or
may subside, also penetrate a compressed layer of more than 15m or other layers that are
affected by the compressed layer, in addition to examining the general load, the safety of
the pile power must be studied according to the following conditions regarding the
negative friction that affects the pile skin in a downward direction. However, the negative
friction on a short-term load need not be considered.
0407.8.1 Review of Negative Friction
To review the negative friction, adhere to the following formulas (0407.8.1) and
(0407.8.2).
Here, P: Long term load active on the pile head (kN)

PFN: Maximum axial force of the pile arising by negative friction from the neutral point (kN)
A pn: Actual cross-section area of pile (m2)
fs: Short-term allowable stress of pile materials (kN/m2)
Rup: Ultimate point bearing capacity of pile (kN)
RF: Ultimate bearing capacity from the friction of the lower pile surface on the neutral point (kN)
0407.8.2 Single Pile
PFN and RF of a single pile is calculated by the following formula (0407.8.3) and formula (0407.8.4).
Here, λ: The coefficient λ according to the type of pile end, and as an driven concrete pile
that is open-ended, has the following values:
When the diameter is more than 600mm : 0.8
Depending on the actual circumstances, for driven piles and augered piles: 1.0~0.6
Others: In all other situations: 1.0 ψ:
ψ: Head of piles (m)
τ: Negative friction stress around piles (kN/m2)

Ln: Distance from the head of a pile to the center point (m)
L: Total length of a pile (m)
0407.8.3 Group Piles
The negative friction that affects each pile in a group pile should be calculated by reducing
the negative friction PFN of a single pile by considering the effects between piles.
PFNi＝ β i⋅PFN (0407.8.5)
Here, β i: The ratio between the covered area of each pile and As
AGPi: Covered area of each pile(m2)
AS: Circular area of which the radius is from the center of a pile to the center of a
neighboring pile. (m2)
0407.9 Pile Settlement
0407.9.1 Review of Settlement
The settlement amount from the estimated load and the responding value of the
foundational material or of the superstructure, caused by the settlement of the pile, should
be reviewed to prevent it from reaching the maximum value used for Designing. For the
pile foundation where the settlement review is not considered important, the settlement
review can be skipped if the pile load is less than 1/3 of the ultimate bearing capacity.
0407.9.2 Underground Stress
The settlement of the pile must be evaluated by calculating the underground stress caused
by the load of the pile head being transferred to the ground and by integrating the
distortion of the ground in accordance with the increase of the underground stress.
0407.9.3 Consolidated Settlement
When the pile foundation is in danger of consolidated settlement arising for regular acting
loads and is supported on a soft clay layer or inter-sand layer, the pile settlement should be
the sum of the immediate settlement and the consolidated settlement.
0407.9.4 Settlement of a Single Pile
The settlement of a single pile can be evaluated from the vertical load test or according to
the settlement analysis that appropriately models the pile-ground system.
0407.9.5 Immediate Settlement of Group Piles
The immediate settlement of group piles can be calculated according to simple or complex
calculations.
0407.9.6 Distortion Angle and Incline Angle of the Foundation
As a rule, the distortion angle and incline angle of the foundation should be evaluated
according to the analysis considering the stiffness of the superstructure.
0407.9.7 Effects of Earthquakes
For piles that are installed on ground that has a possibility of liquefaction during an
earthquake, the settlement should be evaluated considering the effects of the liquefaction.
Also in case the pull-out force is active on the piles during an earthquake, the distortion of
the foundation occurs from the damages on the piles from the pull-out force, so the whole
pile foundation needs to be examined.
0407.10 Structure Regulation by Pile Material
0407.10.1 Wooden Pile
(1) For wooden piles, a raw wood that doesn’t have cracks or gaps should be used with the
skin removed, and the diameter should be mostly evenly changed from the pile head to the
end, and the diameter at the end should be greater than 120mm.
(2) The straight line that connects both ends of the wooden pile should not come out of the
pile.
(3) Only when the whole length of the pile has to stay under the ground, or when measures
are taken to ensure its durability from pest damage, can wooden piles can be used.
(4) When casting a wooden pile, the center gap should be more than 2.5 times the pile
head diameter or more than 600 mm.
0407.10.2 Precast Concrete Pile
(1) It is necessary to use a precast concrete pile that doesn't get any cracks or damage from
transporting, hitting, or burying.
(2) For the piles that are made by centrifugal force for arranging the steel bar and the
cover thickness,
┌ ┌
follow KS F4301 Concrete Piles, Centrifugal Reinforced┘, KS F4303 Pretensioned
┌
Spun Concrete Piles┘, and KS F4306 Pretensioned Spun High Strength Concrete Piles┘,
and for other piles, adhere to the following.
There should be at least 6 main bars, and the sum of their cross sections should be
more than 0.8% of the actual cross section, and they should be connected together by
using hoop bars or spiral bars.
The cover thickness of the main bar should be more than 30mm.
(3) When casting the precast concrete pile, the center gap should be more than 2.5 times
the pile head diameter and more than 750mm.
0407.10.3 Steel Piles
(1) The cross section of a steel pile should have enough strength for transporting, hitting,
or burying, and steel strips should be installed when necessary.
(2) The corrosion possibility must be reviewed for steel piles and effective plans must be
considered when ncecessary.
(3) When casting steel piles, the center gap should be more than 2.0 times the diamter or
the width of the pile head (2.5 times for close-end steel pipe piles) and be more than
750mm.
0407.10.4 Driven Piles
(1) The readymade piles used as driven ones should meet 0407.10.1~0407.10.3 for wood
piles, readymade concrete piles, and steel piles, respectively.
(2) When driven piles are used, piles should be driven until reasonable piling conditions
are obtained without damage.
0407.10.5 Augered Pile
(1) The precast concrete piles and steel piles that are used on the driven piles need to
satisfy 0407.10.2 and 0407.10.3.
(2) The bottom areas of the embedded piles must reach the supporting layer and a plan for
effective execution of the end bearing force needs to be considered.
(3) When arranging the embedded piles, the center gap needs to be more than 2.0 times
than the pile head diameter.
0407.10.6 Field Cast Concrete Piles
(1) When building field cast concrete piles, ensure that the supporting layer doesn't get
interrupted from the the destruction of the wall or from the suction phenomenon that
happens when taking out boring and excavating equipment. In addition, plans to remove
slime from the bottom part must be established.
(2) The cross section of the field cast concrete pile should not be less than each Designed
cross section
for the entire length.
(3) The linear part of the field concrete pile must reach the supporting layer.
(4) Except for in special cases, for field concrete piles, There should be at least 6 Main
bars, and the sum of their cross section should be more than 0.4% of the Designed cross
section and should be reinforced by hoop bars or spiral bars.
In this case, the cover thickness of the steel bar should be more than 60mm.
(5) The side slope of the field concrete piles of which the bottom area section is expanded
must have an angle of less than 30° with the perpendicular plane and its shear force should
be examined.
(6) When arranging field casting concrete piles, the center gap should be more than 2.0
times the pile head diameter or a value that adds more than 1,000 mm to the pile head
diameter .
0407.11 Foundation Slab Design of Pile Foundation
(1) For the pile foundation, the reaction force of the pile should be considered as the
concentrated load on the bottom foundation area and the cross section must be calculated
according to Chapter 5 (Concrete Structure) 0512 (Foundation Slab).
(2) The shortest distance from around the foundation slab to the center of a pile should be
more than 1.25 times the diameter of the pile.
0408 Caisson Foundation
0408.1 Basic Principles
The caisson must be Designed so that each of its parts ensure sufficient stability for each
condition of the construction, not including the stress, earth pressure, and water pressure
coming from the superstructure.
0408.2 Bearing Capacity
In calculating the bearing capacity of caisson foundations, the bearing capacity is set as
the end bearing capacity, and is based on the Design of 0406 (Direct Foundation).
0409 Earth Pressure and Water Pressure
In accordance with Chapter 3 (Design Load) 0307 (Earth Pressure and Ground Water
Pressure)
0410 Retaining Wall and Basement Exterior Wall
0410.1 Retaining Wall
This section applies to reinforced concrete retaining walls, plain concrete retaining walls,
and reinforced concrete block retaining walls, used at the sites of buildings et. al.
0410.1.2 Stability of Retaining Wall
After the stability of the all the activities of the building site have been confirmed, the
reinforced concrete
must meet the following condition for loading, regulated by 0405 (Load).
(1) The Design conditions of the soil conditions, load conditions, etc. must be calculated
appropriately in order to Design the retaining wall.
(2) The retaining wall and soil system can be analyzed by making an appropriate model.
(3) The strength of the ground and the distortion are reviewed for the following
conditions.
0410.1.2.1 Stability for Overturning
The overturning moment value for the retaining wall cannot exceed the stability moment
value that takes into account the safety factor.
0410.1.2.2 Stability for Sliding
The horizontal sliding coming from the horizontal components of the earth pressure acting
on the retaining wall must be secure.
0410.1.2.3 Stability for Bearing Capacity
The conditions for foundations, regulated in 0404 (Settlement and Bearing Capacity of
Foundation Soil), must be satisfied and the bearing capacity of soil and harmful
settlements must be secure.
0410.1.2.4 Stability for Overall Sliding
The total overall sliding, including the retaining wall, must be secure.
0410.1.3 Structure Design
(1) A review of retaining wall structures, crack width, and angle of member distortion
should be done according to Chapter 5 (Concrete Structure).
(2) The Design details for reinforced concrete are in 0512 and 0513. For counterfort
retaining walls, they must be appropriately reinforced to preserve continuity of the
horizontal direction.
0410.1.4 Flexible Connection
When the retaining wall is horizontally long, then an appropriate flexible connection is
installed, according to the situation.
0410.1.5 Back Drainage
The necessary measures must be taken concerning the drainage of the surrounding area
surface and the back-end of the retaining wall, and if back drainage is not being used, then
the water pressure must be taken into consideration.
0410.1.6 Soil Liquefaction
When there is a possibility that the soil around the retaining wall can be liquefied, then
this effect must be taken into account.
0410.1.7 Ground Disturbance
Consideration is required for things such as drainage so the retaining wall doesn’t disrupt
the foundation area which affects the bearing capacity of the foundation.
0410.1.8 Retaining Walls of Structures other than Reinforced Concrete Structures
For retaining walls of structures other than reinforced concrete structures, the structure of
retaining wall for such things as wall structures and foundations are Designed to be safe
against strength and deformation, in addition to complying with 0410.1.2, and with
0410.1.4 to 0410.1.7.
0410.2 External Underground Walls
One side of an external underground wall should touch the ground foundation and as a
wall where the ground and water pressure is active out of plane, it has the following
structures.
(1) Wall of a field casted reinforced concrete structure that used the cast in the same way
as the superstructure after tearing up the soil
(2) Combined structural wall, combining the reinforced concrete wall built on the inside
with the wall that uses the earth retaining wall of the reinforced concrete structure, built
according to the slurry wall method, as the external underground wall
0410.2.1. Applicable Load
The external underground wall, as an underground structure, that touches the surrounding
ground foundation must be Designed safely for the earth and water pressured specified in
0405.2 including the stress from the superstructure.
0410.2.2 Earth Retaining External Underground Wall
When Designing an external underground wall for a concrete structure according to the
same method as the underground section, after it is protected from the land, the load from
the out-plane direction must be considered as a slab to examine the stress force, and for
the load from the in-plane direction, it must be considered as a shear wall to examine the
stress force. For details, refer to 0513.
0410.2.3 External Underground Wall of a Diaphragm Wall
When Designing the external underground wall according to the diaphragm wall method
for a concrete structure, for the load from the outplane direction, the stress on the wall
structure, connection parts, joints, and postcast wall structures, etc. must be examined, and
for the load from the in-plane direction, the stress on the wall structure, connection parts,
and shear connectors must be examined.
0410.2.4 Lateral Pressure during Construction and after Completion
(1) Aside from the water pressure and ground pressure that applies after the completion of
the building described in 0410.2.1, the lateral pressure applied during construction must
also be Designed safely for the basement wall built through the method of the previous
subsections.
(2) If the secant pile wall of the field cast reinforced concrete and the earth-retaining wall
that is built according to the regulations in 0410.2.3 are used as a part of the structure, they
need to be Designed safely for the earth and water pressure during the construction and
after the completion.
0411 Earth Retention and Excavation
For underground structures that require excavation, the excavating for the underground
structure has to be proper for the land, ground foundation, and underground water
conditions. In addition, it should be safe against lateral pressure and distortion of the
underground foundation, and should not be harmful to surrounding structures or pipes.
0411.2 Earth Retention
Earth retentions should be safe from the lateral pressure that occurs during the process of
protecting from corrosion or significant distortion of the excavation wall sides, and it
should have sufficient stiffness and strength.
0411.2.1 Lateral Pressure on the Rear Side
When Designing for earth retention, the lateral pressure on the rear side of the wall should
be deemed to be increasing proportionally to the depth, and the lateral pressure coefficient
should follow <Table 0411.2.1> in accordance with the soil quality and the underground
water level.
<Table 0411.2.1> Lateral Pressure Coefficient
Ground Foundation Lateral Pressure Coefficient
Sand When the underground water level is low 0.3-0.7
foundation When the underground water level is high 0.2-0.4
Clay Soft clay 0.5-0.8
foundation Hard clay 0.2-0.5
0411.2.2 Surcharge Load

When excavation is performed near a structure or other loaded materials, add the
horizontal components of the underground stress, caused by such factors as the foundation
load or load materials of the structure , to the lateral pressure calculated according to
0411.2.1.
0411.2.3 Types of Earth Retaining Structures
Each part of the earth retaining structure are examined for strength and distortion amount,
through a method that is appropriate for their structural conditions. In addition, the
connections, joints, ect. of each member should be set as structures that can convery each
member stress force without interference.
0411.2.4 Allowable Stress of Construction Materials
The allowable stress value of the materials used for the slurry structure should be less than
the average of the long and short-term allowable stress of each material. However, avoid
using damaged materials or materials with significant deformations.
0411.3 Stability of the Lower Layer of the Excavation
Stability must be examined for each of the ground foundations where there is a danger that
they can be destroyed from uplifting or boiling.
0411.4 Stability of Allside of the Excavation
For cases in which excavation must be performed on all sides, the stability of all four sides
must be examined.
0411.5 Underground Water Treatment
When excavating soil that has a high underground water level with good water
permeability or soil with a confined aquifer, a detailed survey must be conducted, and
underground water treatment according to the drainage method or water stop method must
be performed. At this time, the effects on surrounding areas must be sufficiently
considered.
0412 Soil Improvement
0412.1 Improvement Method
When improving the soil, the applicability of the method must be considered thoroughly
and an appropriate improvement method must be Designed based on the ground features
and surrounding area situations.
0412.2 Confirmation Test
After the soil improvement is conducted, it must be confirmed whether the purpose of the
improvement was achieved, according to a test method appropriate for the ground
condition.
0412.3 Confirmation of Differential Settlement Safety
When the soil is partially improving, then depending on the situation of the improved soil
parts, it must be confirmed whether the building is safe in regards to the bearing capacity
of the subsoil, as well as in regards to the differential settlement.
Chapter 5 Concrete Structure
0501 General Items

0501.1 Applicable Scope
This chapter applies to buildings and structures using plain concrete, reinforced concrete,
pre-stress concrete, and autoclaved lightweight concrete.
0501.2 Applicable Standard
This chapter works to adhere in principle to the Concrete Structure Design Standard
(2007) of the Korea Concrete Institute, with some content added or amended.
0501.3 Basic Policy
(1) This is the general standard when Designing normal concrete structures and it
regulates the basic requirements.
(2) The Design of concrete structures applies in principle to the strength Design method
presented in this chapter. However, if the ordering body recognizes that it necessary, it can
also be done in accordance with 0521 Allowable Stress Design or with the alternate
Design method that was applied previously.
(3) When Designing concrete structures by the strength Design method, then all the
members of the reinforced concrete structure and the bending members of the pre-stress
concrete must be Designed using the load factor and the strength reduction factors
regulated in 0503. In addition, the regulations must also be satisfied concerning the
required durability and serviceability from 0504.
(4) This chapter also applies for ditch, water tank, storage tank, chimney, retaining wall,
etc. structures that are connected to building structures.
(5) When Designing from special investigative research, this standard does not need to be
applied. However, in such a situation, the basis for the Design must be made clear.
0501.4 Definition of Terminology
Strength Reduction Factor : The difference between the nominal and actual strength of
materials, the difference from the blueprint when producing or building members, and the
safety factor for considering the uncertainty related to the measurement and analysis of
power
Rigid Zone : Range within a structural body where the distortion can be ignored compared
to other parts and that can be seen as a rigid body
Steel Core : Structural steel that is placed in the central part of the composite colum cross-
section
Hook : The bent part at the end of the iron bar, for the lap joint or the fixing of the iron bar
The end part of the iron bar is bent at an angle of 180°, 135°,90° etc.
Drying Shrinkage: If concrete absorbs moisture it expands and if it then dries, it shrinks,
so this refers to the phenomenon of concrete shrinking due to the evaporation of moisture.
Factored Load: When Designing members through the strength Design method, multiply
the load factor to the working load
Boundary Member : The border part of the diaphragm or wall that has been reinforced
with iron in the axial or lateral direction (There is not necessarily a need for the thickness
of the boundary member to be greater than the thickness of the wall or diaphragm, and
when the conditions of 0520.6.6 or 0520.7.8 are applicable, the boundary member must be
place at the opening border section of the wall or diaphragm.)
High-Range Water Reducing Agents : As a kind of water reducing agent, it is an
admixture that reduces the unit quantity of water needed for obtaining the workability of
disturbances, and it used to enhance liquidity.
Fixed Load : As the load that is constantly active throughout the lifespan of the structure,
it includes dead loads, such as walls, floors, roofs, ceiling, stairs, and fixed equipment, etc.
Curvature Friction : When tendons are arranged along a curve, the friction that is formed
by that curvature
Nominal Axial Strength : Referring to the strength of the member or cross-section
calculated according to the rules and hypothesis of the strength Design method, the
strength before applying the strength reduction factor
Structural-Use Autoclaved Lightweight Concrete: As concrete were part or all of the
aggregate is made using artificial lightweight aggregate, it has a 28-day Design standard
strength of over 15MPa and a air-dried unit mass of less than 2,000kg/m3
Base of Structure: Horizontal plane that is assumed to have transferred ground motion to
the structure (the base of the building does not necessarily have to be in line with the earth
surface)
Structural Diaphragm: Structural member that transfers to the lateral resistance member
the same inertial force as the floor or the roof slab.
Structural-Use Plain Concrete: Structural-use concrete the either has no reinforcement or
has less than the minimum reinforcement ratio regulated in this standard.
Structural Wall : Wall that can receive the combine force of moment, axial force, shear,
etc. cause by ground motion (Shear wall, as a type of structural wall, is classified as
follows.)
(1) Ordinary Reinforced Concrete Structural Wall : Wall that satisfies the requirements of
0516 in 0501.
(2) Ordinary Plain Concrete Structural Wall : Wall that satisfies the requirements of 0518
(3) Special Reinforced Concrete Structural Wall: Cast-on-site concrete structural wall that
satisfies the requirements of 0503 , 0507 , 0520.2, and 0520.6 and in addition satisfies the
conditions of the ordinary reinforced concrete structural wall.
Structural-Use Concrete : Concrete with a 28-day Design standard strength of over 18MPa
Structural Truss : Assembled pieces of reinforced concrete members mainly under axial
force
Bent-Up Bar : Bar bent either up or down in the direction of the member length
Balanced Reinforcement Ratio: Tension reinforcement ratio of the cross-section when the
distortion rate of the compressive edge concrete reaches its maximum distortion rate at the
same time the tension reinforcement reaches the standard yield strength
Mechanical Anchorage: Anchored to the concrete by installing various forms of anchor
devices on the end part of the iron bar or tendons
Springings : Both ends of the arch's lower margin
Column : Compressive member with a height of a least three times the minimum cross-
section size
Column Capital : The section where the cross-section area has been incrementally increased
on the upper edge of a column supported by flat slabs or flat plates
Column Base Plate : Steel Plate attached to the bottom section of the column
Tensible Force : The force that is applied to the concrete by the jack when tension is
introduced to the tendon in pre-stress concrete
Tendon : Steel wires, bars, or strands used alone or a few together
Relaxation of Tendons : Reduction of stress arising from the passage of time when there was
tension applied to the tendon and the distortion rate remained constant
Deep Beam: A beam where ln is no more than four times the member depth or when the load
is active within a distance that is twice the member depth from the support part, refer to
0506.3.4 and 0507.8.1
Spiral Reinforcement : Steel bar or wire that is surrounded by longitudinal reinforcement is a
spiral shape on the column
Bearing Wall: As a vertical direction member used to divide spaces, it is a wall for
transferring power or bearing the power of the gravity direction.
Seismic Hook : Hook of cross ties, hoop reinforcements, and stirrups that have (minimum)
135° hooks with an extension length of at least six times the bar diameter (or at least 75mm)
(Exception: For circular hoop reinforcements, there is a minimum bend of 90° from the end
section)
Effective Depth of Cross-Section : The distance from the edge of the concrete compressive
edge to the center of all of the tension reinforcement groups
Duct : Circular shaped pipe for arranging tendons at the time of pre-stress concrete
construction
Counter Forted Wall : Reinforced retaining wall that has a support wall at constant intervals
in the direction of the retaining wall ground pressure, in order to reinforce the stability or
strength of the retaining wall
Equivalent Embedment Length : Embedment length of steel bar that can transfer equal stress
and the stress transferred by the hook or mechanical anchorage device
Tie Hoop: Strengthened steel bar or wire in a lateral direction arranged at an interval
determined to resist the shear force and secure the placement of the longitudinal steel bar on
the column
Rahmen: Structures that have various rigidly connected perpendicular members
Ready-Mix Concrete: Unhardened concrete that is produced in a factory that has operational
concrete manufacturing facilities and supplied to the buyer by truck in an unhardened state.
Rib Shell : Shell-structures that either full or empty of thin slabs between the ribs that are
distributed along the rib line
Lift-Slab Structure : Slab structure made by lifting the slab concrete into place and
assembling after it has hardened
Outplane Buckling : Buckling where distortion forms in the on the outside (in the horizontal
direction to the plane that includes the web plate of the beam or the web member of the truss)
of the plane that includes the structures , when the structures of trusses, comparatively tall
beams, etc. are under load on the inside of the plane that includes the structures,
Sand Lightweight Concrete: Concrete made using natural sand as a fine aggregate and using
lightweight aggregate as a course aggregate
Moment Frame : Frames where the members and joints resist the bending moment, shear
force, and axial force. Classified as follows.
(1) Ordinary Moment Frames: Pre-cast concrete moment frame or cast-in-place reinforced
concrete that satisfies the requirements of 0516 in 0501.
(2) Intermediate Moment Frame: Moment frame that not only satisfies the requirements of
ordinary moment frames, but also the requirements of 0520.10
(3) Special Moment Frames : Cast-in-place reinforced concrete moment frame that satisfies
the requirements for ordinary moment frames and the requirements from 0520.2 to 0520.5
Plain Concrete: Concrete that is not reinforced with steel, steel fibers, plastic, etc.
In addition, reinforced concrete that used structural steel to prepare for concrete shrink crack,
but is under the regulated minimum reinforcement ratio, is also seen as plain concrete.
Embedment Length : The extended length of the steel bar that was extended from the
danger cross-section in order to prevent the reinforcement from coming off
Thin-Walled Pipe : When Designing for torsion, the hypothetical pipe that presumes the
inside of the cross-section is empty
T-Beam : Cross-section of a beam that has a slab formed of flanges only along one side,
when the beam and slab are cast as one.
Ordering Body : As the person or group that commissions the Design or construction of
the structure, for private structures it is the owner of the building, and for public structures
it is the head of the ordering institution.
Distribution Bar : An auxiliary bar that is set at close to a 90° angle to the main bar, with
the purpose of distributing the concentrated load or to control cracking
Target Strength : The desired compressive strength of concrete when determining the
target of concrete
Strut: A part of the structural diaphragm used to preserve the continuity of the area around
the diaphragm opening
Web Reinforcement : Reinforcement that is placed on the web of a member under shear
force and is resisting diagonal tensile stress. It is also called diagonal tensile
reinforcement.
Partially Cracked Cross-Section : Cross-section that acts as an intermediate level between
uncracked cross-sections and cracked-cross sections, since its tension-side edge stress ft, ,
caused by the work load in the pre-stress concrete bending member, is greater than
0.63 and less than 1.0
Bonded Tendon : Tendon that is bonded to the concrete, either directly or through
grouting
Bracket and Corbel : Bracket or corbel member where the ratio of the shear-span for the
effective depth is less than 1
Uncracked Cross-Section : Cross-Section where no cracks have formed, since its tension-
side edge stress ft, , caused by the work load in the pre-stress concrete bending member, is
less than 0.63
Non-Bearing Wall : Wall not under additional loads other than gravity
Inelastic Analysis: Analysis of bearing strength and distortion based on balance
conditions, the nonlinear stress-distortion rate relationship of concrete and steel bars,
effects of cracking and time history, kinematic admissibility, etc.
Torsion Cross-Section : When the beam has become one with the slab, or when it has
become a complete composite structure, it is the cross-section with an extended distance
in one direction of no more than four times the thickness of the slab, as a cross-section that
includes the slab section where the beam was extended in both beam directions to the
greater depth among the bay depths either above or below the slab.
Torsional Reinforcement: Reinforcement that is placed to resist a large amount of
torsional stress from arising in members
it is steel bar
Sway frame: Frame in which floor displacement to a lateral direction is not confined.
Refer to 0506. 5.2(4)
Working load: Various loads such as dead load and live load defined in this Code, which
have not been multiplied by load factor (Also referred to as applied load).
Design strength: Strength value calculated by multiplying nominal strength of a struct or
member by strength reduction factor
Design stand: Section divided by the two center lines of the slab panel which are on both
sides of the center line joining the supporting member
Design load: Factor load that is applied when designing a member
Auxiliary members in a shell structure: Rib or spandrel beam for reinforcing or
supporting a shell structure. In general, auxiliary members behave in combination with a
shell.
Required strength: Section force required for a reinforced concrete member to be able to
meet usability and safety
Collecting member: Member which conveys inertial force within diaphragm to lateral
force resisting system member
Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement: Steel reinforcement placed for the purpose of
preventing the cracks from occurring on concrete due to drying shrinkage or temperature
change
Lateral force resisting system: Structural system composed of members which can resist
lateral load such as wind load or earthquake load
Horizontal shear: Shear that occurs in a direction running parallel with member axis
Stirrup: Reinforcing steel placed to resist shearing force and twisting moment as a web
reinforcement placed to surround the main reinforcement of a beam forming a right or
slanting angle with it
Slab plate: Member which is a plate divided by the center line of column, beam or wall.
Axial force can be ignored when designing it.
Arch rib: Compression members which form an arch in an arch structure
Slenderness ratio of an arch: A value calculated by dividing the valid span of an arch by
the minimum radius of gradation of a section
Axial line of an arch: Axial line connecting the center of figure of an arch section
Compression strut: Compression member which is either a strut with fixed width or a
strut-tie model shaped like a bottle with wider central part as a route inside of the
concrete member where main compressive stress is acted upon
Compression controlled section: A section in which the net tensile strain of outmost
tensile reinforcement is equal to or lower than the compression controlled strain limit at
the nominal axial strength. Refer to 0506.2.2
Compressive reinforcement raio: Ratio of the sectional area of compressive
reinforcement to the effective sectional area of concrete
Buttressed type retaining wall: Reinforced concrete retaining wall with bearing wall at a
certain interval to secure stability or strength of the retaining wall on the side that is not
in contact with the ground
Anchor: It refers to those bolts or others which are buried into foundation or concrete
structure to mount other members such as pedestal or column on it, or the work burying
them.
Thin shell: Three dimensional structure composed of curved slab or folded plate of which
the thickness is smaller in comparison with other dimension (Thin shell has a
characteristic that its three dimensional stress transfer behavior is determined by such
properties as geometric shape, supporting method and stress exerted)
Tie member: Member used to prevent the separation of those parts which transfer inertial
force or form a building like foundation or wall
Tie bar: Continuous reinforcement which has a 135o hook with the extended length of at
least six times of its diameter on one side and a 90o hook with the extended length of at
least six times of its diameter on the other side (The hooks must wrap around adjacent
longitudinal reinforcement and the 90o hooks of the two continuous reinforcements
attached to the same longitudinal reinforcement must be placed so that their ends face
opposite directions crossing each other)
Vertical load: Load which is acted upon a structure in the direction of gravity like dead
load or live load (Also referred to as gravity load)
Offset bent bar: Bent main reinforcement placed when sectional dimension is changed at
the column connection
Full cracked section: Section on which cracks are generated as the tension side edge
stress, ft, caused by the working load exceeds on the prepressed bent member
Round steel bar: Reinforcement which is a steel bar with round section without any
protrusion like rib or knot on its surface and is specified in KS D 3504 (Steel bar for
reinforced concrete)
Effective depth: Distance from concrete compression edge to the center of all tensile
reinforcements group at a bent member. Effective depth of a section
Effective sectional area: Area calculated by multiplying effective depth by effective
width
Effective tensile force: Tensile force that is being acted upon tendon after the prestress
loss has been completely finished due to such effects as the relaxation of tendon stress
after the prestress has been given and the creep and drying shrinkage of concrete
Effective prestress: Stress remaining on tendon after all stress losses have been finished
(However, excluding dead load and live load)
Stress: Size of the internal force generated per unit area
2 direction slab: Slab in which main reinforcements are placed in two directions crossing
each other at right angles
2 direction slab system: Concrete slab system in which the main reinforcements are
placed in two directions regardless of whether there is a beam transferring load to column
or not
Deformed reinforcement: Reinforcement which is a steel bar with protrusions such as rib
or knot on its surface and is specified in KS D 3504 (Steel bar for reinforced concrete) or
has quality and configuration equivalent to this
Tension controlled section: A section in which the net tensile strain of outmost tensile
reinforcement is equal to or higher than the tension controlled strain limit at the nominal
axial strength. Refer to 0506.2.2
Tensile reinforcement ratio: Ratio of the sectional area of tensile reinforcement to the
effective sectional area of concrete
Tension tie: Tension member selected as the main tensile force route in the strut-tie
model to which reinforcement or tendon is placed
1 direction slab: Slab in which main reinforcements are placed in only one direction
Joist: Joist is a small beam structure system supporting slab of which the width is 100mm
or larger and the depth is 3.5 times or less of the minimum joist width and in which the
spacing between joists 750mm or less. The joists laid out in two direction joist are called
2 direction joist or waffle structure
Slenderness effects: Effects that a bending moment bigger than the bending moment by
linear elastic structural analysis is acted upon a column as the second bending moment is
generated at a size that can’t be ignored due to the lateral direction displacement and
axial force of a column. Buckling takes place when the slenderness effects are excessive.
When performing the interpretation of the slenderness effects, non-linearity of materials,
crack, curvature of member, sideway, period of loading, drying shrinkage and creep, and
interaction with supporting member must be considered
Compatibility torsion: A torsion in which the redistribution of torsion moment can take
place after the occurrence of cracking
All light weight concrete: Concrete which has been made by replacing fine aggregate and
coarse aggregate with light weight aggregate
Shear head: Steel placed within the slab of the upper part of a column for the shear
strengthening in a 2 direction slab system without a beam
Shear plane: Crack surface as a surface upon which shear force is acted or surface on
which cracking can be cased by shear force
Shear reinforcement: Reinforcement placed to resist shear force
Overturning: Phenomenon that retaining wall, wall, etc. are inclined to fall as the bending
moment caused by the lateral force (overturning moment) that is acted upon based on the
end of the lower plate exceeds the bending moment (resistance moment) caused by true
vertical force
Front foundation: Foundation with the whole bottom of a building or a structure formed
as a foundation slab
Folded plate: Shell structure in the form of joined edges using thin flat slab to make a
three dimensional stereo structure
Coupling devices: Tendon and tendon or anchorage and device coupling anchorage
Anchorage length: Minimum burying length needed to demonstrate the specified yield
strength of reinforcing bar at a critical section
Anchorage: Device for conveying prestress to members by anchoring the end of a tendon
in concrete
Execution bar: Auxiliary reinforcement used to secure the position of a reinforcement
when assembling reinforcements
Buckling: Phenomenon that a column or a sheet under compressive force is destroyed by
stability
Pedestal: A member which is a compression member protruded on a foundation and in
which the ratio of height to the average minimum dimension of its section is 3 or below
Column strip: Design strip which has the same width with the smaller value among 0.25l1
and 0.25l2 respectively on each side of the column center line. Column strip includes a
beam when there is a beam.
Main reinforcement: Reinforcement of which the section is determined by the design load
Middle strip: Design strip marked off between the two column strips
Lateral direction reinforcement: Reinforcement placed to member in longitudinal
direction
Bearing capacity of soil: Size of the strength that can be borne by soil
Continuing load: Load that is continuously acted upon for a long time
Bearing strength: Compression strength of the supporting surface concrete to the area
under the load
Earthquake load: Force that is acted upon the structure by earthquake caused by crustal
movement
Lead engineer: An engineer with expert knowledge on design, structure and construction
who has been hired by the owner of a structure for performing investigative task
Reinforced concrete: Concrete placed with at least specified minimum amount of
reinforcements to make the reinforcement and concrete behave integrally
Settlement: Phenomenon that ground, piles, etc. settle down
Cantilever retaining wall: Reinforced concrete retaining wall which has been designed so
that sheet pile or buttress is not connected to the wall and the soil pressure is borne only
by bottom plate and wall
Recycled aggregate for concrete: Aggregate that meets the quality standards for concrete
determined by the Minister of Land, Transport and Maritime Affairs among the
aggregates recycled through the crushing process of waste concrete
Compressive strength of concrete design standards: Compressive strength of concrete
referred to as the standards when designing concrete member
Creep: Long-term deformation happening to concrete due to continuing load
Modulus of elasticity: Ratio of tension or compression stress responding to the strain
below the limit of proportionality of a material (Refer to 0503.4.3.1). Elasticity modulus
of concrete is largely divided into chord modulus of elasticity (Ec expression (0503.4.1))
and initial tangent modulus of elasticity E ci (expression (0502.2.18)) and the chord
modulus of elasticity is also simply referred to as modulus of elasticity. In case of steel, it
is divided into modulus of elasticity of reinforcement Es (expression (0503.4.5)),
prestressing steel E ps (expression (0503.4.6)) and section steel E ss (expression
(0503.4.7))
Special boundary elements: Boundary elements following 0520.6.6
T section: Section of a beam in which slab forms flanges on both sides when beam and
slab are poured integrally
Wobble friction: Friction happening as duct is gone slightly amiss from its designated
position in prestress concrete
Equilibrium torsion: A torsion in which the redistribution of torsion moment can take
place
Post-tensioning: A method for transferring prestress into member by tensioning tendon
after concrete has been cured and burying its end into concrete
Skin reinforcement: Reinforcement placed in the lateral direction of member on both
sides of deep flexural member exceeding 900mm in total depth
Wind load: Load acted upon a structure by wind
Prestress: Stress which has been transferred into concrete in advance so that the tensile
stress caused by external force can be offset to a specific limit
Transfer of prestress: Operation to transfer the tension of tendon into concrete
Prestressed concrete: Concrete upon which compression force has been acted in advance
according to a plan so that the stress caused by external force can be offset to a specific
limit. This is also referred to as PS concrete or PSC in abbreviation.
Prestress force: Force acted upon the section of member by prestressing
Pre compressed tensile zone: Section which has been subject to compressive stress while
performing prestressing and later, is subject to tensile stress by the load acting from
outside
Prestressing steel: Steel used to provide prestress
Prestressing: Work that gives prestress
Pre-case concrete: Concrete member which is returned to its original place or assembled
after the concrete has been cured
Pre-tensioning: Method for giving prestress by laying concrete after tendon has been
tensioned first and conveying the tensile force which has been applied to tendon afar the
concrete was cured to concrete by the attachment of tendon and concrete
Flat slab: Concrete slab in which load is conveyed to column by drop panel without a
beam and reinforcements are placed in two directions
Flat plate: Concrete slab in which load is conveyed to column without beam or drop
panel and reinforcements are placed in two directions
Cover thickness: Thickness of concrete between surface of concrete and surface of
reinforcement placed at a closest distance to it
Load: All actions that result in stress and deformation to structure or member
Load factor: Safety factor to consider changes in analytic ambiguity and environmental
actions that convert inevitable difference and load between nominal value of a load and
actual load into external loading force.
Load combination: Various types of load combinations which can act upon structures or
members at the same time
Composite concrete compression member: Compression member which has been
reinforced in lateral direction using structural steel, steel pipe and tube (Longitudinal
reinforcement may or may not be used)
Composite concrete bending moment: Flexural member composed of the precast member
which has been made outside of the site and the cast in place concrete element of which
the element has been combined so that it can move integrally with respect to load
Expanded footing: Reinforced concrete slab with expanded bottom to distribute the top
vertical load to the sub grade
Magnified bending moment: Increased bending moment calculated in consideration of
the deformation at a slender member
Sliding: Crisscross happening along a connected surface as shear fracture is taking place
on earth
Sliding prevention wall: Wall made under the bottom plate to generate big passive earth
pressure enough to sufficiently resist the horizontal load that causes the sliding of
retaining wall
Live load: Load generated by the use or occupancy of a building or other structure which
doesn’t include environment loads such as wind load and earthquake load or dead load
but includes the loads of people, furniture’s, movable partitions, articles kept in a storage,
equipments and machines, the snow load or the load on a bridge by vehicles
Chord: A structural element which plays the role of a compression and tension member
like upper and lower truss chords as a concrete structure bottom system
Lateral load: Load which is applied horizontally to a vertical structure like wind load,
earthquake load, lateral direction soil pressure or fluid pressure
Non-sway frame: Aggregate of which the displacement of floor in a lateral direction has
been confined (Refer to 0506.5.2.4)
Flexural member: A member which doesn’t receive axial force at all or receives
negligible axial force and mainly resists bending moment and shear force
Flexural discontinuity: Situation in which flexural bending force is not working
Flexural reinforcement: Reinforcement in the axial direction of a member positioned to
resist bending moment
0501.5 Major symbols
a : Depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block defined in 0506.2.1.7(1)
a v : Shear span, i.e., the distance between concentrated load and internal surface of
supporting member
A b : Sectional area of one piece of reinforcement or the area of an anchor plate, mm2
A c : Sectional area of member, mm2
: Sectional area of concrete contributing to the shear transfer, mm2
: Contact area reviewed with respect to the horizontal shear, mm2
A cf: Larger value among the sectional areas of the two orthogonal equivalent aggregate
slab - beam at the column position of two way slab, mm2
A ch : Core sectional area of the spirally reinforced column measured using the outside
line of spiral reinforcement as a diameter, mm2
A cp : Area surrounded by the external perimeter in a concrete section, mm2
A ct : Sectional area between the central axis of the whole section of concrete and the
tensile edge, mm2
A cv : Net sectional area composed of the sectional length in a direction considering shear
force and the core thickness, mm2
A f : Reinforcement sectional area resisting the factor bending moment [V uav + N uc(h−d)]
at bracket or corbel, mm2
A g : Gross sectional area, mm2
: Gross sectional area of a column, mm2
Ah : Sectional area of the shear reinforcement running parallel with flexural tension
reinforcement, mm2
A j : Effective sectional area in the joint within the flat surface running parallel with the
surface of the reinforcement causing shear at a joint, mm2 (Refer to 0520.5.3). The depth
of the joint must be the same with that of the whole column and if a beam is joined with a
supporting member in which the beam has a width wider than that, the effective width
must be below the following value.
(1) Sum of the beam width and the joint depth
(2) Two times of the lower value among the values measured vertically from the side of a
beam to the side of a column
A l : Gross sectional area of the longitudinal reinforcement resisting twisting, mm2
A n : Reinforcement sectional area resisting the tensile force Nuc at bracket or corbel,
mm2
A o : Sectional area closed by shear flow, mm2
A oh : Sectional area closed to the center of the outmost torsional reinforcing bar, mm2
A ps : Sectional area of tendon, mm2
: Sectional area f the prestress stiffening member at the tensile zone, mm2: T
A s : Amount of tensile reinforcement of flexural member, mm2
A sh : Gross sectional area of the lateral reinforcements of which the spacing is s and
which is vertical the dimension hc (including joint bar, mm2
A s, min : Minimum flexural reinforcement, mm2 (Refer to 0506.3.2)
A st : Gross sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement (reinforcement or structural
section), mm2
A sx : Sectional area of the structural section or steel pipe at transformed section, mm2
A t : Sectional area of one strand of closed stirrup resisting the twisting within the spacing
s, mm2
A tr : Gross sectional area of the lateral reinforcement within the spacing s placed across
the surface which is possible to be split along the mounted reinforcement, mm2
A v : Sectional area of the shear reinforcement within the spacing s or gross sectional area
of the shear reinforcement which is perpendicular to the flexural tensile reinforcement
within the spacing s in case of deep beam, mm2
A vd : Gross sectional area by each group of the diagonal reinforcements at the diagonally
reinforced tie beam, mm2
A vf : Sectional area of shear friction reinforcement, mm2
A vh : Sectional area of shear reinforcement running parallel with flexural tensile
reinforcement within the spacing sh, mm2
A w : Sectional area of one piece of iron wire anchored or connected, mm2
A 1 : Load area, mm2
A 2 : Bottom area in the shape of the largest pyramid, cone or sloped wedge that is
completely included in the inside of supporting member by taking the side slope in the
ration of 1 vertically and 2 horizontally from the upper load area (Refer to 0506.8.1)
b : Distance calculated by adding the web width of member bw and the length of over-
hanging flange, mm
B n : Nominal bearing strength of load area A1
b o : Perimeter of the critical section with respect to two way shear at slab and foundation
slab, mm
b s : Width of rectangular steel, mm
b t : Width of the section that includes the closed stirrup resisting twisting, mm
b v : Sectional width of the contact area that is reviewed with respect to horizontal shear,
mm
b w : Web width of the member with flange, mm
b 1 : Width of the critical section defined in (0507.12.1(3)) measured in the span
direction in which moment is determined or width of the critical section measured in the
span direction in which bending moment is determined on the critical section defined in
(0507.12.1(3)), mm
b 2 : Width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1
Width of the critical section measured in the direction vertical to b1 at the critical
section defined in (0507.12.1(3)), mm
c : Sectional constant defining the twisting property
: c value of the T shaped or half T shaped section is calculated by
dividing the section into many separated rectangular zones and adding 6 value of each
part
c : Distance from compression edge to neutral axis, reinforcement spacing or cover
thickness related dimensions, mm (Refer to 0508.2.2.3(2))
C c : Cover thickness. mm
C m : Equivalent uniform distribution of actual moment diagram Factor related to the
transposition into moment diagram
c 1 : Width of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, column capital or bracket
measured in the direction in which bending moment is determined, mm
c 2 : Width of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, column capital or bracket
measured in the span direction and vertical direction in which bending moment is
determined, mm
c t : Distance up to the slab edge measured in the direction running parallel with this at the
internal side surface of a column. c1 can not be exceeded.
D : Dead load or section force generated by this
d : Effective depth of member, mm
d' : Distance from compression edge to the center of compression reinforcement, mm
d b : Nominal diameter of reinforcement, steel wire or prestressing steel wire strand, mm
d p : Distance from compression edge to the center of tendon, mm
d pile : Diameter of the stake connected to the bottom of footing
E : Earthquake load or section force generated by this
Ec : Elastic modulus of concrete, MPa
: Chord elastic modulus of concrete, MPa Refer to (0503.1(2))
E cb : modulus of concrete used for beam
E cc : Elastic modulus of concrete used for column
E ci : Initial tangent elastic modulus of concrete at the material age of 28 days, MPa
E ci(t') : Initial tangent elastic modulus of concrete at the material age of t’ days, MPa
E cs : Elastic modulus of concrete used for slab
E : Eccentric distance
e min : Eccentricity, mm (Refer to the Expression (0506.5.16))
E ps : Elastic modulus of tendon, MPa
E s : Elastic modulus of reinforcement, MPa
E ss : Elastic modulus of section steel, MPa
EI : Flexural strength of compression member (Refer to the expressions (0506.5.11) and
(0506.5.12))
F : Load caused by the weight and pressure of fluid of which the density can be identified
and the storage height can be controlled or sectional force caused by this
f c(t') : Compressive stress of concrete at the material age of t’ days, MPa
f ci : Compressive strength of concrete when prestress is transferred, MPa
f ck : Design standard compressive strength of concrete, MPa
f cr : Proportioning strength of concrete, MPa
f cu : Average compressive strength of concrete at the material age of 28 days, MPa
f cu(t) : Average compressive strength of concrete at the material age of t days, MPa
f d : Stress caused by dead load that is not multiplied by load factor at the edge of the
section on which tensile stress has been generated by applied load, MPa
f dc : Tendon stress at the center of tendon when the stress of concrete becomes zero
f pc : Compressive stress of concrete at the center of the section resisting applied load (in
consideration of the loss of all prestress) or compressive stress at the intersection of web
and flange when the center of section is located within the flange, MPa
f pcc : Compressive stress of concrete caused by the effective prestress force in
consideration of the loss of all prestress at the edge of the section on which tensile stress
is caused by applied load, MPa
f pe : Effective prestress stress of tendon, MPa
f ps : Tensile stress of prestressed steel when nominal strength is demonstrated, MPa
f pu : Design standard tensile strength of tendon, MPa
f py : Design standard yield strength of tendon, MPa
f r : Rupture modulus of concrete, MPa
f s : Stress of reinforcement, MPa
fse : Effective stress of prestressed steel (After all of the prestress losses have taken place),
MPa
f sp : Split tensile strength of concrete, MPa (0504.1(2))
f t : Tensile stress calculated based on the whole sectional area which is tensile edge stress
of the section pressurized in advance, when working load is applied, MPa (0509)
f y : Design standard yield strength of reinforcement, MPa
f yh : Design standard yield strength of lateral reinforcement, MPa (0520 lateral
reinforcement)
f yt : Design standard yield strength of spiral reinforcement, MPa (0506 compression
member)
Design standard yield strength of lateral reinforcement, MPa (0507 Shear
reinforcement)
H h : Lateral load caused by the lateral pressure of soil, ground water or other material, or
sectional force generated by this
H v : Vertical load caused by the weight of soil, ground water or other material, or
sectional force generated by this
h : Total thickness or depth of a member. Notional size of member, 2Ac /u mm (0502 2 2
5, 0502.2.2.6)
: Minimum thickness of a member (0504.1.2)
h c : Sectional size of the inside of a column measured by the distance between the centers
of confined reinforcement, mm
h s : Diameter of the section of a steel pipe, mm
h v : Total depth of the section of shear head, mm
h w : Total height from the bottom of wall to the top, mm
h x : Maximum horizontal spacing of hoop reinforcement or column tie reinforcement,
mm
I : Impact or section force generated by this or moment of inertia of a member section
I b : Moment of inertia for the central axis of torsion beam section defined in
(0510.3.1(4))
I cr : Moment of inertia of a cracked section
Ie : Effective moment of inertia
Ig: Moment of inertia for the central axis of the whole concrete section disregarding
reinforcement
I s : Moment of inertia for the central axis of the whole slab section
( times of the slab width defined at α and ßt)
I se : Moment of inertia of the reinforcement for the central axis of a member section
I sx : Moment of inertia of a structural section or steel pipe for the central axis of the
section of a composite member (0517)
k : Effective length for buckling coefficient of a compression member
K : Wobble friction coefficient per the unit length of 1m of tendon (0509)
Kt : Torsion strength of a torsion member. Torsion moment for unit rotation angle (Refer
to 0510.5.5)
L : Live load or section force generated by this

L r : Roof live load or section force generated by this
l : Length of a member measured based on the node center in a frame
l a : Larger value among the embedment length passing the center line of supporting
member, the effective depth of a member at the point of inflection or 12db, mm
l c : Length of a compression member measured based on the node center in a frame or
vertical length between supporting members, mm
l d : Anchorage length, mm
: ldb×calibration coefficient
l db : Basic anchorage length, mm
l dh : Anchorage length of the standard hook under tension expressed as the distance from
the critical section to the outer end of the hook (Straight embedment length between the
critical section and the starting point of a hook head bending inner radius head
reinforcement diameter), mm
: lhb× calibration coefficient
l hb : Basic anchorage length of a standard hook under tension, mm
l n : Net span of a member, the distance between the internal surfaces of a supporting
member
l o : Length measured in the direction of member axis of the joint which is the length of
the minimum section to which lateral reinforcement is placed, mm
l px : Length of a tendon from anchoring end to a selected point x, m. Refer to the
expressions (0509.4.1) and (0509.4.2)
lt : (A) This is the span of a member in a load test and in case of two way slab, this is a
short edge, mm
(B) Lower value among the distance between the centers of supporting members and the
length added by the member thickness between the spans between the adjacent
supporting member, mm
(C) Span of cantilever is two times the distance from the supporting member to the
cantilever end, mm
l u : Unbraced length of a compression member
l v : Arm length of the shear head at the center of concentrated load or reaction force, mm
l w : Horizontal length of a wall , mm
l 1: Span between the centers of supporting members measured in the direction in which
the bending moment is determined
l 2 : Span between the centers of supporting members measured in the direction
perpendicular to l1 Refer to (0510.4.2(3)) and (0510.4.2(4))
M : Factored bending moment to be resisted by the upper and lower columns. Refer to
(0510.4.9(2))
M a : Maximum bending moment of a member when calculating deflection
M c : Unit volume mass of concrete, kg/m3 (0504.1.2)
: Factored magnified bending moment for designing compression member
M cr : Bending moment causing bending cracks on a section by external force
M cre : Bending moment causing bending cracks on a section by working load (Refer to
0507.3.9)
M g : Bending moment at the joint surface corresponding to the nominal bending strength
of the beam connected to the joint beam includes the tensile reinforcement of the slab
M m : Modified bending moment
M max : Maximum factored bending moment of a section caused by working load
M n : Nominal bending strength of a section. A sf y(d – a/2)
M o : Total static factored bending moment to which load coefficient has been applied
M p : Required plasticity bending strength of the shear head section
M pr : Expected bending strength of a member calculated using the properties of joint
material assuming that the tensile strength of a longitudinal (minimum) reinforcement 8s
1.25 fy and the strength reduction coefficient is 1.0 (Axial force is considered)
M s : Bending moment caused by the load which results in lateral displacement
M s : Slab bending moment that forms a balance with the bending moment of supporting
member
M u : Coefficient bending moment of a section
M v : Resistance bending moment caused by the shear head reinforcement
M 1 : A smaller value among the factored bending moments of the ends of compression
members which has a positive sign (+) when it is bent in column curvature and a negative
sign (–) when it is bent in curvature.
M 1ns : Factored bending moment of the end of compression member calculated using an
elastic first-order frame analysis at the end upon which M1 is acted for the load that
doesn’t cause lateral displacement
M 1s : Factored bending moment of the end of compression member calculated using an
causes lateral displacement
M 2 : Largest value among the factored bending moments of the ends of compression
member which always had the positive sign
M 2min : Minimum value of M2
M 2ns : Factored bending moment of the end of compression member calculated using an
doesn’t cause lateral displacement
M 2s : Factored bending moment of the end of compression member calculated using an
causes lateral displacement
m c : Unit mass of concrete, kg/m3
n : Number of reinforcements or steel wires which have been anchored or connected
along the plane which can be split
N c : Tensile force of concrete by dead load and live load (D + L)
N u : Factored axial load including the effects of tension caused by the creep that is
vertical to the section happening at the same time with Vu and the dry shrinkage.
Compression has a positive (+) value and tension has a negative (–) value.
Nuc : Factored tensile force applied to the upper part of the brackets and corbels being
acted upon at the same time with Vu which must have a positive value for tension
Pb : Nominal axial strength of a compression member at balanced strain conditions (Refer
to 0506.2.2(2))
P c : Critical load or buckling load (Refer to the expression (0506.5.10))
p cp : Outer perimeter of a concrete section, mm
p h : Perimeter of the center line of the outermost lateral closed stirrup, mm
P n : Nominal axial strength for the given eccentricity
P nw : Nominal axial strength of a wall calculated according to the regulation specified in
(0511.4.2.2)
P nw : Nominal axial strength of a wall designed according to (0519.4)
P px : Prestressing force of a tendon an a selected point x, N
P u : Factored axial force of a section calculated according to factored load ≤ ΦPn
P px : Tensile force of a tendon at a selected point x
P o : Nominal axial strength for the conditions without eccentricity
Q : Stability index of one layer (Refer to 0506.5.2.4(2))
q a : Allowable bearing capacity of soil
qmax : Maximum supporting reaction force
q u : Ultimate bearing capacity of soil
r : Rotation radius of the section of a compression member
R : Rain load or section force generated by this
R H : Relative humidity of the open air, %
S : Snow load or section force generated by this, mm3
s : Standard deviation, MPa, shear connector spacing in the direction of the length of
members or shear in the direction running parallel with the longitudinal reinforcements,
the maximum distance between the centers of the lateral reinforcements within the ld
zone of the spacing anchoring length of torsion reinforcement, the spacing between the
centers of reinforcements, mm
s h : Spacing of shear or torsion reinforcements in the vertical direction to longitudinal
reinforcement, spacing of horizontal reinforcements on a wall, mm
s o : Maximum spacing of lateral reinforcements, mm
s u : Spacing of a steel wire anchored or connected, mm (0508.3.2)
s v : Spacing of the longitudinal reinforcements in a wall, mm
s x : Spacing of a lateral reinforcement within the length lo, mm
T : Section force caused by such effects as the open air or curing temperature, °C or
temperature, creep, drying shrinkage and differential settlement
t : Material age of concrete, days or thickness of the wall in an hollow section, mm
t’ : Material age of concrete when load is applied, days
t f : Thickness of a flange
Tn : Nominal torsion strength
ts : Material age of concrete when exposed to the open air, (days)
tT : Equivalent material age when it is cured at the temperature of T°C, not 20°C, (days)
Tu: Factored bending moment
U : Required strength for resistance on factored load or the section generated by this
u : Perimeter in which the moisture is diffused to the open air among the perimeters of
the sectional area Ac, mm
V c : Nominal shear strength by concrete (Refer to 0506.10.2(2))
V ci : Normal shear strength by concrete when a diagonal crack has been caused by the
combination of shear and bending moment
V cw : Normal shear strength by concrete when a diagonal crack has been caused by the
excessive principal tensile stress of the web
Vd : Shear force of the section caused by the action of dead load
Ve : Design shear force specified in 0520.3.4(1) or 0520.4.5(1)
Vi : Factored shear force of the section caused by the working load happening at the same
time with M max
Vn : Nominal shear strength of a section
vn : Normal shear stress, Mpa (Refer to 0507.13.2)
Vnh : Nominal horizontal shear strength, N
Vp : Vertical element of the effective prestress force on a section
Vs : Normal shear strength by shear reinforcement
Vu : Horizontal factored shear force at one layer
W : Wind load or section force generated by this
w d : Factored dead load per unit area
w i : Factored live load per unit area
w u : Factored distributed load
: Factored load per unit area
x : Dimension of the shorter side among the rectangular part of a section
y : Dimension of a longer side among the rectangular part of a section
y t : Distance from the central axis of the whole sectional area to the tension side edge
disregarding reinforcement, mm
 o : A relative lateral displacement happening between the top and bottom of a layer
caused by Vu & which is calculated by the elastic first-order frame analysis and the
rigidity specified in (0506.5.2.1)
 max : Maximum deflection measured, mm (Refer to the Expression (0520.4.1))
 rmax : Remaining deflection measured, mm (Refer to the Expressions (0520.4.2) and
(0520.4.3))
 fmax : Maximum deflection measured by the second test using the position of the
structure when starting the second test as the initial value, mm (Refer to the expression
(0520.4.3))
ψ : Stiffness raio of the compression member to the bending moment at the end of the
compression member:
(EI/l)col. / (EI/l)beam
ψ A : ψ value at the end A
ψ B : ψ value at the end B
ψ m : Average of ψA and ψB
ψ min : Lowest value among the nine values at both ends
α : Ratio of the beam torsion strength to the torsion strength of the slab divided by the
center line of the slab plates on both sides of the beam, angle between sloping stirrup and
member axis, reinforcement arrangement position coefficient, Refer to (0508.2.2(2)),
ratio of the beam torsion strength to the torsion strength of the slab composed of the
width divided by center line of a slab plate adjacent to one side or both sides of a beam
E cbI b/E csI s
a c : Relative contribution coefficient of the concrete strength contributing the strength of
wall, refer to the expression (0520.6.1)
α f : Angle between shear friction reinforcement and shear surface
α H : With respect to the adjustment factor h≤2m for the vertical load Hv according to the
thickness of earth surface, α H=1.0
With respect to h>2m, α H=1.05 − 0.025h≥0.875
α m : Average of all beam valuses around one slab
α px : Total rotating angle change of the tendon from the prestressed end, radian
α s : Coefficient when calculating I on slab or foundation slab
α v : Ratio of the stiffness of shear head member to the stiffness of the composite slab
section around the member of the shear head
α 1 : a in the direction of l1
α 2 : a in the direction of l2
β : Ratio of the long side to the short side on a foundation slab, ration of the net span in
the longer side direction to the shorter side direction in two way slab. Epoxy coating
coefficient (Refer to 0508 2.2)
β b : (a) Ratio of the maximum coefficient continuing axial force to the maximum
coefficient axial force at each load combination on a non-sway frame, (b) ratio of the
maximum coefficient continuing shear force to the maximum coefficient shear force at
the whole one layer on a sway frame except for the case described in (c), and (c) ratio of
the maximum coefficient continuing axial force to the maximum factored axial force at
the whole one layer in case that the stability of a sway frame is reviewed according to
6.5.4(6)
: Ratio of the amount of cut reinforcements to the amount of the total tensile
reinforcements (0508)
β c : Value calculated by dividing the distance from the neutral axis of a section to the
tensile edge by the distance from the neutral axis of a section to the centroid of the tensile
reinforcement or ratio of the longer side to the shorter side on the surface upon which
concentration or reaction force is acted
β(f cu) : Function for the influence that the strength of concrete has on creep (Refer to the
expression (0502 2.5))
β(t') : Function for the influence that the time applied to continuing load has on creep
(Refer to the expression (0502 2.6))
β c(t-t') : Function for the influence on creep depending on load period (Refer to the
expression (0502 2.7))
β cc(t) : Adjustment factor depending on the material age for the strength development of
concrete
β d :(a) In a non-sway frame, βd is the ratio of the maximum factored axial force by dead
load to the total factored axial force for the same load combinations.
: (b) In a sway frame, except for the contents required in (C), βd is the ratio of the
maximum factored continuing shear force to the total factored shear force of one layer.
: (c) βd is the ratio of the maximum coefficient axial force by dead load to the total
factored axial force in case that the stability of a sway frame is reviewed according to the
provisions specified in (0506.5.4.6).
β H : Coefficients depending on the relative humidity of the open air and the thickness of
a member (Refer to the expressions (0502.2.7) and (0502.2.8))
β H,T : βH adjusted according to the change in temperature, (Refer to the expression
(0502.2.14))
β p : Coefficient when calculating Vc I on prestressed concrete slab
β RH : Coefficient of the influence on the creep and drying shrinkage according to the
environmental humidity (Refer to the expression (0502.2.23))
β s(t–ts) : Drying shrinkage strain function based on drying period (Refer to the
expression (0502.2.24))
β sc : Coefficient of the influence on the drying shrinkage according to type of cement
β t : Ratio of the torsional stiffness of a spandrel beam to the bending stiffness of a slab
with the same width with the span between the centers of supporting members of the
spandrel beam
: E cbC/2E csI s
β 1 :Coefficient related to the position of neutral axis depending on the concrete strength
(Refer to 0506 2.1.7 (3))
γ : Coefficient depending on size of reinforcement (Refer to 0508.2.2(3))
γ f : Ratio of the moment conveyed by the bending of a slab section to the total
unbalanced bending moment conveyed to the joint of slab and column (Refer to
0510.3.3(3))
γ p : Coefficients depending on the type of tendon
γ v : The ratio of the bending moment passed by the eccentricity of the shear of the slab
around the column to entire unbalanced bending moment passed to slab - column joints.
1–γf
δ ns : The intensity factor of bending moment to sway frames as a factor to reflect on the
impact of member curvature between the both ends of the compressive member.
δ s : The intensity factor of bending moment to non-sway frames as a factor to reflect on
the horizontal movement by the horizontal and vertical load
δ u : Design displacement, mm
ε cσ (t, t’) : The total strain including the elastic strain and the creep at time t when fc (t’) is
applied at the curing day t’
ε sh (t, ts) : The total drying shrinkage strain for the curing time of the concrete exposed to
the outside air, t, for the curing time ts.
ε sho : Conceptual drying shrinkage factor (formula (0502.2.21) reference)
ε t : As pure tensile strain of the far outside end tensile steel bar or the far outside end
tendon,
The strain excluding the strain by effective prestressed force, creep, shrinkage, and
temperature.
ε y : Standard yield strain of rebars
η : Number of the members with shear studs
λ : Light concrete factor, (0508 2.2 (2)) reference, modification factor related to the unit
weight mass of concrete, factor to long-term deflection, modification factor related to the
unit weight of the concrete with slenderness ratio. (0507.6.2.3)
θ : The inclined angle of a diagonal member by a truss analogy at a torsion analysis
μ : Shear friction coefficient
μ p : The curvature friction coefficient in curve lines (0509)
ξ : The time-lapse factor to the sustained load
ρ : The reinforcement ratio of tensile rebars
ρ’ : The reinforcement ratio of compressive rebars
ρ b : The reinforcement ratio of rebars at balanced strain, the reinforcement ratio of
balanced rebars
ρ h : The cross-sectional area ratio of horizontal shear rebars to the entire concrete cross-
sectional area at the vertical cross section
ρ g : The ratio of the area of entire rebars to the column cross-sectional area
ρ n : The cross-sectional area ratio of vertical shear rebars to the entire concrete cross-
sectional area at the horizontal cross-sectional area
ρ p : The reinforcement ratio of prestressed-rebars, Aps/bdp
ρ s : The reinforcement ratio of spiral rebars, the reinforcement ratio of the volume of the
spiral rebars to the entire volume of the core calculated with the diameter measured
outside of the spiral rebars at the compressive member reinforced by the spiral rebars.
ρv : The ratio of the area of shear connectors to the contact area Av/bvs
ρ w : As/bwd
Φ : Strength reduction factor
Φ (t, t’) : The factor of creep of concrete
Φ o : Notional creep factor of concrete (formula (0502.2.3) reference)
Φ o,k : Φ o, corrected as per the magnitude of acting stress (Refer to the formula
(0502.2.11))
Φ RH : The influence factor that the relative humidity of outside air and the thickness of a
member have on creep (formula (0502.2.4) reference)
Φ RH, T : Φ RH, (formula (0502.2.13) reference) corrected as per the change of temperature
ω : The steel index of the non-prestressed tensile rebars. ρfy/fck
ω' : The steel index of the compressive rebars. ρ'fy/fck
ω p : The steel index of pre-stressed reinforcements. ρp fps/fck
ω w, ω w, ω pw, : The steel index calculated by treating the web width as the value b at the
cross section where a compressive flange is located.
0501.6 Citation standards
KS B 0052 Weld symbols
KS B 0802 Tensile testing method of metals
KS B 0804 Tensile testing method of metals
KS B 0816-0892 Weld testing method
KS D 3503 Rolled steel for general structures
KS D 3504 Plain bars for rebar concrete
KS D 3505PC Steel bar
KS D 3552 Iron wires
KS D 3629 Epoxy coated rebars
KS D 7002PC Steel wire and PC strand
KS D 7017 Welded wire fabric reinforcements
KS F 2401 Sampling method of fresh concrete
KS F 2402 Slump testing method for Portland cement concrete
KS F 2403 How to make test pieces for concrete strength
KS F 2405 How to conduct a compressive strength testing for concrete
KS F 2408 How to conduct a bending strength testing for concrete
KS F 2409 How to conduct a unit volume mass and air content testing for fresh concrete
(mass method)
KS F 2414 How to conduct a bleeding testing for concrete
KS F 2421 Air content test method by the pressure method of fresh concrete (air room
pressure method)
KS F 2422 Strength test method of cores and beams cut from concrete
KS F 2423 How to conduct a splitting tensile strength testing for concrete
KS F 2453 How to conduct a compression creep testing for concrete
KS F 2456 How to conduct a concrete resistance test to quick freezing-thawing
KS F 2462 How to conduct a unit mass test for structural concrete
KS F 2468 Testing method for impurities of light weight concrete aggregates
KS F 2502 Testing method for sieve analysis aggregates
KS F 2503 Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregates
KS F 2504 Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of minute aggregates
KS F 2526 The aggregates for concrete
KS F 2527 The crushed aggregates for concrete
KS F 2529 Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of the minute aggregates
for structure
KS F 2533 Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of the lightweight coarse
aggregates for structure
KS F 2534 Lightweight aggregates for structure
KS F 2543 Copper slag aggregates for concrete
KS F 2544 Blast furnace slag aggregates for concrete
KS F 2560 Chemical admixtures for concrete
KS F 2562 Expansive agent for concrete
KS F 2563 Blast furnace slag powder for concrete
KS F 2567 Concrete silica fume
KS F 2573 Recycled aggregates for concrete
KS F 2713 Chloride analysis test method for concrete and concrete materials
KS F 2715 How to test water-soluble chloride of mortar and concrete
KS F 4009 Ready-Mix Concrete
KS L 5105 Compression strength testing method for hydraulic cement mortar
KS L 5201 Portland cement
KS L 5205 Alumina cement for refractory
KS L 5210 Blast furnace slag cement
KS L 5211 Fly ash cement
KS L 5217 Expansive hydraulic cement
KS L 5401 Portland pozzolan cement
KS L 5405 Fly ash
Design standards for the precast concrete assembly style architectural frames of
ARCHITECTURAL INSTITUTE OF KOREA
Calculation standards for the steel framed concrete structure of ARCHITECTURAL
INSTITUTE OF KOREA
Design standards for lightweight porous concrete panel structure of ARCHITECTURAL
INSTITUTE OF KOREA
Design standards for lightweight porous concrete block structure of ARCHITECTURAL
INSTITUTE OF KOREA
0501.7 Design Documentation
(1) Various sizes of members, cross-sectional areas, relative position, and so on should
be completely described in drawings. Also, the height of a floor, the center of a column,
and the size of an uneven area should be described.
(2) All the proper major details necessary for construction in the structural design
documents should be included and all related information in the designated forms should
be described for quick and correct reference. These documents should be the instructions
on the type of steel bar distribution for clearly conveying the senior structure engineer's
intent for structure design and completing a shop drawing of steel bar distribution.
(3) The detailed drawings on the distribution of rebars should describe the anchor depth
of rebars and their position, the length of a lap joint, mechanical joint of rebars, and the
type and position of welding joints and the description method of structure drawings and
the detailed drawings on construction follow "the detailed instructions on steel concrete
reinforcements".
(4) The details included in other structural drawings follow 0104.3.4.
0502 Quality and testing of materials

0502.1 Components of concrete
0502.2.1.1 Cement
Cement specified in the Korean Industrial Standards(KS L 5201, 5205, 5210, 5211, 5217,
5401), their equivalents, or more should be used
0502.2.1.2 Concrete
The quality and size of aggregates should follow the below specifications.
(1) The same or more than the equal aggregates as specified in Korean Industrial
Standards (KS) should be used.
(2) The aggregates should have proper hardness or grain size, show durability, not
contain harmful materials such as lump of clay, organic materials, leptosomatic asbestos,
and so on, and have the quality specified in KS F 2526 (aggregates for concrete)KS F
2527 (crushed aggregates for concrete), KS F 2534 (lightweight aggregates for structure)
KS F 2543 (slag aggregates for concrete), KS F 2544 (blast furnace slag aggregates for
concrete), and KS F2573.
(3) Even though products are not standard, you have to use the products that have the
same or more than that quality specified in Korean Industrial Standards (KS) related to
the aggregates of KS F 2502 (Testing method for sieve analysis aggregates), KS F 2503
(Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregates), KS F 2504
(Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of minute aggregates), KS F 2529
(Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of the lightweight minute aggregates
for structure), KS F 2533 (Testing method for specific gravity and absorption of the
lightweight coarse aggregates for structure), KS F 2468 (Testing method for impurities of
lightweight concrete aggregates ). And, besides these, they can be used under the senior
engineer's approval once it is proved that the concrete with a proper grain size and
required quality can be made.
(4) The maximum nominal size of coarse aggregates should not exceed the following
value. But, these limitations may not be applied according to the senior engineer's
decision if the workability of ramming method that can pour concrete with no vacant
space.
1/5 of the minimum distance between the both ends of a concrete form.
1/3 of slab thickness
3/4 of the clear gap between individual rebars, bundled rebars, tendons, or ducts
0502 2 1 3 Chemical admixtures
The use and quality of chemical admixtures should follow the below specifications.
(1) The chemical admixtures that are the same or the better as specified in KS F 2560
(chemical admixtures for concrete) should be used.
(2) When chemical admixtures are used, the approval from the senior engineer should
be obtained after enough quality analysis and test.
(3) Chemical admixtures should show the same consistent substances and performance
as the product used for determining concrete mixing does.
(4) The chemical admixtures containing calcium chloride or chloride ion should not be
used for prestressed concrete, the concrete where aluminum products are embedded or
the concrete that uses zinc-coated fixed metal forms.
0502 2 1 4 Water
The water used for making concrete should meet the following specifications.
(1) The water used for concrete mixing should be clean and not contain acid, oil,
alkalies, salt, organic substances, and the materials that may damage rebars and concrete.
(2) The water used for mixing concrete should meet the attachment 2 of KS F 4009.
(3) The water and the surface water with aggregates used for mixing the concrete
embedded by prestressed concrete or aluminum products should not contain the harmful
amount of chloride ion. It is better to refer to the specification of 0504.5.3 (4) for the
harmful amount of chloride ion.
(4) The water that is not proper as drinking water cannot be used for concrete if it does
not meet the following information.
Proper mixture should be designed by using the water from the same water source.
The 7 days' and 28 days' strength of the mortar sample made of the water unsuitable
for drinking should have the strength, which is more than 90% of the strength of the same
shaped specimen made of drinking water, at least. A strength comparison test should be
conducted by using the mortar of the same conditions except for water, and the test
should be prepared and conducted according to KS L 5105 (Compression strength test
method for hydraulic cement mortar).
0502.2.1.5 Admixtures
The admixtures used for making concrete should meet the following specifications.
(1) The fly ash used as an admixture should be suitable for KS L 5405 fly ash.
(2) The expansive agent for concrete used as an admixture should be suitable for KS F
2562 (expansive agent for concrete).
(3) The blast furnace slag powder used as an admixture should be suitable for KS F
2563 (blast furnace slag powder for concrete).
(4) The silica fume used as an admixture should be suitable for KS F 2567.
(As an admixture other than 5) (1), (2) (3) and (4), there are silica powder, admixture for
high strength, and so on. It should be ensured that there is no influence on the durability
of the manufactured concrete by fully studying and testing them and reviewing the
method of using them to ensure quality in using them because there is still no quality
criteria and method of use for these admixtures.
502.2.2 Concrete
0502.2.2.1 Specimen
The manufacturing and curing method of a concrete specimen should be based on KS F
2403 (The method of manufacturing a specimen for a concrete strength test). When a
specimen of concrete is made, the specimen for compressive strength should be based on
Φ150×300mm, but when a specimen of Φ100×200mm is used, the strength correction
factor, 0.97, should be used and a proper strength factor should be considered for other
cases.
0502.2.2.2 Ready-mixed concrete
When ready-mixed concrete is used, KS F 4009 (Ready-mixed concrete) should be
followed.
0502.2.2.3 Lightweight aggregates
For lightweight concrete aggregates for making lightweight concrete, you have to use the
lightweight aggregates for structure specified in KS F 2534 (lightweight aggregates for
structure).
0502.2.2.4 Strength according to curing
When the original design load does not receive stress within 28 days after concrete
pouring, the compressive strength of a member can be multiplied by the increase factor
according to curing under senior engineer's approval. At that time, the formula
(0502.2.16) and the formula (0502.2.17) can be used.
0502.2.2.5 Creep
The creep of concrete can be predicted according to the following specifications.
(1)The total strain εcσ (t, t’) in consideration of the instant deformation and creep
deformation by the acting stress fc (t’) at the time t’ can be obtained by using the
following formula (0502.2.1) depending on compressive strength or design standard
strength of concrete, size of a member, average relative humidity, aging at the
time of loading, loading time, type of cement curing temperature temperature
change magnitude of acting stress
Here, Eci should be obtained by the formula (0502.2.18) and Eci (t’) by the formula
(0502.2.19).
(2) in the formula (0502.2.1), the creep factor Φ (t, t’)has a curing temperature of 20°C
and can be obtained as follows based on the case where the temperature is 20°C when a
load is applied
Here,
(3) The creep factor of the formula (0502.2.2) should be compensated as follows based on
the magnitude of an acting stress, temperature, and cement.
Compensation factor based on a curing temperature and a type of cement: In case
there was a change of temperature during a curing process or an exposure to the air,
whose temperature was not 20°C, compensation should be done for the cure period of
concrete, t’, at the time of materials unloading as follows in consideration of temperature
and a type of cement.
Class 2 cement
Class 1, 5 cement
Class 3 cement
Here, T (Δti) is the temperature of Δti days (°C), Δti is the period of a constant
temperature (dyas), and n is a number of the step where a constant temperature is
maintained.
The compensation factor according to the magnitude of an acting stress: In case an
acting stress, fc(t'), is 0.4fcu(t')<| f c(t') | < 0.6f cu (t'), Φ O of the formula , (0502.2.3), is
compensated like in the formula, (0502.2.11), and the nonlinearity of creep is considered.
Here, fcu (t') can be obtained by using the formula, (0502.2.16), and the formula,
(0502.2.17).
The compensation factor according to the change of temperature: when the
temperature where a constant load is applied changes from 5°C to 80°C, the creep factor
should be obtained by the formula (0502.2.12) by correcting the formula (0502. 2.4) Φ RH
by the formula (0502.2.13) and β H of the formula (0502.2.8) by the formula (0502.2.14),
respectively.
Here,
28 days' average compressive strength, fcu, should be obtained from the formula,
(2.2.15), and the change of the strength of concrete, fcu(t), according to time should be
obtained from the formula, (2.2.16).
Class 1 cement humid cure

Class 1 cement steam cure
Class 3 cement humid cure
Class 3 cement steam cure
Class 2 cement
Here, β cc (t): Rate of change of strength according to time
β sc : Constant according to a type of cement
When creep stain is calculated, initial tangent elastic modulus should be obtained as
the following.
In the mean time, the change of the initial tangent elastic modulus, Eci(t) according to
time should be obtained like the following and βcc(t)is in the formula, (0502.2 17).
A creep test should follow KS F 2453 (compressive creep test method for concrete).
0502.2.2.6 Shrinkage
The shrinkage strain of concrete can be obtained according to the following formula,
(0502.2.20), in consideration of the size of a member.
Here, εsho and βs(t－ts) are calculated by the formulas from (0502.2.21) to (0502.2.24).
Class 2 cement
Class 1, 5 cement
Class 3 cement
If the ambient temperature is not 20°C, β RH and βs (t – ts) should be corrected by the
following formulas, (0502.2.25) and (0502.2.26).
0502.2.3 Steels
0502.2.3.1 Reinforcements
Deformed rebars should be used as reinforcements. However, plain rebars can be used as
spiral rebars or steel wires. And the reinforcements made of steel for structure and steel
pipes can be used according to this standard.
0502.2.3.2 Welding
If rebars are welded, the method and location of welding should be written clearly.
Required welding symbols and weld test methods should follow KS B 0052(welding
symbols), KS B 0816, and KS B 0892(weld test methods).
0502.2.3.3 Quality, shape, dimensions
Rebars, quality of steel wires welding steel grids, shapes, and dimensions should meet
each specification of KS D 3504(steel bars for concrete), KS D 3552(steel wires), and KS
D 7017(welding steel grids). If they exceed the yield strength of
0502.2.3.4 Yield strength of design standards
fy, yield strength based on design of rebars, steel wires, and welding steel grids, 400MPa,
fy should be used as a stress value, which is suitable for the strain, 0.0035.
0502.2.3.5 Plating and coating
Rebars should be plated with zinc or coated with epoxy resin and these rebars should
meet the specifications of KS D 3629 (rebars coated with epoxy).
0502.2.3.6 Tendons
Tendons should meet the following specifications.
(1) The steel wires used for prestressed concrete should meet KS D 7002(PC steel wires
and PC steel ductile wires).
(2) Steel bars should follow KS D 3505(PC steel bars).
(3) In case there is information, which is not specifically indicated for steel wires, steel
ductile wires, and steel bars in KS D 7002(PC steel wires and PC steel ductile wires) and
KS D 3505(PC steel bars), these materials can be used for the minimum requirements of
specifications and only when their quality is greater than the one regulated in the above
specifications in any case.
0502.2.3.7 Structural steels, steel plates, steel pipes, tubes
Quality, dimensions, and shapes of structural steels, steel pipes, tubes should be more
than the specifications of KS D 3503(general structural rolled steels) and can be used
after certain quality and strength tests are conducted in the presence of a senior engineer.
0502.3 Quality of concrete
0502.3.1 General information on tests
(1) Concrete should be mixed not only to meet the specifications of durability in 0504
but also to ensure the average required mixing strength specified in 0502.3.2.2. When
concrete is manufactured, the frequency in which the strength less than fck appears should
be minimized as indicated in 0502.3.3.2(3).
(2) The requirements for fck should be based on the test of cylindrical samples conducted
according to the manufacturing and testing specifications of samples as described in
0502.3.3.2.
(3) If there is no other special specifications, fck should be based on the cure 28 days'
strength. If a test is conducted for other periods of cure, the test date of fck should be
clearly described in a drawing or specifications.
(4) If design specifications of 0504.3.1.4, 0507.2.3.2 and 0508.2.2.3 about the crack
tensile strength, fsp, are applied, a laboratory test should be conducted to determine fsp,
which is corresponding to the value of fck .
(5) These test results of the crack tensile strength cannot be used for determining the
suitability of field concrete.
0502.3.2 Selecting a concrete mixture
0502.3.2.1 Setting standard deviations
Setting standard deviations should follow the below.
(1) If there are test records of concrete production facilities, the standard deviation for
them should be calculated. The test records that can be used for calculating standard
deviations are as follows.
The materials, quality control procedures, and conditions, which are similar to those
of expected actual situations, should be ready, and the changing range of the mixing ratio
with the materials used for test records should be described under the conditions similar
to those of the actual field.
They should be the values obtained from the concrete whose strength is the same with
the design standard strength required in a planned construction or whose difference from
the design standard strength is within 7 MPa.
0502.3.2.1 (Except for the requirements of 2), a continuous test of 30 times should be
conducted at least.
(2) If concrete facilities do not have the records suitable for the requirements of
0502.3.2.1 (1) but have the continuous test records of more than 15 times and less than 29
times, standard deviations can be calculated by the multiplication of the calculated
standard deviation <Table 0502.3. 2.1> and the compensation factor. In order to get an
approval, the test records should be identical to the requirements of and of
0502.3.2.1 (1) and should be the continuous test records conducted for more than 45days.
<Table 0502.3.2.1> Compensation factors for standard deviations
when the test frequency is less than 30 times
Test frequency1) Compensation factors for standard
deviations2)
15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more than that 1.00
1) Linear is conducted for the test frequency that is not
described in the above table.
2) The compensation factors of the standard deviations used for
determining the required mixture strength
0502.3.2.2 Average required mixture strength
Average required mixture strength should be determined as follows.
(1) The basic mixture strength for selecting a concrete mixture, fcr, is calculated by using
the standard deviation calculated according to the specification of 0502.3.2(1). At that
time, if design standard compressive strength is less than 35MPa, mixture strength is
determined as the larger of the two values calculated by the formulas, (0502.3.1) and
(0502.3.2), and if mixture strength exceeds 35MPa, it is determined as the larger of the
two values calculated by the formulas, (0502.3.1) and (0502.3.3).
In case of f ck ≤ 35MPa
f cr = f ck+1.34s (0502.3.1)
f cr = (f ck−3.5) + 2.33s (0502.3.2)
In case of f ck> 35MPa
f cr= f ck+1.34s
f cr=0.9 f ck+2.33s (0502.3.3)
(2) If there is no field strength record for the calculation of the standard deviation
meeting the requirements of 0502.3.2.1 or the test frequency of compressive strength is
less than 14 times, mixture strength, fcr, should be determined according to the following
<Table 0502.3.2.2>.
<Table 0502.3.2.2> mixture strength in case there is no record or the test frequency is less than 14 times.
Design standard compressive strength, fck (MPa) Mixture strength, fcr (MPa)
Less than 21 fck + 7
More than 21 and less than 35 fck + 8.5
Exceeding 35 fck + 10
0502.3.2.3 Compensation during construction

If resources can be obtained during construction, mixture strength can be reduced if fcr,
which should be larger than fck, meets (1) and (3) of 0502.3.2.3 at the same time or (2)
and (3) at the same time.
(1) In case the average of the test results obtained from the test results of 30 times or
more exceeds the condition value of 0502.3.2.2(1) calculated by using the standard
deviation calculated according to 0502.3.2.1(1).
(2) In case the test results of less than 29 times are obtained and the average value of
these test results exceeds the condition value of 0502.3.2.2 (1) calculated by using the
standard deviation of 0502.3.2.1 (2).
(3) In case of meeting the requirements of special exposure of 0504.5.3.
0502.3.3 Evaluation of concrete and approval for use
0502.3.3.1 Test frequency
A test frequency should meet the following specifications from (1) to (4).
(1) Samples for the strength test of each class of the concrete made on each date should
be taken as follows.
more than 1 time per day
150 more than 1 time per 150m3
more than 1 time per the surface area, 500m2, of a slab or a wall.
(2) If the frequency of a test, which is conducted according to 0502.3.3.1 (1) because the
entire amount of concrete is small, is less than 5 times in the concrete strength test of any
class, a test should be conducted for the 5 batches selected at random or for each batch in
case of less than 5 batches
(3) In case the entire amount of the concrete used is less than 40m3, a strength test can be
omitted if strength is determined as satisfactory by a senior engineer.
(4) In a strength test, the average of the strength of 3 samples, which are made of the
same concrete materials, should be used, and a test should be conducted on the 28th day
or on the date designated for a test.
0502.3.3.2 Laboratory samples
Manufacturing and testing the samples cured in a laboratory and their strength should
meet the following specifications from (1) to (4).
(1) A sample for a strength test should be taken as per KS F 2401.
(2) A specimen for a strength test should be taken as per KS F 2405.
(3) The strength of each class of concrete can be considered as satisfactory if it meets 2
following requirements.
When the average is more than f ck after 3 times of a continuous strength test
In case each strength test value (average of 3 specimens) is f ck≤35MPa, when it is
more than (f ck − 3.5) MPa, or in case it is f ck >35 MPa, when it is more than 0.9f ck .
(4) If any requirement of 0502.3.3.2(3) is not met, an action should be take to increase
the average value of the strength test through a test according to the specifications of
0502.3.3.4.
0502.3.3.3 Field specimen
Manufacturing and testing a specimen cured in a laboratory and its strength should meet
the following specifications from (1) to (4).
(1) A senior engineer can request for a test of a specimen cured in the field in order to
review the suitability of cure and protect the concrete of an actual structural object.
(2) The specimen cured in the field should be cured under the field conditions according
to KS F 2403.
(3) For the specimen cured in the field, a mold should be made of the same samples and
at the same time as in a test specimen cured in a laboratory.
(4) When the strength of a specimen cured in the field according to the test cure days for
determining f ck is less than 85% of that of the specimen cured in a laboratory under the
same conditions, the cure and protection procedures for concrete should be improved. In
case the strength of the concrete cured in the field is fck≤35 MPa, if it exceeds 3.5MPa
from fck or in case it is fck>35MPa, if it exceeds 0.1 f ck from f ck, limited articles of 85%
can be ignored.
0502.3.3.4 Measures taken when strength is out of specifications
The following steps should be taken if strength is low after a test.
(1) if the test result of each specimen cured in a laboratory is lower than f ck of 0502.3.3.1
(4) and less than 3.5MPa in case of fck≤35MPa, lower than 0.1fck in case of fck>35MPa, or
there is a problem in the test result of the specimen cured in the field (refer to 0502.3.3.3
(4)), actions should be take to ensure that the force resisting the load of a structural
member is enough.
(2) When the strength of concrete is considered to be remarkably low and the load
resisting ability is determined to be decreased seriously through calculation, core should
be taken form the part of a problem and a test for the taken core should be conducted
according to KS F 2422(The test of strength of the core removed from concrete and a
beam). At that time, 3 cores should be taken in order to see if, in case the test value of
strength is fck≤35MPa, it is more than 3.5MPa less than the design standard compressive
strength, f ck or if it is more than 0.1 fck less than that in case of fck>35MPa.
(3) In case the concrete of a structural member is dry, a core should be tested in an
already dry state after being dried for 7 days by air (Temperature 15~30ºC and less than
60% of relative humidity). If the concrete of a structural member has moisture, a core
should be submerged in the water for more than 40 hours and a test should be conducted
in the state of moisture.
(4) If the average value of 3 cores of all core specimen concrete reach 85% of f ck in a
core test and the strength of each core is not less than 75% of fck, they can be determined
to be structurally suitable. For accuracy of a test, a test should be conducted again for the
part, which shows irregular core strength.
(5) If the test is not followed by the specifications of 0502.3.3.4(4) and structural
suitability is suspected, a senior engineer should give an order of conducting a unloading
test of a structural object for the suspected part of a structural object or should take other
reasonable actions according to the specifications of 0520.
0502.3.4 Test of concrete
0502.3.4.1 Test of general concrete
The test of general concrete should meet the following.
(1) In case a senior engineer approves evaluation on strength as necessary during
construction, it should follow KS F 2405, KS F 2408 and KS F2423.
(2) Unit volume weight tests should follow KS F 2409.
(3) Bleeding tests should follow KS F 2414.
(4) Air containment tests should follow KS F 2409 and KS F 2421.
(5) Slump tests should follow KS F 2402.
0502.3.4.2 Test of lightweight concrete
Tests of lightweight concrete meet the following specifications.
(1) Unit volume weight tests should follow KS F 2462 and should be suitable for the
specifications of KS F 2534.
(2) Test methods of foreign materials should follow KS F 2468.
(3) Other tests should follow general test methods of concrete.
0502.4 Tests of rebars
Tests of rebars should follow KS F 0802 and KS F 0804.
0503 Design load and load combination
0503.1 General information
(1) The members of reinforced concrete structures should be designed by using the load
factor and the reduction factor basically specified in 0503.3.3 to have enough strength
according to the specifications of this chapter. However, they can be designed by using
the load factor and the reduction factor of the alternative design methods applied
previously in case clients allow them as necessary.
(2) The specifications in this chapter are based on the principle that structural members
should be designed to resist all expected load combinations.
(3) The load combination for the active load considered in this chapter is for the active
load by loaded materials such as group load or mechanical load. In case the loaded load
has different properties of load like traffic load, the load combination of related standards
should be used or it should be determined by expert's judgement.
(4) The load used should follow the regulations that a government or a management of
facilities made. However, the value reviewed by reasonable methods can be used as
active load.
(5) In wind load and earthquake load, structural members should be designed to properly
resist horizontal forces.
0503.2 Load and external force
0503.2.1 Applied load
In the design of structural members, all kinds of load and external force such as
prestressed force, crane load, vibration, impact, shrinkage, creep and change of
temperature, elastic shrinkage, differential settlement, and so on besides live load, dead
load, wind load, earthquake load, snow piling load, soil pressure, and flow pressure,
which act on structural members, should be considered during or after construction.
0503.2.2 Calculation of load
The load and external force applied to the design of structure should follow the
specifications of Chapter 3.
0503.3 Strength
0503.3.1 General information
(1) On all cross-sectional areas, structures and structural members should be designed to
have more than the required strength calculated by the combination of load and force
defined by this standard.
(2) Structural members should meet all other specifications of this standard to ensure
enough functionality for the load used.
0503.3.2 Required strength
(1) When reinforced concrete structures are designed, they should be designed to meet
the maximum required strength acting on the corresponding structural objects in
consideration of both the load factor and the load combination described as follows.
or or
or or
or
or or
or or
(2) Except for garages, public meeting place, and all places where L is more than
5.0kN/m2, the load factor for the live load L can be reduced to 0.5 in formulas (0503.3.3),
(0503.3.4) and (0503.3.5).
(3) In case the value reduced to the directional factor for wind load in the formulas
(0503.3.3), (0503.3.4) and (0503.3.7) is used, 0.8W should be used instead of 0.65W and
1.6W instead of 1.3W, respectively.
(4) In case the usable earthquake force is used for the earthquake load E in the formulas
(0503.3.5) and (0503.3.8), 1.4E should be used instead of 1.0E.
(5) In case Hh by the horizontal pressure of soil, underground water, or other materials in
the formulas (0503.3.7) and (0503.3.8) and the load effect by Hv offset the load effect by
w or E, 0 should be the load factor for Hv and Hh. If lateral pressure makes a resistant
effect of reducing the behavior of a structural object by other load, this should not be
included in Hh, but, when design strength is calculated, the effect of Hh Table, should be
considered.
(6) In case the effect of impact acts on structural members, the above formulas should be
applied by replacing the live load (L) with (L+I), which includes the effect of impact (I).
(7) Deflection, creep, shrinkage, expanded amount of expansive concrete, and change of
temperature should be calculated in consideration of the actual situation of the structural
members in use.
(8) For the design of post-tension installed parts, the load factor 1.2 should be applied to
the tensile force of the maximum pre-stressed steels.
0503.3.3 Design strength
0503.3.3.1 Nominal strength
The design strength for members of structural objects, joints between members, and
bending moment of the cross-sectional area of each member, axial force, shear stress, and
torsion moment should be the value gained by multiplying the strength reducing factor Φ
by the nominal strength defined according to the assumption and specification of this
chapter.
0503.3.3.2 Strength reducing factor
Strength reducing factors should meet the following specifications.
(1) The tension governing cross-sectional area 0.85 defined by 0506.2.2(4)
(2) The compression governing cross-sectional area defined by 0506.2.2(3)
The reinforced concrete member 0.70 reinforced by spiral rebars according to the
specifications of rebars
Other reinforced concrete members 0.65
In case the pure tensile strain εt of external tensile rebars is between the compression
governing and tension governing cross-sectional areas in the nominal axial strength,
ε t increases the value Φ from the value for the compression governing cross-sectional
area to 0.85 as it increases to 0.005 in the limit of compression governing strain.
(3) Shear strength and torsion moment 0.75
(4) The bearing pressure of concrete (excluding post-tension settlements or strut-tie
models) 0.65
(5) Post-tension settlement area0.85
(6) Strut-and-tie models
Strut, cut part, soil pressure part0.75
tie 0.85
(7) Bending cross-sectional area of the pre-tension member whose tensile material
embedded length is less than the settlement length.
From the end of a member to the end of the transferring length 0.75
Between the end of the transferring length and the end of the settlement length, the
value Φ increases linearly from 0.75 to 0.85. If tensile rebars are not attached to the end
of a member, it should be assumed that the tensile rebars are embedded from the end of
the length of attachment force reduction.
(8) Bending moment, compressive strength, shear strength, and bearing pressure of the
concrete without roots 0.55
0503.3.4 Design strength of rebars
Except for tensile rebars, the design standard yield strength fy should not exceed
550MPa.
0503.4 General structural analysis
0503.4.1 Method of analysis
0503.4.1.1 Analysis of elasticity
Except that lateral ties or all members of continuous structural members are modified
according to 0503.4.2, design should be done for the maximum cross-sectional force
determined by the theory of elasticity. Also, design can be done by using the simplified
assumption from 0503.4.4 to 0503.4.7.
0503.4.1.2 Approximate method
Except for prestressed concrete, the buildings having general structure, clear span, and
floor height can be interpreted by using the approximate method of the below 0503.4.1.3
and 0503.4.1.4.
0503.4.1.3 Application requirements of approximate methods
In case a continuous beam or one-way directional slab meets all the following
requirements, the approximate method of 0503.4.1.4 can be used.
(1) In case of more than 2 spans
(2) In case the difference between 2 adjacent spans is less than 20% of the shorter span.
(3) In case equally distributed load works
(4) In case the active load does not exceed 3 times of the fixed load
(5) In case the cross-sectional area of a member is constant
0503.4.1.4 Bending moment and shear strength
The continuous beam meeting the specifications of 0503.4.1.3 or the shear strength and
bending moment of one directional slabs can be calculated as follows.
(1) Positive moment
The span of the far outside
In case an discontinuous end is not restricted wu ln 2/11
In case an discontinuous end is lined up with a support part wu ln 2/14
Internal span wu ln 2/16
(2) Negative moment
The negative moment of the external area of the first internal support part
In case of 2 spans wu ln 2/9
In case of more than 3 spans wu ln 2/10
The negative moment of other internal support parts wu ln 2/11
The slabs whose span is less than 3m as negative moment of all the area of a support
part and the beam whose ratio of the addition of the strength of a column and the strength
of a rebar at each end of a span is greater than 8 wu ln 2/12
In case the support part of negative moment is a curved beam in the internal area of
the external support part of the member that is lined up with a support part as one
body. wu ln 2/24
In case a support part is a column wu ln 2/16
(3) Shear strength
The shear strength at the external area of the first internal support part 1.15 wu ln /2
The shear strength at other areas of a support part wu ln /2
0503.4.2 Re-distribution of the negative moment of continuous bending members
(1) Except for calculating the bending moment by using the approximation solution, the
negative moment of a continuous bending member calculated by the theory of elasticity
can be increased or decreased as much as 1,000 ε t % within 20%.
(2) The calculation of the bending moment for the cross-sectional area in a span should
use the modified negative moment.
(3) Re-distribution of negative moment is possible only when the pure tensile strain of the
external tensile rebars εt: is greater than 0.0075 on the cross-sectional area where bending
moment will be reduced.
0503.4.3 Elastic modulus
0503.4.3.1 Elastic modulus of concrete
The elastic modulus of concrete is calculated as follows.
(1) The secant elastic modulus of concrete should be calculated according to the formula
(0503.4.1) in case the value of the unit mass mc of concrete is 1,450~ 2,500kg/m3).
However, for the concrete that used general aggregates (mc = 2,300kg/m3), the formula
(0503.4.2) can be used.
Here,
f cu= f ck+8 (MPa) 3
The relationship between the initial tangent elastic modulus of the concrete used for
calculation of creep and the secant elastic modulus is like the formula (0503.4.4).
E c=0.85E ci (0503.4.4)
0503.4.3.2 Elastic modulus of rebars
The elastic modulus of rebars should be based on the value of the formula (0503.4.5).
Es=200, 000 (MPa) (0503.4.5)
0503.4.3 Elastic modulus of tensile rebars
Basically, the elastic modulus of tensile rebars is determined by a test or given by a
manufacturer, but the following formula (0503.4.6) should be criteria if not.
Eps= 200,000 (MPa) (0503.4.6)
0503.4.3.4 Elastic modulus of section steels
The elastic modulus of section steels should be based on the value of the formula
(0503.4.7).
Ess＝ 205,000 (MPa) (0503.4.7)
0503.4.4 Strength
(1) Any kind of reasonable assumption can be used when the relative bending strength
and torsion strength of columns, walls, floors, and, roof systems. However, the selected
assumption should be consistent throughout the corresponding process of interpretation.
(2) When bending moment is determined or a member is designed, the effect of a hunch
should be considered.
0503.4.5 Span
(1) For the member that is not lined up with a support part, span should be determined by
adding the thickness of a slab or a beam to the clear span. But, the value cannot exceed
the distance between the centers of support part.
(2) The span used when bending moment is calculated in the interpretation of frames or
continuous structures should be the center to center distance of support parts. For the
beam constructed as one body with a support pat, it can be designed with the front
moment of a support part.
(3) The slab whose clear span is less than 3m and that makes one body with a support
part can be interpreted as a continuous beam whose clear span becomes a span with
ignoring the width of support beams.
0503.4.6 Columns
(1) When a column is designed, axial force should be considered as the force transferred
to the column from the factored load acting on all floors and roofs, and the maximum
bending moment should be considered as the bending moment by the factored load acting
on the one span of the floors or roofs adjacent to the column. Also, other conditions in
which the ration of bending moment to axial load becomes maximum should be
considered.
(2) When frames or continuous structures are designed, the effect of the unbalanced floor
of the external and internal columns and the effect by other eccentric load should be
considered.
(3) When the bending moment of the column by the vertical load is calculated, it can be
assumed that the far end of the column forming one body with structures is fixed.
(4) All the bending moment transferred to a column from a floor should be distributed to
each column of the top and bottom sides according to the relative strength and the
conditions of restriction of each column of the top and bottom of the floor.
0503.4.7 Distribution of live load
(1) Live load can be interpreted to be applied only to the corresponding floor, and then
the far end of the column constructed as one body with structures can be assumed as
fixed.
(2) The load combination of dead load and live load can be used by limiting it to the
following 2 cases only.
The combined load of the factored dead load applied to all spans and the factored live
load fully applied to the 2 adjacent spans.
Combined load of the factored fixed load loaded to all spans and the factored active
load fully loaded every 2 spans.
0503.4.8 T shaped beam
0503.4.8.1 T shaped beam of an unity
The effective width of T shaped beam, into which a slab and a beam are put as one body,
should be determined to be the smallest value of the following.
(1) T shaped beam
(every 8times of the thickness of the flange stuck out at both sides, respectively) + bw
The center to center distance of the slabs of the both sides
1/4 of the span of the beam
(2) Half T shaped beam
(6 times of the thickness of the flange stuck out at one side) + bw
(1/12 of the span of the beam) + bw
(1/2 of the internal distance to the adjacent beam) + bw
0503.4.8.2 Independent T shaped beam
The thickness of a flange providing the additional compressive area of the independent T
shaped beam should be greater than 1/2 of the center width and the effective width of a
flange should be less than 4 times of the center width.
0503.4.8.3 Distribution of flanges of T shaped beams
When main rebars have the same direction as beams at the slab treated as the flange
(excluding a catgut structure) of T shaped beam, the rebars should placed at the top of the
slab vertically to the beam according to the following requirements.
(1) The horizontal rebars should be designed for the factored load acting on the flange
with the protruded flange of a T shaped beam considered as a cantilever. At that time, the
entire width of the protruded flange should be considered as an effective width in case of
an independent T shaped beam, and in case of other T shaped beams, the only effective
width calculated according to 0503.48.1 should be considered.
(2) The spacing between horizontal rebars should be less than 5 times of the thickness of
a slab and also less than 450mm.
0503.4.9 Structure of joists
0503.4.9.1 Requirements of the structure of joists
The structure of joists should meet the following requirements
(1) The structure of joists is a structural form in which the joists of constant clearance and
their top slab are made as one body and the joists can be made in one direction or two
directions, which form a right angle.
(2) The width of a joist should be greater than 100mm and the height of a joist should be
less than 3.5 times of the minimum width of the joist.
(3) The clear span between joists should not exceed 750mm.
(4) The structure of a joist that does not meet the specifications of limitation from (1) to
(3) should be designed by slabs and beams.
0503.4.9.2 The information considered in design
The following information should be considered in designing the structure of joists.
(1) When the fillers composed of the permanent plastic clay or concrete tiles, whose
compressive strength is greater than that of the concrete used for joists, is used, the
following information should be considered.
The vertical part of the filler attached to a joist can be included to the calculation of
the strength of shear and negative moment. But, other part of the filler cannot be included
to the calculation of strength.
The thickness of the slab on the top of the permanent filler should be greater than 1/2
of the clear span of catguts or greater than 40mm.
In the structure of one directional joist, shrinkage rebars should be placed vertically to
the joist according to the requirements of 0505.7.
(2) When the mold or filler, which does not follow the above (1), is used, the following
information should be considered.
The thickness of the slab should be greater than 1/12 of the clear span of joists or
greater than 50mm.
When concentration of load is considered, the rebars necessary for bending should be
placed vertically to the joist, and these rebars should be greater than the amount of rebars
needed according to 0505.7.
(3) In case a senior allows embedding a conduit inside the slab, the thickness of the slab
should be more than 25mm greater than the entire height of the conduit at any point.
Even at that time, the conduit should not remarkably reduce the strength of the structure
of joists.
0503.4.9.3 Shear strength of the structure of joists
The shear stress by concrete in the structure of joists, Vc, can take 10% greater than the
shear stress specified in 0507. Also, the shear stress can be increased by making the end
of the joist wide or by using shear rebars.
0504 Usage and durability
0504.1 General information
(1) When structures or members receive load in use to maintain enough function and
performance during use, usage and durability should be reviewed.
(2) Review on usage should be conducted in consideration of the effect of crack,
deflection, and fatigue.
0504.2 Crack
Except for (1), (2), and (3), it can be considered that the review on crack is finished if it
meets all other specifications of this design standard including 0506.3.3.
(2) For the structure requiring waterproof, the review on crack should be properly
conducted. In this case, review can be conducted by setting up an allowable crack width
for ensuring a required ability of waterproof.
(3) For the structure that put importance on appearance, review on crack can be
conducted by setting up the allowable crack width for appearance.
(4) Additional reinforcements should be placed according to 0505.7 to control the crack
caused by the change of temperature, shrinkage, and so on if necessary besides the rebars
necessary for a member to control the crack caused by load. And the rebars to control
cracks should be distributed and place around the cross-sectional area of a member, and
the clearance and diameter of rebars should be small if possible.
0504.3 Deflection
0504.3.1 1Directional structure
0504.3.1.1 Minimum thickness
Minimum thickness should be applied to compartment walls, which are easy to be
damaged due to large deflection, or one directional structure, which does not support
other structures. However, if <Table 0504.3.1.6> is met through the calculation of
deflection, it is not necessary to use the minimum thickness of <Table 0504.3.1.1> for
application.
<Table 0504.3.1.1> the minimum thickness of a beam or an one-way slab in case of no
calculation of deflection
minimum thickness, h
Simple I step both steps cantilever
member support continuation continuation
compartment walls, which are easy to be damaged due to large
deflection, or a member, which does not support or attach other
structures.
One-way slab
l/20 l/24 l/28 l/10
one-way slab
with beam ribs
l/16 l/18.5 l/21 l/8
The values in the table are for the members using the rebars with the design standard
yield strength 400MPa and general concrete (wc = 2,300 Kg/m3), and these should be
modified for other requirements.
1,500∼2,000 Kg/m3, For lightweight concrete for the structures having the unit mass
of (1.65–0.00031 wc) should be multiplied by the calculated value, but it should not
be less than 1.09.
When fy, is out of 400 Mpa, (0.43 + fy / 700) should be multiplied by the calculated
value.
0504.3.1.2 Instant deflection

When deflection is calculated, the instant deflection by load reaction should be calculated
by using the formula of elastic deflection in consideration of the effect of the rebars and
the crack to the strength of a member.
0504.3.1.3 The second moment of an effective cross-sectional area
As long as the strength of a member is not obtained by the precise method of
interpretation, the deflection of a member should be obtained by using the elastic
modulus (Table 3. general concrete and lightweight concrete) and the second moment of
an effective cross-sectional area of the formula (0504.3.1), and 4 should not be greater
than V in any case.
However, when lightweight concrete is used, compensation should be done as follows.

(1) If there is the value of f sp for lightweight concrete, 1.76 f sp should be added instead of
, and this value should not exceed the value of .
(2) When the value of f sp is not specified, compensation should be done by multiplying
by the value of linear correction in case minute aggregates are mixed up, by 0.85
times in case of sand lightweight concrete, and by 0.75 times in case of the entire
lightweight concrete whose all aggregates are lightweight.
0504.3.1.4 The second moment of an effective cross-sectional area of a continuous
member
In case of continuous members, the second moment of an effective cross-sectional area of
the risky cross-sectional area against the positive and negative moment can be obtained
by using the formula (0504.3.1) and its average can be used.
0504.3.1.5 Long-term deflection
As long as comprehensive interpretation is not used, the additional long-term deflection
by the creep and shrinkage of the bending members of general or lightweight concrete
can be obtained by multiplying the instant deflection caused by the corresponding
continuous load by the following factor.
Here, ρ’ is the value of the center of a beam in case of simple and continuous spans and
of the support point in case of a cantilever. Time lapse factor for continuous load, is as
follows.
2.0 in case of more than 5 years
1.4 in case of more than 12 months
1.2 in case of 6 months
1.0 in case of 3 months
0504.3.1.6 Allowable deflection
The amount of deflection calculated in consideration of the effect of the long-term
deflection of the formula (0504.3.4) and the value Ie of the formula (0504.3.1)should be
less than the value of the maximum allowable deflection indicated in <Table 0504.3.1.6>.
<Table 0504.3.1.6>Maximum allowable deflection
Shape of a member The deflection that should be Limitation of

considered deflection
General roof structures which do not
support or attach non-structural Instant deflection caused by live
elements that are easy to be damaged load 1
by the excessive deflection
Floor structures which do not support
or attach non-structural elements that Instant deflection caused by load
are easy to be damaged by the load
excessive deflection
Floor or roof structures which support The deflected part, caused after
or attach non-structural elements that non-structural elements are
are easy to be damaged by the attached, of the entire deflection.
excessive deflection (the sum of the long-term
Roof or floor structures that support or deflection caused by all
attach the non-structural elements continuous load and the instant
which are not worried to be damaged deflection caused by additional
by excessive deflection active load)
3)
(1) This limitation does not consider the safety about accumulated water. The proper
calculation of deflection for the accumulated water is reviewed, but the long-term effect
of all continuous load, protrusion, construction error, and reliability of drain facilities
should be considered including the additional deflection caused by the accumulated
water.
(2) If the proper corrective action, which can prevent the damage of the elements of
supported or attached non-structures, is taken, this limitation can be exceeded.
(3) Long-term deflection is defined according to 0504.3.1.5 or 0504.3.3.2, but it can reduce
the amount of deflection caused before the attachment of the elements of non-structures.
This amount of reduction should be determined in the basis of the proper technical
materials regarding the properties of the time-deflection of the members similar to the
related members.
(4) It should be less than the allowable error of the elements of non-structures. But all that
should be done is that the value, which is gained by subtracting the protrusion from the
entire deflection, does not exceed this value of limitation. Namely, it can exceed this
limitation in case of protrusion.
0504.3.1.7 Allowable deflection of the structures receiving working load

The maximum allowable deflection of the structures mainly receiving working load such
as walkers and the load of vehicles should meet the following specifications.
(1) The deflection caused by the live load or impact of the members of simple or
continuous span should not exceed (1/800 of the span. However, in case of the bridges of
a city partially used by walkers, the deflection of bridges should not exceed 1/1,000.
(2) The cantilever caused by live load and impact should be less than 1/300 of the length
of the cantilever. However, in case of the consideration of the use by walkers, the
deflection is allowed up to 1/375 of the length of the cantilever.
0504.3.2 2 Structure of directions
0504.3.2.1 Minimum thickness
The minimum thickness of the slab or other 2-way slabs whose ration of the long span to
the short span does not exceed 2 should follow the specifications of 0504.3.2.
0504.3.2.2 Minimum thickness of flat slabs
In case there is no beam around a slab except a rim beam or the strength ration of beams,
αm, is less than 0.2, the minimum thickness of slabs should meet the value of <Table
0504.3.2.2> and also should be greater than the following value.
<Table 0504.3.2.2> The minimum thickness of the beam that has no beam internally
Design In case there is no support plate In case there is a support plate
standards External slab External slab
Yield
In case
strength In case there In case there Internal there is In case there
is no rim is a rim slab is a rim Internal slab
fy (MPa)
beam no rim beam
beam
beam
300 ln / 32 ln / 35 ln / 35 ln / 35 ln / 39 ln / 39
350 ln / 31 ln / 34 ln / 34 ln / 34 ln / 37.5 ln / 37.5
400 ln / 30 ln / 33 ln / 33 ln / 33 ln / 36 ln / 36
(1) In case of the slab that has no support plate according to 0510.3.3: 120mm
(2) In case of the slab that has a support plate according to 0510.3.3:100mm
0504.3.2.3 The minimum thickness according to the ratio of strength
When the beam whose ratio of the strength of a beam, αm, exceeds is around a slab, the
minimum thickness of the slab should follow the following specifications.
(1) When the ratio of strength, αm, is greater than 0.2 and less than 2.0, it should be
greater than the value of the following formula (0504.3.5) and also it should be greater
than 120mm.
(2) When the ratio of strength, αm, is greater than 2.0, it should be greater than the value
of the formula (0504.3.6) and also it should be greater than 90mm.
(3) For the slab with a discontinuous end, the rim beam whose ratio of strength, 0, is
greater than 0.8 should be installed or the minimum thickness obtained from the
formulas, (0504.3.5) and (0504.3.6) should be increased greater than 10%.
0504.3.2.4 Exceptional information on the minimum thickness
When it is identified by calculation that deflection does not exceed the value specified in
<Table 0504.3.1.6> according to the specifications of 0504.3.2.1, the slab of the
thickness that is less than the minimum required thickness specified form the above
0504.3.2.1 to 0504.3.2.3 can be used. At that time, the size, the shape, and the support
conditions of a panel and the status of restriction of the end of a panel should be
considered.
0504.3.3 Prestressed concrete structures
(1) The instant deflection of the bending member designed according to the specifications
of 0509 should be calculated with the interpretation method of general deflection or the
formula of elastic deflection. At that time, the cross-sectional area of non-crack specified
in 0509.2.2.3 can use the second moment of the cross-sectional area, Ig, of the entire
cross-sectional area of concrete.
(2) The deflection of the cross-sectional area of crack and the cross-sectional area of
partial crack specified in 0509.2.2.3 should be calculated by applying the 2nd moment of
an effective cross-sectional area, Ie, according to the formula (0504.3.1) or the
relationship between moment and deflection formed as two straight lines in the basis of
the interpretation of the cross-sectional area of crack conversion.
(3) The additional long-term deflection of prestressed concrete members should be
calculated in consideration of the stress of concrete and rebars under continuous load and
the effect of the relaxation of the tensile rebars, the creep of concrete, and shrinkage.
(4) The deflection calculated according to the above 0504.3.3.1 and 0504.3.3.2 should not
exceed the limited values specified in <Table0504.3. 1.6> and 0504.3.1.7.
0504.3.4 Combined structures
(1) When the deflection for the case, in which combined bending members are supported
by the temporary props and become one body before dead load works, is calculated, the
combined members are considered to be equal to the members formed as one body. In
case of the non-prestressed members, it should be determined whether the part of
concrete receiving the compression of members will be applied to general concrete or
lightweight concrete of <Table 0504.3.1.1>. When deflection is calculated, the effect of
lateral creep should be considered in case of the curvature caused by the difference of
shrinkage between the precast part and on-site pouring and a member of prestressed
concrete.
(2) In case of the structures with no temporary prop installed, there will be no need to
calculate deflection if the thickness of the non-prestressed precast bending member is
greater than the value specified in <Table 0504.3.1.1>. If the thickness of the combined
member without prestress meets the specifications of <Table 0504.3.1.1>, there will be
no need to calculate the deflection caused after the combination of members, but the
long-term deflection of the precast members should be reviewed for the magnitude and
duration time of the load before the effect of combination appears.
(3) The deflection calculated according to (1) and (2) should not exceed the limited
values specified in <Table 0504.3.1.6> and 0504.3.1.7.
0504.4 Fatigue
0504.4.1 Range of application
(1) This specification should be applied to the case where the safety of fatigue needs to be
reviewed because the percentage of the variable part of the load or its acting frequency is
high.
(2) Fatigue of beams and slabs should be reviewed according to bending and shear.
(3) Fatigue of columns does not need to be reviewed. However, if the effect of bending
moment or axial tensile strength are particularly high, reviewal should be conducted in
the basis of a beam.
0504.4.2 Investigation on fatigue
(1) If the stress range of rebars by the active load used including impact and the tensile
stress range of tensile materials are within the stress range of <Table 0504.4.1> when the
safety of fatigue is reviewed, there will be no need to review fatigue.
<Table 0504.4.1>The stress range of tensile materials and rebars, (MPa), whose fatigue does not need to
to be considered
Type and location of structural Tensile and compressive stress range or
steels the range of variation of tensile stress of tensile materials
SD 30 130
Deformed
SD 35 140
rebars
SD 40 150
Prestressing Joints or
140
tensile settled parts
160
materials other parts
(2) If the stress of rebars caused by repeated load exceeds the value of <Table 0504.4.1>
and needs to be reviewed, the safety of fatigue should be investigated in a reasonable
way.
(3) In the structural members that need the reviewal on fatigue, the rebars should not be
bent at the part receiving high stress.
0504.5 Design of durability
0504.5.1 General information on design
(1) Concrete structures should be designed, constructed, and maintained to have safety,
usage, good appearance, and durability against the given ambient environments during
the period of design and use.
(2) The owner of structures and the designer should determine the importance of
structures, environmental requirements, structural behavior, and method of management
and maintenance before the start-up of design.
0504.5.2 The criteria of design for durability
(1) The concrete meeting the requirements in 0504.5.3 should be used for the concrete to
be exposed to sea wind, sea water, sulfides, and other hazardous materials.
(2) The designer shall decide to use appropriate design methods to ensure the durability
of the structure.
(3) In the early design stage, it shall avoid using structure bracing which is sensitive to
the exposures, and the structure configuration adopted shall be easily reached for
maintenance work and inspection.
(4) Guarantee the quality of concrete that are on the exterior surface of structure or
members. Use concrete properly cured, with high density and strength as well as low
permeability to ensure the covering deepth.
(5) Structural details of structural elements of reinforced concrete and prestressed
concrete shall be proper in order to ensure the soundness of corners or connection of
member.
(6) Surface of structures that exposed to severe corrosion conditions shall be protected
and it requires improved duribility.
(7) The designer should review all the specifications about concrete material, covering
deepth, tendon, deflection, fracture, fatigue and other items, which relate to duribility.
0504.5.3 Applicable standards of duribility
(1) Normal weight and light weight concrete exposed to freezing, thawing or deicing
chemicals shall be air-entrained with air content indicated in Table 0504.5.3.1. Tolerance
on air content as delivered shall be ±1.5%. For specified compressive strength greater than
35Mpa, reduction of air content indicated in Table 0504.5.3.1 by 1% shall be permitted.
Table 0504.5.3.1 Total air content for frost-resistant concrete
Nominal maximum Air content (%)

aggregate size (mm) Severe exposure1) Moderate exposure2)
10.0 7.5 6.0
15.0 7.0 5.5
20.0 6.0 5.0
25.0 6.0 4.5
40.0 5.5 4.5
1) A severe exposure is where the concrete in a cold climate may be in
almost continuous contact with moisture, or where deicing salts asre
used.
2) A moderate exposure is where the concrete will be only occasionally
exposed to moisture, and no deicing salts are used.
(2) Concrete exposed to freezing and thawing in watertight concrete or moist condition
shall conEq. to the corresponding requirements of Table 0504.5.3.2. In addition, concrete
that will be exposed to deicing chemicals shall also conEq. to the limitations of Table
0504.5.3.6.
Table 0504.5.3.2 Requirements for special exposure conditions
Normalweight
aggregate
Minimum strength fck of
concrete
design standard, normalweight
Exposure condition Maximum
and lightweight aggregate
water-
concrete,(MPa)
cementitious
materials ratio
Concrete intended to have low permeability
0.50 27
when exposed to water
Freezing and thawing In a moist condition or
deicing chemicals to which concrete will be 0.45 30
exposed
Corrosion protection of reinforcement in
concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, salts, salt 0.40 35
water, seawater, or spray from these sources.
1) When both Table 0504.5.3.2 and Table 0504.5.3.3 are considered, the more stringent
applicable standards in the two tables shall be used.
(3) Concrete to be exposed to sulfate-containing solutions shall conEq. to requirements
of Table 0504.5.3.3 or concrete shall be made with sulfate resistance and shall use
concrete that has a maximum water-cement materials ratio and minimum compressive
strength from Table 0504.5.3.3. However, calcium chloride as an admixture shall not be
used in concrete to be exposed to severe sulfate-containing solutions, as defined in Table
0504.5.3.3.
Table 0504.5.3.3 Requirements for concrete exposed to sulfate-containning solutions
Water- Minimum strength of
Water soluble cementitious design standards fck
Sulfate Sulfate(SO4)
sulfate in soil materials ratio (MPa)
exposure in (Blended) Cement type
sulfate(SO4) by Normal weight Normal weight and
extent water(ppm)
weight (%) aggregate lightweight aggregate
1)
concrete concrete1)
Negligible 0.0~0.1 0 ~150 – – –
normal Portland cement
type) + pozzolan3)
fly ash cement(KS L 5211)
Moderate2) 0.1 ~ 0.2 150~ 1,500 moderate heat Portland 0.5 27
cement (2 types)(KS L 5201)
blast furnace slag cement(KS
L 5210)
1,500 ~ 10,0 sulfate resistant Portland
Severe 0.20 ~ 2.0 0.45 30
00 cement (KS L 5201)
sulfate resistant Portland
10,000
Very severe More than 2.0 cement(5 types)(KS L 5201) 0.45 30
More than
+ pozzolan4)
1) For corrosion protection when exposed to freezing, thawing or materials, and for lower permeability, the lower
water-cementitious materials ratio and higher strength shall be used.
2) Seawater
3) When concrete containing 1type of cement is used to improve sulfate resistance pozzolan has been determined by
test or service record.
4) Pozzolan that has been determined by test or service record to improve sulfate resistance when used in concrete
containing 5 type of cement.
(4) For corrosion protection of reinforcement in concrete, the maximum soluble chloride
ion content in non-hardening concrete shall not exceed the limits of 0.30kg/m3. But with
the approval of responsible designer, the limits of 0.60kg/m3 shall also be permitted.
However for the total soluble chloride content in hardening concrete, which is determined
by the soluble chloride ion concentration, the maximum water soluble chloride ion
concentration in hardened concrete at ages more than 28 days shall conEq. to the limits
indicated in Table 0504.5.3.4.
Table 0504.5.3.4 Maximum percentage of chloride ion content for
corrosion protection of reinforcement
In concrete, the maximum water soluble
Type of member chloride ion(C l–),
percent by weight of cement(%)
Prestressed concrete 0.06
Exposed to chloride
0.15
Reinforced concrete
In dry condition or
moisture
1.00
the reinforced concrete will be
protected from moisture"
Other reinforced concrete 0.30
1) The construction concrete that will not be exposed to the exterior dry
air condition but will be protected in dry from moisture.
(5) For reinforced concrete exposed to chloride ion from deicing salt, salinity, salt water
with lower concentration, seawater and etc, or spray from these sources, the maximum
water-cement materials ratio and concrete compressive strength requirements in Table
0504.5.3.2 and the least stringent covering depth requirements in Article 0505.4 should be
comEq. ed.
(6) For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, weight percentage of required blending
materials shall conEq. to the requirements given in Table 0504.5.3.6.
Table 0504.5.3.6 Maximum percentage of blending materials for
concrete exposed to deicing chemicals
Maximum percent of total
Cementitious materials cementitious materials by
weight(%)
Fly ash or other pozzolans conEq.ing
25
to KS L 5405
Slag from blast furnace conEq.ing to
50
KS F 2563
Silica fume 10
Total of fly ash or other pozzolans,
501)
slag, and silica fume
Total of fly ash or other pozzolans
351)
and silica fume
1) Fly ash or other pozzolans shall constitute no more than 25%, and
silica fume no more than 10%.
0504.6 Repair, Strengthening and Maintenance Management

0504.6.1 General requirements of design
(1) Maintenance work are required during the service life of concrete structure
construction exposed to certain environment in order to ensure the safety, service ability,
durability, and fine appearance. Inspect the completed concrete structure construction on a
regular basis and ensure that it functions well as usual through repair or maintenance work
if necessary. Maintenance shall be done to provide occupants convenience and safety.
(2) When crack appears in structure and its reason and hazard are required to be
considered, follow crack related requirements and consider all sorts of measures.
(3) Evaluation on the load carrying capacity of the existed structure shall follow
requirements in 0520.
(4) The safety diagnose and repair & maintenance design for monitoring the strucsture
safety shall follow the directions of responsible designer.
0504.6.2 Design of repair & maintenance
(1) Repairing damaged concrete structure so as to make it function well shall be based on
appropriate repair design.
(2) Repairing or improving the load carrying capacity of existed structure shall be based
on the appropriate strengthening design.
(3) When carrying out repair & strengthening design, analyzing the structure to find out
damage reason, extent, resistance force extent, and decide environment condition, which
the structure is exposed to, the load state, resisting force, scope and scale of repair &
strengthening work; select the materials then design the cross section and members; check
and take appropriate construction measures.
(4) When doing the strengthening design, improvement of service ability, durability and
other perEq.ance shall also be considered besides structure resisting force improvement.
(5) The responsible technicians shall control and recheck the quality according to
different constructions to ensure the quality of repair & strengthening work.
0505 Detail of reinforcement
0505.1 Scope applied
(1) Specifications in 0505 are applicable for reinforcing steel, fabrication & matching
details of welding wire fabric, and matching of tendon & conduit of reinforced concrete,
prestressed concrete members.
(2) The 0505 specification is also applicable to the strengthening work about covering
depth, drying shrinkage, and temperature fluctuation of reinforcing steel.
0505.2 Fabrication of reinforcing steel.
0505.2.1 Standard hooks
(1) There are two types of standard hooks as follows, one is 180º bend and 90° bend
hooks. Each type of standard hooks shall conEq. to the following specifications.
180° bend standard hook is 180-degree bend plus 4 db extension, or 60mm at free end
of bar.
90° bend standard hook is 90-degree bend plus 12 db extension at free end of bar.
(2) Stirrup and tie standard hooks can be divided into 90°and 135°standard hooks, which
are fabricated as follows.
90°standard hooks
(A) D16 bar and smaller, 90-deg bend plus 6 db extension at free end of bar.
(B) D19，D22 and D25 bar, 90-deg bend plus 12 db extension at free end of bar.
135° standard hooks

D25 bar and the smaller, 135-deg bend plus 6 db extension at free end of bar.
0505.2.2 Minimum inside bend semi-diameters
(1) The minimum bend semi-diameters of 180° and 90° standard hooks measured on the
inside of the bar shall not be less than the values in Table 0505.2.2.1.
Table 0505.2.2.1 Minimum inside semi-diameters of bend
Bar size Minimum semi-diameter

D10 ~ D25 3 db
D29 ~ D35 4 db
D38 larger than 5 db
(2) Inside semi-diameter of bend for stirrups and ties shall conEq. to the following
requirements.
Inside semi-diameter of bend for stirrups and ties shall not be less than 2 db for D16
bar and smaller.
For bars larger than D19, the semi-diameter of bend for stirrups and ties shall be in
accordance with Table 0505.2.2.1.
(3) Inside semi-diameter of bend in welded wire fabric (plain or deEq.ed) for stirrups and
ties shall not be less than 2 db for deEq.ed wire larger than diameter of 7mm and 1 db for
all other wires. Besides, bends with inside semi-diameter of less than 4 db shall not be less
than 4 db from nearest welded intersection.
(4) The inside semi-diameter of bar except standard hooks shall not less than the values
indicated in Table 0505.2.2.1. However, the inside semi-diameter can be larger in which
stress concentrates at hook bar, to prevent the concrete inside from crushing.
0505.2.3 Reinforcement bending

(1) All reinforcement shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the engineer.
(2) Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent. Except as
shown on the design drawings or permitted by the engineer
reinforcement embedded in concrete can be field bent.
0505.2.4 Surface conditions of reinforcement
(1) At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free from mud, oil, or other
nonmetallic coatings that decrease bond. Epoxy coating of steel reinforcement in
0502.2.3.5 shall be permitted.
(2) Except for prestressed steel, steel reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a
combination of both shall not be necessarily removed, provided the minimum dimensions
and weight comply with specifications referenced in KS D 3504.
(3) Prestressed steel shall be clean and free of oil, dirt, milling scale, pitting and
excessive rust. However, a light coating of rust shall be permitted.
0505.3 Placing reinforcement
0505.3.1 Placing principle
(1) Reinforcement, tendons and post-tensioning ducts shall be accurately placed and
adequately supported against displacement before concrete is placed with construction
work moving on smoothly. In that case, the displacement tolerances shall be within the
range in Table 0505.3.1.1.
Table 0505.3.1.1 Tolerance
Tolerance for Mininum concrete

depth(d) covering depth
d ≤ 200mm ±10mm ― 10mm
d > 200mm ±13mm ― 13mm
1) Except that tolerance for the clear distance to Eq.ed soffits shall be 一7mm, and
tolerance for covering depth
shall be 一1/3 the minimum concrete covering depth required in the design drawings or
specifications.
(2) Welding of crossing rebars shall not be permitted for assembly of reinforcement.
However, with the approval of the engineer, welding is permitted.
(3) Reinforcement, tendons, and post-tensioning ducts shall be placed within the
tolerances in Table 0505.3.1.1. However, it can exceed the tolerances if specified by
engineer.
Tolerance for depth d, and minimum concrete covering depth in flexural members,
walls and compression members shall be as Table 0505.3.1.1.
Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement shall be
±50mm. Except the tolerance shall be ±13mm at the discontinuous ends of brackets and
corbels, and ±25mm at the discontinuous ends of other members. Besides, the tolerance
for minimum concrete covering depth of 0505.3.1.1(1) shall also apply at discontinuous
ends of members.
For reinforcement placing tolerance exceeding 1 db than design drawings placement,
the approval from responsible engineer is necessary.
(4) Welded wire fabric, with diameter or wire size not greated than 6.4mm, used in slabs
not exceeding 3.0m in span shall be permitted to be curved from a point near the top of
slab to a point near the bottom of slab at midspan, provided such reinforcement is either
continuous over, or securely anchored at support.
0505.3.2 Spacing limits
(1) The clear spacing between parallel rebars in a layer shall be more than 25mm and not
less than the nominal diameter of reinforcement and aslo, shall be in accordance with
0502.2.1.2(4).
(2) Where parallel reinforcement is placed in more than two layers, rebars in the upper
layers shall be placed directly above rebars in the bottom layer with clear distance
between layers not less than 25mm.
(3) In spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compressive members, clear distance between
longitudinal rebars shall be not less than 1.5 times of nominal diameter and shall be in
accordance with specifications in 0502.2.1.2 (4).
(4) Clear distance limitation between rebars shall apply also to the clear distance between
a contact lap splice and adjacent splices or rebars.
(5) In walls and slabs, the spacing between flexural reinforcement shall be no more than
3 times the wall or slab thickness, nor more than 450mm. But it is not applicable in
concrete joist construction.
(6) Bundled rebars shall conEq. to the following requirements.
When more than 2 rebars are bundled in contact to act as a deEq.ed rebar, bars bundled
shall be limited to 4 in any one bundle.
Individual rebars within a bundle terminated within the span of flexural members shall
terminated at different points with at least 40 db stagger.
Where spacing and minimum concrete cover are based on bar diameter, a unit of
bundled rebars
shall be treated as a single rebar of a diameter derived from the equivalent total area.
Rebars larger than D35 shall not be bundled in beams.
(7) Tendons and ducts shall be in accordance with the following requirements.
Center-to-center spacing of pretensioned tendons at each end of a member shall be not
less than 5 db for wire, or 4 db for strands. But if concrete strength at transfer of prestress is
28MPa or more, the minimum center-to-center spacing of strands shall be 45mm for
strands of 13mm nominal diameter and 50mm for strands of 15mm nominal diameter.
Besides, it shall also be in accordance with specifications in 0502.2.1.2 (4) Vertical
spacing closer than that in ends of member, and bundling of tendons shall be permitted in
the middle portion of a span.
Bundling of post-tensioning ducts shall be permitted when concrete is placed without
any support, and measures are made to prevent the tendon from breaking through the duct.
505.4 The minimum concrete covering
0505.4.1 Cast-in-place concrete
(1) Concrete staging underwater 100mm
(2) Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 80mm
(3) Concrete exposed to earth or weather
Rebars greater than D29 60mm
Rebars smaller than D25 50mm
Rebars smaller than D16，steel wire with diameter of 16mm and smaller 40mm
(4) Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground

Slabs, walls, joists
(A) Rebars greater than D35 40mm
(B) Rebars smaller than D35 20mm
Beams, columns 40mm
If concrete design strength fck is more than 40Mpa, the thickness
can be reduced by 10mm.
Shells, folded plate members 20mm
0505.4.2 Precast concrete
0505.4.2.1 Concrete exposed to earth or weather
(1) Wall panels
Rebars larger than D35, prestressed tendons larger than 40mm diameter 40mm
Rebars smaller than D35, prestressed tendons 40mm diameter and smaller, wire 16mm
diameter and smaller 20mm
(2) Other members
Bars larger than D35, prestressed tendons larger than 40mm diameter 50mm
D19 through D35 bars, prestressed tendons larger than 16mm diameter through 40mm
diameter 40mm
D16 bar and smaller, prestressed tendons 16mm diameter and smaller 30mm
0505.4.2.2 Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground
(1) Slabs, walls, joists
Rebars larger than D35, prestressed tendons 40mm diameter and larger 30mm
Rebars smaller than D35, prestressed tendons 40mm diameter and smaller 20mm
Wire 16mm diameter and smaller 15mm
(2) Beams, columns
Primary reinforcement db
However, diameter shall be more than 15mm and need not exceed 40mm.
Ties, stirrups,spirals 10mm
(3) Shells, folded plate members
Prestressed tendons 20mm
Rebars larger than D19 15mm
Rebars smaller than D16, wire 16mm diameter and smaller 10mm
0505.4.3 Prestressed concrete
0505.4.3.1 Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 80mm
0505.4.3.2 Concrete exposed to earth or weather
(1) Wall panels, slabs, joists 30mm
(2) Other members 40mm
0505.4.3.3 Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground
(1) Slabs, walls, joists 20mm
(2) Beams, columns
Primary reinforcement 40mm
Ties, stirrups, spirals 30mm
(3) Shell, folded plate members
Rebars larger than D19 db
But shall be larger than 20mm.
Rebars smaller than D16, wire 16mm diameter and smaller 10mm
(4) For prestressed concrete members exposed to earth or weather, and to which defined
in 0509.2.2.3, some cracks or full of cracks appearing on cross sections, the minimum
concrete cover shall be increased 50%. However, the minimum cover need not be
increased if the precompressed tensile zone is in tension under sustained loads.
(5) Among members of prestressed concrete manufactured under conditions equivalent to
the plant products manufacturing condition, the minimum concrete cover of reinforcement
without prestress shall conEq. to specifications in 0505.4.2.
0505.4.4 Bundled rebars
For bundled rebars, Minimum concrete cover shall be equal to equivalent diameter of the
bundle. But need not be greater than 60mm. Except for concrete cast against and
permanently exposed to earth, where minimum cover shall be 80mm, and 100mm for
concrete staging underwater.
0505.4.5 Concrete and reinforcement exposed to special environments
(1) For concrete exposed to the following environments, the concrete cover shall be
increased as specifications in 0505.4.5(2)11.
Structure exposed to the environment that requires high durability
Structures located within 250m from coast exposed to the weather corrupt by salt
damage without carrying out surface preparation.
Structure exposed to severe corrosion or chemistry because of residue and etc.
(2) For environment defined in (1), the concrete cover shall be not less than the following
values.
Cast-in-place concrete
(A) Walls using rebars smaller than D16, slabs 50mm all members except members in
(B) (A) 80mm
Precast concrete
(A) Wall, slab 40mm
(B) other members 50mm
For prestressed concrete members exposed to environment which defined in
0509.2.2.(3), some cracks or full of cracks appearing on cross sections, the minimum
concrete cover shall be increased 50% than minimum concrete cover specified in
0505.4.3. However, the minimum cover need not be increased if the precompressed tensile
zone is in tension under sustained loads.
(3) Flame temperature, fire duration, the character of aggregates used, and etc shall be
considered to structure cover for fire protection. If concrete cover larger than cover
specified in 0505.4 is required, the value of cover shall be increased.
0505.5 Lateral reinforcement for members
0505.5.1 Lateral reinforcement for flexural members
(1) Compressive reinforcement in beams shall be enclosed by ties or stirrups or by
welded wire fabric of equivalent area. The size and spacing of ties and stirrups shall
conEq. to limitations in 0505.5.2.3. Besides, such ties or stirrups shall be provided
throught the distance where compressive reinforcement is required.
(2) Lateral reinforcement for flexuralmembers subject to stress reversals or to torsion at
bottom supports shall consist of closed ties, closed stirrups, or spirals extending around the
flexural reinforcement.
(3) Closed ties or stirrups shall be Eq.ed in one piece by overlapping standard stirrup or
tie end hooks around a longitudinal bar, or Eq.ed in one or two pieces lap spliced with a
Class B(lap of 1.3ld) in 0508.6.2.(1) or anchored in accordance with 0508.5.4.
0505.5.2 Lateral reinforcement for compressive members
0505.5.2.1 Lateral reinforcement
Lateral reinforcements for different compressive members shall conEq. to the following
specifications.
(1) Lateral reinforcement for compressive members shall conEq. to the provisions of
0505.5.2.2 and 0505.5.2.3, and where shear or torsion reinforcement is required, shall also
conEq. to provisions of 0507.
(2) Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite compressive members shall conEq.
to 0517.4.
(3) Lateral reinforcement requirements for tendons shall conEq. to 0509.7.
(4) The lateral reinforcement requirements of 0505.5.2, 0509.7 and 0517.4, cannot be
applicable when tests and structural analysis show adequate strength exists even without
the lateral reinforcement in compressive members.
0505.5.2.2 Spiral reinforcement
Sprial reinforcement for compressive members shall conEq. to the following.
(1) Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous rebar or wire to such size and be
assembled to permit handling and placing without distortion from designed dimensions.
(2) Spiral reinforcement ratio Ps shall comEq. to 0506.4.2.3.
(3) For cast-in-place construction, size of spirals shall not be less than 10mm diameter.
(4) Clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed 75mm, nor less than 25mm.
(5) Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1.5 extra turns of spiral bar at
each end of spiral.
(6) Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by deEq.ed rebar or wire if the lap splices is
more than 48 db, or if greater than 72 db or 300mm, mechanical or welded splices in
accordance with 0508.6.1 (3) shall be used.
(7) Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab in any story to level of lowest
horizontal reinforcement in members supported above.
(8) Where beams or brackets do not frame into all sides of a column, ties shall extend
above termination of spiral to bottom of slab, or drop panel.
(9) In columns with capitals, sprials shall extend to a level at which the diameter or width
of capital is 2 times that of the column.
(10) Spirals shall be held firmly in place and turn to line.
0505.5.2.3 Ties
Tie reinforcement for compressive members shall conEq. to the following.
(1) All nonprestressed bars shall be enclosed by lateral ties, at least D32 in size for
longitudinal bars D10 or smaller,
and at least D35 in size and bundled longitudinal rebars D13. DeEq.ed wire of welded
reinforcement of equivalent area shall be permitted.
(2) Vertical spacing of ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar or
wire diameter, or least dimension of the compressive member.
(3) Tie shall be arranged such that every corner and alternate longitudinal bar shall have
lateral support provided by the corner of a tie with an included angle of not more than
135°. And no bar shall be farther than 150mm clear on each side along the tie from such a
laterally supported bar. Where longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter of a
circle, a complete circular tie shall be permitted.
(4) Ties shall be located vertically not more than 1/2 a tie spacing above the top of footing
or slab in any story, and shall be spaced as provided herein to not more than 1/2 a tie
spacing below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in slab, drop panel, or shear cap above.
(5) Where beams or brackets frame from 4direction into a column, termination of ties not
more than75mm below lowest reinforcement in shallowest of such beams or brackets shall
be permitted.
(6) Where anchor bolts are placed in the top of columns or pedestals, the bolts shall be
enclosed by lateral reinforcement that also surrounds at least four vertical bars of the
column or pedestal. The lateral reinforcement shall be distributed within 125mm of the top
of the column or pedestal, and shall consist of at least 2 D13 bars.
0505.6 Special reinforcement details for columns and connection
0505.6.1 Offset bent bars
(1) According to column connection with variable cross section dimension, offset bent
bars shall be placed as follows.
(2) Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with axis of column shall not exceed 1/6.
(3) Portions of rebar above and below an offset bar shall be parallel to axis of column.
(4) Horizontal support at offset bends shall be provided by lateral ties, spirals, or the floor
construction. In that case, horizontal support provided shall be designed to resist 1.5 times
the horizontal component of the force in the bending portion of a offset bar. Lateral ties or
spirals, if used, shall be placed not more than 150mm.
from points of bend.
(5) Offset rebars shall be bent before placement in the mold Eq.s.
(6) In the connection of columns, where a column face is offset 75mm or greater,
longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent. In that case, use separate connection bars lap
spliced with the longitudinal rebars to the offset column, and the lap splices shall conEq.
to 0508.8.
0505.6.2 Steel cores
(1) Ends of steel cores in composite compression members shall be accurately finished to
bear at end bearing splices, with center in alignment and concentric contact.
(2) At end bearing splices, bearing shall be considered effective to transfer not more than
50% of the total compressive stress in the steel core.
(3) Transfer of stress between column base and footing shall be designed in accordance
with 0512.4.
(4) Base of steel section shall be designed to transfer the total load from the composite
member to the footing. However, the base shall be designed to transfer the load from the
steel core only, provided ample concrete section is available for transfer of the portion of
the total load carried by the reinforced concrete section.
0505.6.3 Connections
(1) At connections of principal framing elements such as beams and columns, enclosure
shall be provided for splices of continuing reinforcement and for anchorage of
reinforcement terminating in such connections.
(2) Enclosure at connections shall consist of external concrete or internal closed ties,
spirals, or stirrups.
0505.7 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
(1) Reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses normal to flexural
reinforcement shall be provided in slabs where the flexural reinforcement extends in 1
direction only.
(2) Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with either
0505.7.2 or 0505.7.3.
(3) The minimum value specified in 0505.7.2 applicable for the situation, where
distortion caused by shall be increased and consider the composite load defined in
0503.3.2 drying shrinkage and temperature movements are not significantly restrained
which is about members significantly restrained.
0505.7.2 1 Reinforcement extending in one direction in structural slabs
(1) DeEq.ed reinforcement used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with the following, but in curtain situation, it shall not less than
0.0014. Where, ratios of shrinkage and temperature is reinforcement area to gross concrete
area.
For yield strength of design standard less than 400MPa deEq.ed rebars are used 0.0020
Slabs where reinforcement with yield stress exceeding 400Mpa measured at a yield
strain of 0.0035 is used. 0. 0020× 400
fy
(2) However, the reinforcement ratio of shrinkage and temperature specified in 0505.7.2.1
multiply gross concrete section area, then the value shall not need to be greater than 1800
mm2.
(3) Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart than 5
times the slab thickness, nor farther apart than 450m.
(4) Reinforcement to resist shrinkage and temperature stresses shall develop yield
strength of design standard fy in tension.
0505.7.3 Prestressed concrete slab in 1 direction
(1) Tendons used fro shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be provided in
accordance with the following (2) and (3).
(2) Tendons shall be proportioned to provide a minimum average compressive stress of
0.7MPa on gross concrete area using effective prestress and spacing of tendons shall not
exceed 1.8m.
(3) When spacing of tendons exceeds1.3m, additional shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement conEq.ing to 0505.7.2 shall be provided. The additional reinforcement shall
be provided between the tendons extending from the slab edge to the inside of slab at a
distance equal to the tendon spacing.
0505.8 Requirements for structural integrity
0505.8.1 Cast-in-place construction
(1) In joist construction, at least one bottom bar shall be continuous or shall be spliced
with a Class A tension splice or a mechanical or welded splice satisfying 0508.6.1(3) and
at non-continuous supports shall be terminated with a standard hook.
(2) Beams along the perimeter of the structure shall have continuous reinforcement
consisting of the following elements.
a at least 1/6 of the tension reinforcement required for negative moment at the support,
but not less than 2 rebars
b at least1/4 of the tension reinforcement required for positive moment at midspan, but
not less than 2 rebars
(3) As required in (2) the continuous reinforcement shall be enclosed by the corners of
U-stirrups with not less than135° standard hooks around the continuous top rebars, or by
one piece closed stirrups with not less than 135°,hooks around one of the continuous top
rebars. Stirrups need not be extended through any joint.
(4) Where splices are needed to provide the required continuity, the top reinforcement
shall be spliced at or near midspan and bottom reinforcement shall be spliced at or near
the support. Splices shall be Class A tension splices or mechanical or welded splices
satisfying (3).
(5) In other than perimeter beams, when stirrups as defined in (3) are not provided, at
least 1/4 of the positive moment reinforcement required at midspan, but not less than two
bars, shall be continuous or shall be spliced over or near the support with a Class A
tension splice or a mechanical or welded splice satisfying 0508.6.1(3), and at
noncontinuous supports shall be terminated with a standard hook.
(6) For two-way slab construction, conEq. to 0510.6.4.(5).
0505.8.2 Precast concrete construction
(1) For precast concrete construction, tension ties shall be provided in the transverse,
longitudinal, and vertical directions and around the perimeter of the structure to effectively
tie elements together. Besides, the provisions of 0516.3.1 shall apply.
(2) For lift-slab construction, see 0510.6.4(6)
0506 Flexural and axial loads
0506.1 General (1) Provisions of the section shall apply for design of members subject to
flexural or axial loads or to combined flexural and axial loads.
(2) Provisions of the section shall apply for the calculation of flexural and axial loads and
strength of member ends.
(3) The calculation of shear force and torsion moment shall conEq. to provisions of 0507.
0506.2 General requirements of design
0506.2.1 Design assumptions
(1) Strength design of members for flexural and axial loads shall be based on
assumptions given in (2) through (7), and on satisfaction of applicable conditions of
equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
(2) Strain in reinforcement and concrete shall be assumed directly proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis. But for deep beams as defined in 0506.3.4, an analysis that
considers a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be used. For deep beams design, it shall
be permitted to use a strut-and-tie model instead of a nonlinear distribution of strain.
(3) Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compressive fiber shall be assumed equal
to 0.003.
(4) Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength fy for grade of reinforcement
used shall be taken as Es times steel strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to fy
stress in reinforcement shall be considered independent of strain and equal to fy.
(5) Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in axial and flexural calculation of
reinforced concrete, except when meeting situation equivalent to that specified in
0509.3.1.
(6) The relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete strain
shall be assumed to be rectangular,trapezoidal, parabolic,or any other shape that results in
prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
(7) Requirements of (6) are satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete stress
distribution defined by the following.
Concrete stress of 0.85 fck shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent
compression zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a= β1c from the fiber of maximum compressive
strain.
Distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be measured in a
direction perpendicular to that axis.
Factor β1 shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths up to and including 28Mpa. For
strength above 28Mpa, β1 shall be reduced continuously at a rate of 0.007 for each 1Mpa
of strength in excess of 28Mpa. But it shall not be taken less than 0.65.
0506.2.2 General principles
(1) Design of cross sections subject to flexural or axial loads, or to combined flexural and
axial loads, shall be based on stress and strain equilibrium and compatibility using
assumptions in 0506.2.1
(2) Balanced strain condition exists at a cross section when tension reinforcement reaches
the strain corresponding to its specified yield strength fy just as concrete in compression
reaches its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.
(3) Sections are compression-controlled when the net tensile strain εt in the extreme
tension steel is equal to or less than the compression-controlled strain limit at the time the
concrete in compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003. The compression-
controlled strain limit is the net tensile strain in the reinforcement at balanced strain
conditions. For, reinforcement with resisting strength of 400Mpa, and for prestressed
reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the compression-controlled strain limit equal to
0.002.
(4) Sections are tension-controlled when the net tensile strain εt in the extreme tension
steel is equal to or greater than 0.005 just as the concrete in compression reaches its
assumed strain limit of 0.003. For reinforcement with resisting strength exceeds 400Mpa,
tension-controlled strain limit ratio is 2.5 times the reforcement resisting strength. Sections
with net tensile strain εt in the extreme tension steel between the compression-controlled
strain limit and tension-controlled strain limit constitute a transition region.
(5) For nonprestressed flexural members and nonprestressed members with axial load
less than 0.10fckA g, the net tensile strain εt at nominal strength shall not be less than the
minimum applicable strain limit. The applicable strain limit of flexural members shall be
0.004 when the resisting strength of reinforcement is not less than 400Mpa, while it shall
be twice when the resisting strength exceeds 400Mpa.
(6) Use of compressive reinforcement shall be permitted in conjunction with additional
tensile reinforcement to increase the strength of flexural members.
(7) Design axial load strength φPn of compressive members shall not exceed the
following.
For nonprestressed members with spiral reinforcement specified in 0505.5.2.2 shall
conEq. to the Eq. (0506.2.1).
φ Pn(max)＝0.85φ [0.85f ck(A g－A st)＋fy A st] (0506.2.1)
For nonprestressed members with tie reinforcement specified in 0505.5.2.3 shall
conEq. to the Eq. (0506.2.2).
φPn(max)＝0.80φ [0.85f ck(A g－A st)＋fy A st] (0506.2.2)
For prestressed members, design axial load strength φP
φPo Shall not be taken greater than 0.85 for members with spiral reinforcement, or 0.80 for
members with tie reinforcement of the design axial load strength at zero eccentricity.
(8) Members subject to compressive axial load shall be designed for the maximum
moment that can accompany the axial load. The factored axial load Pu at given eccentricity
shall not exceed that given in (7). The maximum factored moment Mu shall be magnified
for slenderness effects in accordance with 0506.5.
0506.3 Limit of flexural members design
0506.3.1 Distance between lateral supports of flexural members
(1) Spacing of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width of
compressive flange or face.
(2) Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining
spacing of lateral supports.
0506.3.2 Minimum reinforcement of flexural members
(1) At every section of a flexural member where tensile reinforcement is required by
analysis, except as provided in (2), (3) and (4), the area As provided shall not be less than
that given by Eq. 0506.3.1, and Eq. (0506.3.2).
(2) For statically determinate members with a flange in tension, the area As,min. shall be
equal to or greater than the value given by Eq. 0506.3.1 and Eq. (0506.3.2) with bw
replaced by either 2bw or b the width of the flange, which is smaller.

(3) The requirements of (1) and (2) need not be applied if at every section the area of
tensile reinforcement provided is at least 1/3 greater than that required by analysis.
(4) For structural slabs and footings of uniEq. thickness the minimum area of tensile
reinforcement in the direction of the span shall be the same as that required by 0505.7.
Maximum spacing of this reinforcement shall not exceed three times the thickness of slab
or footing, nor 450mm.
0506.3.3 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in beams and one-way slabs
(1) Slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction
This section of 0506.3.3 for distribution of flexural reinforcement shall be followed to
control flexural crack in beams and in one-way slabs.
(2) Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way slabs shall be as required by 0510.6.
(3) Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within maximum flexural
tension zones of a member cross section as required by (4).
(4) The spacing S of reinforcement closest to a surface in tension shall not exceed that
given by Eq. (0506.3.3) and Eq. (0506.3.4),whichever is smaller.
s= 375
( 210
f )
s
– 2 . 5c (0506.3.3)
c
s = 300
( 210
f )
s
(0506.3.4)
Here, cc is the minimum cover from the surface in tension reinforcement or tendon to the
surface of the concrete. Where is only one bar, s is the width of the tension face.
Calculated stress fs in reinforcement closest to the tension face at service load shall be
computed based on the unfactored moment. It shall be permitted to take fs as 2/3fy.
(5) Where flanges of T-beam construction are in tension, part of the flexural tensile
reinforcement shall be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in 0503.4.8, or
a width equal to 1/10 the span, which is smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds 1/10
the span, some longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided in the outer portions of the
flange.
(6) If the effective depth h of a beam or joist exceeds 900mm longitudinal skin
reinforcement shall be uniEq.ly distributed along both side faces of the member for a
distance h/2 nearest the flexural tension reinforcement. The spacing s shall be as provided in
0506.3.3(4), where cc is the least distance from the surface of the skin reinforcement or
prestressed steel to the side face. It shall be permitted to include such reinforcement in
strength computations if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine stress in the
individual rebars or wires.
0506.3.4 Design of deep beams

(1) Deep beams are members loaded on one face and supported on the opposite face so
that compressive struts can develop between the loads and the supports, and have either
or Deep beams shall be designed either taking into account nonlinear distribution of
strain, or by strut-and-tie model, and lateral buckling shall be considered.
Clear spans ln equal to or less than 4 times the overall member depth
Regions loaded with concentrated loads within twice the member depth from the face
of the support
(2) Shear strength of deep beams shall be in accordance with 0507.7.
(3) Minimum flexural tensile reinforcement shall conEq. to 0506.3.2.
(4) Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the side faces of deep beams shall
satisfy either 0507.8.1(1), 0507.8.1 (2) or requirements of strut-and-tie model.
0506.4 Limitation for compressive members
0506.4.1 Design dimensions for compressive members
(1) Limits of the effective cross section of a compressive member with two or more
interlocking spirals shall be taken at a distance outside the extreme limits of the spirals
equal to the minimum concrete cover required by 0505.4.
(2) Limits of the effective cross section of a spirally reinforced or tied reinforced
compressive member built monolithically with a concrete wall or pier shall be taken not
greater than 40mm outside the spiral or tie reinforcement.
(3) As an alternative to use the full gross section for design of a compressive member
with a square, octagonal, or other shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to use a
circular section with a diameter equal to the least lateral dimension of the actual shape.
Gross section considered, required percentage of reinforcement, and design strength shall
be based on that circular section.
(4) For a compressive member with a cross section larger than required by considerations
of loading, it shall be permitted to base the minimum reinforcement and strength on a
reduced effective area. The reduced effective area shall not less than1/2 of the total area.
0506.4.2 Limits for reinforcement of compressive members
(1) Area of longitudinal reinforcement for noncomposite compressive members shall be
not less than 0.01 nor more than 0.08 times gross area Ag of section. Maximum
reinforcement shall not exceed 0.04 for primary longitudinal rebars with lap spliced.
(2) Minimum number of longitudinal rebars in compressive members shall be 4 for rebars
within rectangular or circular ties, 3 for rebars within triangular ties, and 6 for rebars
enclosed by spirals conEq.ing to (3).
(3) Ratio of spiral reinforcement ρs shall be not less than the value given by the following
Eq.
where fyt is the specified yield strength of spiral reinforcement but not more than 700MPa.
When its more than 400MPa, there is no lap spliced according to 0505.5.2.2.
0506.5 Slenderness design of compressive members
0506.5.1 Slenderness effects in compressive members
(1) The design of compressive members shall be permitted to use the nonlinear second-
order analysis or an approximate design method based on the moment magnifier method
specified in 0506.5.2, 0506.5.3 and 0506.5.4.
(2) Except as allowed in (3), the design of compressive members, restraining beams, and
other supporting members shall be based on the factored forces and moments from a
second-order analysis considering material nonlinearity and cracking, as well as the
effects of member curvature and lateral drift, duration of the loads, shrinkage and creep,
and interaction with the supporting foundation.
(3) As an alternate to the procedure prescribed in (2), it shall be permitted to base the
design of compressive members, restraining beams, and other supporting members on
axial forces and moments from the analyses by approximate design method based on the
moment magnifier method specified in 0506.5.2, 0506.5.3 and 0506.5.4.
0506.5.2. General of magnified moments
0506.5.2.1 Section properties
The factored axial forces Pu’ the factored moments M1 and M2, at the ends of the column,
and the relative lateral story deflections Δo shall be computed using an elastic first-order
frame analysis with the section properties determined taking into account the influence of
axial loads, the presence of cracked regions along the length of the member,and effects of
duration of the load. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use the following properties for
the members in the structure.
(1) Modulus of elasticity Ec (0503.4.3.1)
(2) Moments of inertia
Beams 0.35Ig
Columns 0.70 Ig
Uncracked walls 0.70 Ig
Cracked walls 0.35 Ig
Flat plates and flat slabs 0.25 Ig
(3) Area 1.0 Ag
However, when sustained lateral loads act or stability checks been made according to
0506.5.4.6 the moments of inertia shall be divided by (1+βd).
0506.5.2.2 Radius of gyration
It shall be permitted to take the radius of gyration r equal to 0.30 times the overall
dimension in the direction stability is being considered for rectangular compressive
members and 0.25 times the diameter for circular compressive member. For other shapes,
it shall be permitted to compute the radius of gyration r for the gross concrete section.
0506.5.2.3 Unsupported length
The unsupported length of compressive members shall be based as follows.
(1) The unsupported length lu of a compressive member shall be taken as the clear
distance between floor, beams, or other members capable of providing lateral support in
the direction being considered.
(2) Where column capitals or haunches are present, the unsupported length shall be
measured to the lower extremity of the capital or haunch in the plane considered.
0506.5.2.4 Nonsway or sway
Columns and stories in structures shall be designated as nonsway or sway columns or
stories as follows. The design of columns in nonsway frames or stories shall be based on
0506.5.3. The design of columns in sway frames or stories shall be based on 0506.5.4.
(1) It shall be permitted to assume a column in a structure is nonsway if the increase in
column end moments due to second-order effects does not exceed 5% of the first-order
end moments.
(2) It shall be permitted to assume a story within a structure is nonsway if the stability
index is less than or equal to 0.05.
Where, ∑Pu and Vu are the total vertical load and the story shear, respectively. Andᅀ0 is
the first-order relative deflection between the top and the bottom of that story due to Vu.
0506.5.2.5 Slenderness ratio
Where an individual compressive member in the frame has a slenderness ratio klu/r of
more than 100, 0506.5.1.2 shall be used to compute the forces and moments in the frame.
0506.5.2.6 2 The moment about both axes
For compressive members subject to bending about both principal axes, the moment about
each axis shall be magnified separately based on the conditions of restraint corresponding
to that axis.
0506.5.2.7 Effective length factors
Effective length factors k is a function of the relative stiffness at each end of the
compressive member, and the effects of varying beam and column reinforcement
percentages and beam cracking should be considered. It can be computed by approximate
methods in (1) and (2).
(1) See figure 0506.5.2.7, compressive members with cross section having cracking, in
which k can be calculated in a multibay frame.
(2) The effective length factor can be calculated by the following methods.
For compressive members in nonsway frames, the effective length factor k shall be
taken as one of the following values, whichever is smaller
[Illustration 0506.5.2.7] Effective length factor of compressive members
Where Ψ A and Ψ B are the values of Ψ at the two ends of the column. And Ψ min is the
smaller of the two values, Ψ A and Ψ B.
The values may be taken.
For compressive members in a sway frame, the effective length factor may be taken as.
A) restrained at both ends
Where, Ψm is the average of ΨA and ΨB of the Ψ values.
B) For compressive members restrained at one end and hinged at the other end
k =2.0+0.3Ψ (0506.5.6)
where, Ψ is the value at the restrained end.
0506.5.3 Magnified moments for compressive members in nonsway frames
0506.5.3.1 Effective length
For compressive members in nonsway frames, the effective length factor k shall be taken
as 1.0, unless analysis shows that a lower value is justified. k
The calculation of K shall be based on the Ec and I values used in 0506.5.2.1.
0506.5.3.2 Slenderness
In nonsway frames it shall be permitted to ingnore slenderness effects for compression
members that satisfy:
where, the right term [34 – 12(M1/M2)]shall not be taken greater than 40.
The term M1/M2 is positive (+) if the member is bent in single curvature, and negative(-) if
the member is bent in double curvature.
0506.5.3.3 Factored magnified moment
Compressive members shall be designed for the factored axial load Pu and the moment
amplified for the effects of the memeber curvature Mc.
Mc＝ δ ns M2 (0506.5.8)
where,
(1) In Eq. (0506.5.9) Pc can be calculated according to the Eq.(0506.5.10).
(2) EI in Eq.(0506.5.10)can be calculated according to the Eq.(0506.5.11) or Eq.

(0506.5.12)
(0506.5.11)
where, βd in nonsway frames can be calculated as follows.

Maximum Coefficient for Axial Fixed Load
β d= Total Coefficient for Axial Load
(0506.5.13)
Besides, βd in sway frames can be calculated as defined in 0506.1.2.

(3) For members without transverse loads between supports, Cm shall be taken as the
following Eq.(0506.5.9).
where, M1/M2 is positive (+) if the column is bent in single curvature. For members with
transverse loads between supports, Cm shall be taken as 1.0.
(4) The factored moment M2 in Eq. (0506.5.8) shall not be taken less than:
where, 15 and h are in mm. However,for members for which M 2,min exceeds M2, the value
of Cm in Eq.(0506.5.14) shall either be taken equal to 1.0, or shall be based on the ratio of
the computed end moments M1 and M2.
0506.5.4 Magnified moments for sway frames of compressive members
0506.5.4.1 Effective length factor
For compressive members in sway frames, the effective length factor k shall be taken as
1.0, unless analysis shows that a lower value is justified. The calculation of K shall be
based on the Ec and I values used in 0506.5.2.1
0506.5.4.2 Slenderness
For compressive members not braced against sidesway, it shall be permitted to neglect the
effects of slenderness when klu/r is less than 22.
0506.5.4.3 Factored magnified moment
Compressive members shall be designed for the factored axial load Pu and the moment
amplified for the effects of the memeber curvature M1 and M2. However, if it meets
0506.5.4.5, magnified moment Mc using M1 and M2 can be calculated by Eq.(0506.5.17).
M1＝ M1ns＋δ sM1s
M2＝ M2ns＋δ sM2s (0506.5.17)
where, δ sM1s and δ sM2s shall be computed according to 0506.5.4.4.
0506.5.4.4 Calculation of δ sMs
δ sMs shall be calculated as the following provisions.
(1) The magnified sway moments δ sMs shall be taken as the column end moments
calculated using a second-order elastic analysis based on the member stiffness given in
0506.5.2.1.
(2) Alternatively to method in (1), it shall be permitted to calculate as in Eq.(0506.5.18).
If δs calculated in this way exceeds1.5,δ sMs shall be calculated using (1) or (3).
(3) δ sMs can be calculated as the following methods.
where, ∑Pu is the summation for all the vertical loads in a story,∑Pc is the summation for
all sway resisting columns Pc in a story. Pc is calculated using Eq.0506.5.4.1using k Eq.
Eq.(0506.5.11)and EI from Eq.(0506.5.12) or Eq.(0506.5.10).
0506.5.4.5 Factored axial load and magnified moments
If an individual compressive member has satisfied Eq.(0506.5.20), it shall be designed for
the factored axial load Pu and the moment Mc in 0506.5.3.3.
M1 and M2 are computed in accordance with 0506.5.4.3，βd is defined for the load
combination under consideration. And k as defined in 0506.5.2.7 and 0506.5.3.1.
0506.5.4.6 Strength and stability
In addition to load cases involving lateral loads, the strength and stability of the structure
as a whole under factored gravity loads shall be considered.
(1) When δ sMs is computed from0506.5.4.4(1), the ratio for 1.2 dead load and 1.6 live load
plus lateral load applied to the structural 2nd Order Lateral Distortion shall not exceed
2.5 1st Order Lateral Distortion
(2) When δ sMs is computed according to 0506.5.4.4(2), the value of Q computed

using ∑Pu for 1.2 dead load plus 1.6 live load shall not exceed 0.06
(3) When δ sMs is computed from 0506.5.4.4(3), δs computed
using ∑Pu and ∑PC corresponding to the factored dead load and live loads shall be positive
and shall not exceed2.5
In cases (1), (2) and (3) above, βd shall be taken as the ratio of the maximum factored
sustained axial load to the maximum factored axial load.
0506.5.4.7 Flexural members of sway frames
In sway frames, flexural members shall be designed for the total magnified end moments
of the compression members at the joint.
0506.6 Compressive member torsion of two-axial torsional moment
(1) Flexural moment of compressive members occurring two-axial torsional moment due
to lateral load in two axial directions, unequilibrium load of span adjacency and so on,
compressive member of 2 axial torsion shall be designed.
(2) Eccentricity distance of compressive members shall be taken from center to point of
axial force.
(3) For design of compressive members of two-axial force, using applicable equilibrium
and distorsion factor by approximate design method based on the facts and records of
many tests.
0506.7 Compressive members supporting slab system
0506.7.1 Compressive members supporting slab
Axially loaded members supporting a slab system in accordance with 0510.1.1, shall be
designed as provided in this chapter and requirements of 0510.
0506.7.2 Transmission of column loads through floor system
(1) When the specified compressive strength of concrete in a column is greater than 1.4
times that specified for a floor system, transmission of load through the floor system shall
be provided by one of the three methods from (2) to (4). But when it is less than 1.4 times,
there is no need to take special measures.
(2) Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at the
column location. Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 600mm into the slab
from face of column. Column concrete shall be rightly placed and well integrated with
floor concrete.
(3) Strength of a column through a floor system shall be based on the lower value of
concrete strength with vertical and spirals as required.
(4) For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of approximately equal
depth or by slabs, it shall be permitted to base strength of the column on an assumed
concrete strength in the column joint equal to 75% of column concrete strength plus 35%
of floor concrete strength. In that case, the ratio of column concrete strength shall not be
taken greater than 2.5 times of floor concrete strength for design.
0506.8 Bearing strength
(1) Design bearing strength of concrete shall not exceed φ (0.85 fck √A2/A1 A1) . But
when the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, then the design
bearing strength of the loaded area, shall be permitted to be multiplied by. √A2/A1, but not
more than 2.
(2) This section does no apply to post-tensioning anchorages.
0507 Shear and torsion
0507.1 General
(1) Provisions in this section apply for shear and torsion design of reinforcement
concrete and prestressed concrete members.
(2) For torsion equilibrium is required, and when exceeds specified minimum factored
torsion moment, members shall be designed to resist torsion moment.
(3) Provisions about shear-friction in 0507.7 are to be applied where it is appropriate to
consider shear transfer across a given plane. The plane includes an existing or potential
crack, an interface between dissimilar materials, or an interface between two concretes
cast at different times.
0507.2 Design principles of shear
0507.2.1 Shear strength
(1) Except for members designed in accordance with Strut-and-tie models, design of
cross sections subject to shear shall be based on Eq. (0507.2.1)
Vu ≤ φ Vn (0507.2.1)
where，Vu is the factored shear force at the section considered, and Vn . is norminal shear
strength computed by Eq.(05072.2).
Vn＝ Vc＋Vs (0507.2.2)
where，Vc is norminal shear strength provided by concrete in accordance with 0507.3.1
or 0507.3.2，and Vs is norminal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in

accordance with 0507.4.
(2) In determining shear strength Vn, the effect of any openings in members shall be
considered.
(3) In determining shear strength Vc, whenever applicable, effects of axial tension due to
creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered and effects of inclined
flexural compressive in variable depth members shall be permitted to be included.
(4) The values of √fck used in this chapter shall not exceed 8.4MPa. However, values of
√fck greater than 8.4MPa shall be permitted in computing Vc, Vci and Vcw for reinforced or
prestressed concrete beams and concrete joist construction having minimum web
reinforcement in accordance with 0507.4.3.(3)，0507.4.3.(4).
(5) Computation of maximum factored shear force Vu at supports in accordance with
or shall be permitted when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
– support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the end
regions of member
– Loads are applied at or near the top of the member
– No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of critical section
defined in or
For non prestressed members, sections located less than a distance d from face of
support shall be permitted to be designed for the same shear Vu as that computed at a
distanced.
For prestressed members, sections located less than a distance 0.5h from face of
support shall be permitted to be designed for the same shear Vu as that computed at a
distance 0.5h.
(6) For deep beams, brackets and corbels, walls, and slabs and footings, the special
provision of 0507.8 through 0507.12 shall apply.
0507.2.2 Light weight concrete
(1) Provisions for shear and torsion strength apply to normal weight concrete. When light
weight aggregate concrete is used, one of the following (2) and (3) modifications shall
apply to √fck throughout 0507, except 0507.4.2(3) , 0507.4.4(9) , 0507.6.1(1) ,
0507.12.3(3) and 0507.12.4(9). (2) when fsp is specified and concrete is proportioned in
accordance with 0502.3.2, 1.76fsp shall be substituted for√fck, but the value of 1.76fsp shall
not exceed√fck.
(3) when is not specified, all values of √fck shall be multiplied
by 0.75 for all-light weight concrete and 0.85 for sand-light-weight concrete. Linear
interpolation shall be permitted when partial sand replacement is used.
0507.3 Shear strength provided by concrete
0507.3.1 Non prestressed members
(1) Shear strength Vc shall be computed by provisions of Eq. 0507.3.1 and
Eq.(0507.3.2), unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with (2).
For members subject to shear and flexure only, compute in accordance with
Eq.0507.3.1.
For members subject to axial compression, compute in accordance with Eq.0507.3.2.
where, Nu/Ag shall be expressed in N/mm2.

For members subject to significant axial tension, shear reinforcement shall be
designed to carry total shear unless a more detailed analysis is made using Eq.(0507.3.6)
of 0507.3.1(2).
(2) Shear strength Vc shall be permitted to be computed by the more detailed calculation
of Eq. (0507.3.3) through Eq.(0507.3.6).
For members subject to shear and flexure only, calculate using Eq.(0507.3.3).
But Vc shall not greater than 0.29 √fckbwd. Quantity Vud/Mu shall not be taken greater than
1.0 in computing Vc by Eq.(0507.3.3). where Mu is factored moment occuring
simultaneously with Vu at section considered.
For members subject to axial compression, it shall be permitted to compute Vc using
Eq.(0507.3.3) with Mm substituted for Mu and Vud/Mu not then limited to1.0.
However, Vc shall not be taken greater than the following value.

where，quantity Nu/Ag shall be expressed in N/mm2. When Mm as computed by
Eq.(0507.3.4) is negative(—), Vc shall be computed by Eq.(0507.3.5).
For members subject to significant axial tension, calculation shall conEq. to Eq.
(0507.3.6).
where，Nu is negative(—) for tension，and Nu/Ag shall be expressed in N/mm2.

(3) For circular members, the area used to compute Vc shall be taken as the product of
the diameter and effective depth of the concrete section. It shall be permitted to take the
effective depth as
0.8 times the diameter of the concrete section.
0507.3.2 prestressed concrete members
(1) For shear strength provided by concrete, use one of the methods in (2) and (3).
However, the distance from extreme compressive fiber to centroid of prestressd and
nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement, need not be taken less than 0.8h.
(2) For members with effective prestressed force not less than 40% of the tensile
strength of flexural reinforcement, Vc shall be calculated by using Eq. (0507.3.7), unless
a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with 0507.3.2.2
but Vc shall be taken greater than (√fck/6)bwd) and less than，(5√fck/12)bwd)，and shall be
taken less than values in 0507.3.2.4 or 0507.3.2.5. In the Eq., Vud/Mu shall not be taken
greater than 1.0, where Mu is factored moment occurring simultaneously with Vu at the
section considered. where, d shall be taken more than 0.8h.
(3) Shear strength Vc Shall be computed according to Eq.(0507.3.8)and Eq.(0507.3.10).

where Vc shall be the lesser of Vci and Vcw.
Shear strength Vci shall be computed according to the following Eq.
where，d shall be taken more than 0.8h ，M cre Shall be computed according to
Eq.(0507.3.9).
Where values of M max and Vi shall be computed from the load combination causing
maximum moment to occur at the section，Vci shall be taken more than 0.14 √fckbwd .
Shear strength Vcw shall be computed according to Eq. (0507.3.10).

V cw ＝ (0.29 √f ck ＋ 0.3f pc )b w d＋V p (0507.3.10)
where, d need not be taken less than 0.8h. Alternatively, Vcw shall be computed as the
shear force corresponding to dead load plus live load that results in a principal tensile
stress of √fck/3 at the centroidal axis of member, or at the intersection of flange and web
when the centroidal axis is in the flange. In composite members, the principal tensile
stress shall be computed using the cross section that resists live load.
(4) In the pretensioned member in which the section at a distance h/2 from face of
support is closer to the end of member than the transfer length of the prestressing steel,
the reduced prestress shall be considered when computing Vcw . And the value of Vcw
shall also be taken as the maximum limit for Eq.(0507.3.7). The prestressed force shall
be assumed to vary linearly from zero at end of the prestressed steel, to a maximum at a
distance from end of the prestressed steel equal to the transfer length, assumed to be 50
diameters for stand and 100 diameters for single wire.
(5) In a pretensioned member where bonding of some tendons does not extend to the
end of member, a reduced prestress shall be considered when computing Vc in
accordance with (1) or (2). The value of Vcw calculated using the reduced prestress shall
also be taken as the maximum limit for Eq. (0507.3.7). The prestressed force due to
tendons for which bonding does not extend to the end of member shall be assumed to
vary linearly from zero at the point at which bonding commence to a maximum at a
distance from this point equal to the transfer length, assumed to be 50 diameters for
stand and 100 diameters for single wire.
0507.4 Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
0507.4.1 Types of shear reinforcement
(1) Shear reinforcement consisting of the following shall be permitted:
Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member
Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular to axis of member
Spirals, circular ties, or hoops.
(2) Members of reinforcement concrete shall be permitted to consist of:
Stirrups making an angle of 45° or more with longitudinal tensile reinforcement
Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30° or more with
the longitudinal tensile reinforcement
Combination of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.
(3) Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 400MPa, except that
the design yield strength of welded deEq.ed wire fabric shall not exceed 550MPa.
(4) When provisions are applied for prestressed members, the effective depth shall be
the distance from extreme compressive fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement.
The value shall be greater than 0.8h.
(5) Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a
distance d from extreme compressive fiber and shall be anchored according to 0508.5.4.
0507.4.2 Spacing limits for shear reinforcement
(1) Spacing of shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not
exceed d/2 in nonprestressed members or 0.75h in prestressed members, nor 600mm.
(2) Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be so spaced that every
45° line, extending toward the reaction from mid-depth of member 0.5d to longitudinal
tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of shear reinforcement.
(3) When V s exceeds (√fck/3)bwd , maximum spacings given in (1) and (2) shall be
reduced by one-half.
0507.4.3 Minimum shear reinforcement
(1) A minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be provided in all reinforced concrete
flexural members (prestressed and nonprestressed) where factored shear force Vu exceeds
1/2 the shear strength provided by concrete φVc , except the following:
Slabs and footings
Concrete joist construction defined by 0503.4.9
Beams with total depth not greater than 250mm, for I , T beam,
2.5 times thickness of flange, or 1/2 the width of web, whichever is greater.
plate member of abutment, walls, wing wall, retaining wall, cloded conduit and the
like
(2) Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of 0507.4.3.1shall not apply if shown
by test that required nominal flexural and shear strengths can be developed when shear
reinforcement is omitted.
(3) (1) Where shear reinforcement is required by (1), or for strength and where 0507.5.1
allows torsion to be neglected, the minimum area of shear reinforcement for prestressed
(except as provided in(4)) and nonprestressed members shall be computed by
Eq.0507.4.1.
but the minimum area of shear reinforcement shall not be less than 0.35bws/fyt. where ,
bw and s are in mm.
(4) For prestressed members with an effective prestress force not less than 40% of the
tensile strength of the flexural reinforcement, the area of shear reinforcement shall not
be less than the smaller value from Eq.0507.4.1 or Eq.(0507.4.2) .
0507.4.4 Design of shear reinforcement

(1) Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength φVc, shear reinforcement shall
be provided to satisfy Eq. (0507.2.1) and Eq.(0507.2.2) , where shear strength Vs shall
be computed in accordance with through (2) to (9).
(2) When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used Vs shall be
computed according to the following Eq.(0507.4.3).
where，Av is the area of shear reinforcement within a distance s.

(3) When circular ties, hoops, or spirals are used as shear reinforcement, Vs shall be
computed using Eq.(0507.4.3) , where d shall be taken as the effective depth defined in
0507.3.1(3). Av shall be taken as 2 times the area of the bar in a circular tie, hoop, or
spiral at a spacing s, and fyt is the specified yield strength of circular tie, hoop, or spiral
reinforcement
(4) When inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement, shear strength Vs shall be
computed according to Eq.(0507.4.4).
where, a is angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis of member, and s is
spacing measured in a direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement.
(5) When shear reinforcement Vs consists of a single flexural rebar or a single group of
parallel rebars, all bent up at the same distance from the support, it shall be computed
according to Eq.(0507.4.5).
Vs＝ Avfytsinα(0507.4.5)
But, Vs shall not be greater than 0.257√fckbwd , and a is the angle between flexural
reinforcement and longitudinal axis of member.
(6) When shear reinforcement Vs consists of a series of parallel bent-up rebars or groups
of parallel bent-up rebars at different distances from the support, shear strength Vs shall
be computed according to Eq.(0507.4.4).
(7) Only the center 3/4 of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent rebar shall be
considered effective for shear reinforcement.
(8) Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the same
portion of a member, shear strength Vs shall be computed as the sum of the Vs values
computed for the various types.
(9) shear strength Vs shall not be taken greater than (2√fck/3bwd) .
0507.5 Design for torsion
Design for torsion shall conEq. with the provisions of 0507.5.1to 0507.5.2, 0507.6.1to
0507.6.4 and 0507.6.5.
0507.5.1 The situation when torsion effects not need to be considered
It shall be permitted to neglect torsion effects meeting the following situation.
(1) For nonprestressed members：
(2) For prestressed members:
(3) For nonprestressed members subjected to an axial tensile or compressive force:

For members cast monolithically with a slab, the over-hanging flange width used in
computing Acp and Pcpshall conEq. to 0510.3.1(4). For a hollow section, Ag shall be used
in place of Acp , and the outer boundaries of the section shall conEq. with provisions.
(4) For isolated members with flanges and for members cast monolithically with a slab,
the overhanging flange width used in computed Acp and Pcp shall conEq. to 0510.3.1 (4),
except that the overhanging flange shall be neglected in cases where the parameter
A2cp/Pcp calculated for a beam with flanges is less than that computed for the same beam
ignoring the flanges.
0507.5.2 Calculation of factored torsional moment
(1) If the factored torsional moment Tu in a member is required to maintain equilibrium
and exceeds the minimum value given in 0507.5.1, the member shall be designed
according to0507.6.
(2) In a statically indeterminate structure where reduction of the torsional moment in a
member can occur due to redistribution of internal forces upon cracking, the maximum
factored torsional moment Tu shall be permitted to be reduced to the values given in the
following items:
For nonprestressed members, at the sections described in(4)：
For prestressed members, at the sections described in 0507.5.2.5：
For nonprestressed members subjected to an axial tensile or compressive force:
In ， and , the correspondingly redistributed bending moments and shears in the

adjoining members shall be used in the design of these members. For hollow sections,
Acp shall not be replaced with Ag in (2).
(3) Unless determined by a more exact analysis, it shall be permitted to take the
torsional loading from a slab as uniEq.ly distributed along the member.
(4) In nonprestressed members, sections located less than a distance d from the face of a
support shall be designed for not less than the torsion Tu computed at a distance d. If a
concentrated torque occurs within this distance d the critical section for design shall be
at the face of the support.
(5) In prestressed members, sections located less than a distance h/2 from the face of a
support shall be designed for not less than the torsion Tu computed at a distance h/2. If a
concentrated torque occurs within this distance h/2, the critical section for design shall
be at the face of the support.
0507.6 Torsional moment strength and details of torsional reinforcement
0507.6.1 Torsional moment strength
(1) The cross-sectional dimensions of torsional moment shall be computed according to
Eq.(0507.6.1) and Eq.(0507.6.2).
For solid sections : Although the shear stress occured due to shear on the whole
cross-section, the stress due to torsional moment shall be assumed to resist according to
wall thickness and satisfy the Eq.(0507.6.1).
(0507.6.1)
For hollow sections: The shear stress occured due to shear and torsion shall satisfy
the following items.
(2) If the wall thickness varies around the perimeter of a hollow section, Eq.(0507.6.2)
shall be evaluated at the location where the left-hand side of Eq.(0507.6.2) is a
maximum.
(3) If the wall thickness is less than Aoh/Ph the second term in Eq.(0507.6.2) shall be
taken as. where, t is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at location where
the stress are being checked.
(4) Design yield strength of nonprestressed torsion reinforcement shall not exceed
400Mpa. 0507.6.2 Torsional reinforcemnt
(1) Design of members with torsional moment greater than value in 0507.5.1 shall be
determined from Eq.(0507.6.3).
Tu ≤ φ Tn(0507.6.3)
Where, in the calculation of Tn all the torque is
assumed to be resisted by stirrups and longitudinal steel with Tc=0. At the same time, the
shear resisted by concrete Vc is assumed to be unchanged.
(2) The transverse reinforcement for torsion shall be designed using Eq.(0507.6.4)
where, Ao can be equal to 0.85Aoh ; if 30° ≤θ≤ 60° , it shall be permitted to take θ equal to
45° for nonprestressed members with an effective prestress force less than 40% of the
tensile strength of the longitudinal reinforcement, and 37.5° for prestressed members
with an effective prestress force not less than 40% of the tensile strength of the
longitudinal reinforcement.
(3) The addititional longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall not be less
than the value of Eq.(0507.6.5)
where, θ shall be the same value used in Eq.(0507.6.4)，and At /s taken as the amount
computed from Eq.(0507.6.4) shall not apply for the minimum torsion reinforcement
provisions in 0507.6.4(2) or 0507.6.4(3).
(4) Reinforcement required for torsion shall be added to that required for the shear,
moment, and axial force that act in combination with the torsion. The most restrictive
requirements for reinforcement spacing and placement shall be met.
(5) It shall be permitted to reduce the area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the
flexural compressive zone by an amount equal to Mu/(0.9dfy), where, Mu is the factored
moment acting at the section in combination with Tu. But the reinforcement provided
shall not be less than that required by 0507.6.4(3) or 0507.6.4(5).
(6) Prestressed beams shall meet the following requirements.
The total longitudinal reinforcement including prestressed steel at each section shall
resist the factored bending moment Mu at that section plus an additional concentric
longitudinal tensile force Tu equal to Alfy, based on the factored torsion at that section.
The spacing of the longitudinal reinforcement including tendons shall satisfy the
requirements in 0507.6.4(5).
(7) In prestressed beams, it shall be permitted to reduce the area of longitudinal
torsional reinforcement on the side of the member in compression due to flexure below
that required by (5) in (6)
0507.6.3 Details of torsional reinforcement
0507.6.3.1 Torsion reinforcement
Torsional reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars or tendons and one or more of
the following:
(1) Closed stirrups or closed ties, perpendicular to the axis of the member
(2) A closed cage of welded wire fabric with transverse wires perpendicular to the axis
of the member
(3) In nonprestressed beams, spiral reinforcement.
0507.6.3.2 Anchorage of transverse torsional reinforcement
Transverse torsional reinforcement shall be anchored by one of the following methods.
(1) A 135° standard hook around a longitudinal bar
(2) According to (1), (2),(3) of 0508.5.4.2, in regions where the concrete surrounding
the anchorage is restrained against spalling by a flange or slab or similar member.
0507.6.3.3 Anchorage of longitudinal torsion reinforcement
Longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall be anchored at both ends.
0507.6.3.4 Hollow sections
For hollow sections in torsion, the distance from the centerline of the tranverse torsional
reinforcement to the inside face of the wall of the hollow section shall not be less than
0.5 Aoh/Ph. 0507.6.4 0507.6.4 Minimum torsion reinforcement and spacing
(1) A minimum area of torsion reinforcement shall be provided in all regions where the
factored torsional moment Tu exceeds the values specified in0507.5.1.
(2) Where torsional reinforcement is required by (1), the minimum area of transverse
closed stirrups shall be computed by Eq.(0507.6.6).
But shall not be greater than 0.35bws/fyt.

(3) Where torsional reinforcement is required by (1), the minimum area of longitudinal
torsional reinforcement shall be computed by Eq.(0507.6.7).
where，At/s shall not be taken less than 0.175bw/fyt.
(4) The spacing of transverse torsion reinforcement shall not exceed the smaller of Ph/8
or 300mm.
(5) The longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be distributed around the
perimeter of the closed stirrups with a maximum spacing of 300mm. The longitudinal
bars or tendons shall be inside the stirrups. There shall be at least one longitudinal bar or
tendon in each corner of the stirrups. Bars shall have a diameter at least 1/24 times the
stirrups spacing, but not less than a D10 bar.
(6) Torsion reinforcement shall be provided for a distance of at least (bt+d) beyond the
point theoretically required.
0507.6.5 Alternative design for torsion
For torsion design of solid sections within the scope of this code with an aspect ratio,
h/bt≥3, it shall be permitted to use another procedure, the adequacy of which has been
shown by analysis and substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
However , sections 0507.6.3 and 0507.6.4 (4), (5), (6) shall apply.
0507.7 Shear-friction
(1) Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer shall be based on Eq.(0507.2.1),
where Vn is calculated in accordance with (2), (3) or 0507.7.2.
(2) A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered. The required
area of shear-friction reinforcement Avf across the shear plane shall be designed
according to 0507.7.2. Besides, any other shear transfer design methods that result in
prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests shall
also apply.
(3) Provisions of 0507.7.2 through 0507.7.3shall apply for all calculations of shear
transfer strength.
0507.7.2 Shear-friction design method
(1) Where shear-friction reinforcement is perpendicular to the shear plane,Vn shall be
computed by Eq.(0507.7.1).
Vn＝ Avffyμ (0507.7.1)
where µ is coefficient of friction in accordance with 0507.7.2.3.
(2) Where shear-friction reinforcement is inclined to the shear plane, such that the shear
force produces tension in shear-friction reinforcement,
Vn shall be computed by Eq. (0507.7.2).
where, af is angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane.

(3) The coefficient of friction µ in Eq.(0507.7.1) and Eq.(0507.7.2) shall be taken as
follows.
Concrete placed monolithically 1.4λ
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface intentionally roughened as
specified in0507.7.3.1 1.0λ
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally roughened 0.6λ
Concrete anchored to as-rolled structural steel by headed studs or by reinforcing bars
(see0507.7.3.(2)) 0.7λ
where, equals to 1.0 for normal weight concrete, and 0.85 for sand light weight concrete
and 0.75 for all light weight concrete. When only sand for part of the concrete has been
substituted, then the linear interpolation method may apply.
(4) Shear strength Vn shall not exceed the smallest of 0.2fckAc and 5.6 Ac (unit: N), where
Ac is area of concrete section resisting shear transfer.
(5) The resisting strength value used for design of shear-friction reinforcement shall not
exceed 400MPa.
(6) Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by additional reinforcement.
Permanent net compression across shear plane shall be permitted to be taken as additive
to Avffy , the force in the shear-friction reinforcement, when calculating required Avf.
(7) Shear-friction reinforcement shall be appropriately placed along the shear plane and
shall be anchored to develop yield strength on both sides by embedment, hook, or
welding to special devices.
0507.7.3 Preparation of interface
(1) For the purpose of 0507.6, when concrete is placed against previously hardened
concrete, the interface for shear transfer shall be clean and free of laitance. If µ is
assumed equal to 1.0λ , interface shall be roughened to a full amplitude of approximately
6mm. (where, λ shall refer provisions in 0507.7.2(3))
(2) When shear is transferred between roled steel and concrete using headed studs or
welded re inforceing bars, steel shall be clean and free of paint..
0507.8 Shear design of deep beams
(1) The provisions of 0507.8 shall apply to members with ln not exceeding four times
the overall member depth or regions of beams with concentrated loads within twice the
member depth from the support that are loaded on one face and supported on the
opposite face so that compression struts can develop between the loads and supports.
See also 0508.5.1(5).
(2) Deep beams shall be designed using either nonlinear analysis as permitted in
0506.6.3(4), or stirrup-tie model.
(3) Vn for deep beams shall not exceed (5 √fck/6)bwd.
0507.8.2 Minimum Reinforcement Amount Calculation and Placement
(1) The area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to the flexural tension reinforcement,
Av shall not be less than 0.0025bws, and s shall not exceed the smaller of d/5 and 300mm.
(2) The area of shear reinforcement parallel to the flexural tension reinforcement, Avh
shall not be less than 00015bwsh, and s shall not exceed the smaller of d/5 and 300mm.
(3) It shall be permitted to provide reinforcement satisfying stirrup-tie model instead of
the minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement specified in 0507.8.2(1), 0507.8.2(2).
0507.9 Special provisions for brackets and corbels
(1) Specifications in 0507.9 are av/d not greater than 1,and subject to horizontal tensile
force for Nuc not larger than Vu. Effective depth d shall be determined at the face of the
support.
(2) Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be less than 1/2 d.
(3) Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be less than 0.5d.
Section at face of support and strength calculations
(1) Section at face of support shall be designed to resist simultaneously a shear Vu, a
moment [Vuav＋Nuc(h–d)], and a factored horzontal tensile force Nuc.
(2) In all design calculations in accordance with 0507.9, φ
shall be taken equal to factored strength reduction.
(3) Design of shear-friction reinforcement Avf to resist shear Vus shall be in accordance
with 0507.6.
For normal weight concrete, shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than 0.2
fckbwd nor 5.6 bwd, in N.
For all-lightweight or sand-lightweight concrete, shear strength Vn shall not be taken
greater than( 0.2–0.07av/d) ×fckbwd nor(5.6–2.0av/d)bwd, in N.
(4) Reinforcement Af to resist moment [Vuav＋Nuc(h－d)] shall be computed in
accordance with 0506.2 and 0506.3.
(5) Reinforcement An to resist tensile force Nuc shall be determined from Nuc≤ φ Anfy.
Factored tensile force Nuc shall not be taken less than 0.2Vu unless special provisions are
made to avoid tensile force. Factored tensile force Nuc shall be regarded as a live load
even when tension results from creep, shrinkage, or temperature change.
(6) Area of primary tension reinforcement As shall be made equal to the greater of
(Af＋An) or (2Avf/3＋An) .
0507.9.3 Details of reinforcement
(1) Closed stirrups or ties parallel to As, with a total area Ah not less than 0.5(As－An),
shall be uniEq.ly distributed within two-thirds of the effective depth adjacent to As..
(2) Ratio A s/bd shall not be less than 0.04×(fck/fy).
(3) At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension reinforcement As shall be
anchored by one of the following:
By a structural weld to a transverse bar of at least equal size; weld to be designed to
develop specified yield strength fy of As.
By bending primary tension bars As back to Eq. a horizontal loop.
Or by some other means of positive anchorage.
(4) Bearing area of load on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight portion of
primary tension bars As, nor project beyond interior face of transverse anchor bar (if one
is provided).
0507.10 Shear design for walls
0507.10.1 General of design
(1) Design for horizontal in-plane shear force in a wall shall be in accordance with
0507.10. But design for shear forces perpendicular to face of wall shall be in accordance
with provisions for slabs in 0507.12. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to design walls
with a height not exceeding two times the length of the wall for horizontal shear forces
in accordance with stirrups-ties model and 0507.10.3(2) through 1 0507.10.3(5).
(2) Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall be based on
Eq.(0507.2.1) and Eq.(0507.2.2), where shear strength Vc shall be in accordance with
0507.10.2.(1) or 0507.10.2.(2) and shear strength Vs shall be in accordance with
0507.10.2.(5).
(3) For design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall, d shall be taken equal to
0.8lw. A larger value of d, equal to the distance from extreme compressive fiber to center
of force of all reinforcement in tension, shall be permitted to be used when determined
by a strain compatibility analysis.
0507.10.2 Shear strength calculation
(1) Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with (2), shear strength V c
shall not be taken greater than (√fck/6)hd ) for walls subject to Nu in compression, or V c
shall not be taken greater than the value given in Eq.(0507.3.6) .
(2) Shear strength V c shall be permitted to be the lesser of the values computed from
Eq.(0507.10.1) and Eq.(0507.10.2).
or
where Nu is negative for tension..
when is negative(-), Eq.(0507.10.2) shall not apply.

(3) Shear strength Vn at any horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall not be
taken greater than (5 √fck/6)hd.
(4) Sections located closer to wall base than a distance lw/2 or one-half the wall height,
which ever is less, It shall be permitted to be designed for the same V c as that computed
at a distance lw/2 or one-half the height.
(5) Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength φVc, horizontal shear
reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy (0507. 2.1) and
(0507.2.2), where shear strength Vs shall be computed by Eq.(0507.10.3).
Where Avh is area of horizontal shear reinforcement within a distance sh and distance d is
in accordance with 0507.10.1(3). Vertical shear reinforcement shall be provided in
accordance with 0507.10.3(4). 0507.10.3 Minimum re inforcement provided and placed
(1) When factored shear force Vu is less than φVc/2, reinforcement shall be provided in
accordance with (2) to (5) or in accordance with 0511. when Vu exceeds φVc/2, wall
reinforcement for resisting shear shall be provided in accordance with (2) to (5).
(2) Ratio Ph of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of vertical
section shall not be less than 0.0025 .
(3) Spacing of horizontal shear reinforcement sh shall not exceed lw/5 ，3h nor 450mm .
(4) Ratio Pl of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of horizontal
section shll not be less than (0507.10.4)，nor 0.0025 .
but need not be greater than the required horizontal shear reinforcement.
(5) Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement Sv shall not exceed Lw/3, nor 450mm.
0507.11 Transfer of moments to columns
(1) When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of
moment at connections of framing elements to columns, the shear resulting from
moment transfer shall be considered in the design of lateral reinforcement in the
columns.
(2) Except for connections not part of a primary seismic load-resisting system that are
restrained on four sides by beams or slabs of approximately equal depth, connections
shall have lateral reinforcement not less than that required by (0507.4.1). within the
column for a depth not less than that of the deepest connection of framing elements to
the columns.
0507.12. Special provisions for slabs and footings
0507.12.1 Shear design for cross section
(1) The shear strength of slabs and footings in the vicinity of columns, concentrated
loads, or reactions is governed by the more severe of two conditions:
(2) Beam action where each critical section to be investigated extends in a plane across
the entire width. For beam action the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance
with0507.2 through 0507.4.
(3) For two-way action the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with
0507.12.2 through 0507.13. Two-way action where each of the critical sections to be
investigated shall be located so that its perimeter bo is a minimum but need not approach
closer than d/2 to edges or corners of columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas; or
changes in slab thickness such as edges of capitals or drop panels.
(4) For square or rectangular columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas, the critical
sections with four straight sides shall be permitted.
0507.12.2 Shear strength of two-way action
(1) The design of a slab or footing for two-way action is based on (0507.2.1) and
(0507.2.2). V c shall be computed in accordance with (2), (3), or 0507.12.3(2). Vs shall be
computed in accordance with 0507.12.3. For slabs with shearheads, Vn shall be in
accordance with 0507.12.4. When moment is transferred between a slab and a column,
0507.13 shall apply.
(2) For nonprestressed slabs and footings, V； shall be the smallest of (0507.12.1)，
(0507.12.2) and (0507.12.3).
where βc is the ratio of long side to short side of the column, concentrated load or
reaction area， b o is perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings defined in
0507.12.1.(3). And as is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge columns, 20 for corner
columns.
(3) At columns of two-way prestressed slabs and footings that meet the requirements of
(0507.12.4).
where βp is smaller of 0.29 or (α sd/bo＋1.5)/12，bo is perimeter of critical section
defined in 0507.12.1(3)，fpc is the average value of fpc for the two directions, and Vp is
the vertical component of all effective prestress force crossing the critical section.
(4) Vc shall be permitted to be computed by (0507.12.4) if the following ，， are
satisfied. otherwise, (2) shall apply.
No portion of the column cross section shall be closer to a discontinuous edge than
four times the slab thickness，
fck in (0507.12.4) shall not be taken greater than 35MPa ，
and fcp in each direction shall not be less than 0.88MPa ，nor be taken greater than
3.5MPa.
0507.12.3 Shear reinforcement
(1) Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires and single- or multiple-leg stirrups
shall be permitted in slabs and footings with an effective depth, 4, greater than or equal
to 150mm , but not less than 16 times the shear reinforcement rebar diameter. Shear
reinforcement shall be in accordance with (2) through (5).
(2) Vn shall be computed by (0507.2.2), where Vc shall not be taken greater than 1/6
(√fck)bod，and the strength of shear reinforcement Vs shall be calculated in accordance
with 0507.4. The area of shear reinforcement Av used in (0507.4.3) is the cross-sectional
area of all legs of reinforcement on one peripheral line that is geometrically similar to
the perimeter of the column section.
(3) Vn shall not be taken greater than 1/2(√fck)bod. where bo is perimeter of critical
section defined in 0507.12.1(3).
(4) The distance between the column face and the first line of stirrup legs that surround
the column shall not exceed d/2. The spacing between adjacent stirrup legs in the first
line of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 2d measured in a direction parallel to the
column face. The spacing between successive lines of shear reinforcement that surround
the column shall not exceed d/2 measured in a direction perpendicular to the column
face.
(5) Slab shear reinforcement shall satisfy the anchorage requirements of 0508.5 and
shall engage the longitudinal flexural reinforcement in the direction being considered.
0507.12.4 Shearhead Reinforcement Design
(1) Shear reinforcement consisting of structural steel H or C-shaped sections shall be
permitted in slabs. The provisions of (2) through (10) shall apply where shear due to
gravity load is transferred at interior column supports. where moment is transferred to
columns, 0507.13.2(3)
shall apply.
(2) Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes fabricated by welding with a full
penetration weld into identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be
interrupted within the column section.
(3) A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 times the web thickness of the steel shape.
(4) The ends of each shearhead arm shall be permitted to be cut at angles not less than
30-degrees with the horizontal, provided the plastic moment strength of the remaining
tapered section is adequate to resist the shear force attributed to that arm of the
shearhead.
(5) All compressive flanges of steel shapes shall not be located within 0.3d of
compressive surface of slab.
(6) The ratio av between the flexural stiffness of each shearhead arm and that of the
surrounding composite cracked slab section of width (c2+d) shall not be less than 0.15.
(7) Plastic moment strength Mp, required for each arm of the shearhead. shall be
computed by Eq. (050712.5).
V u c 1
M p=
2φη [h v+
α v (l v-
2 )] (0507.12.5)
where, φ is for tension-controlled members, n is number of shearhead arms and Iv is
minimum length of each shearhead arm required to comply with requirements of (8) and
(9).
(8) The critical slab section for shear shall be perpendicular to the plane of the slab and
shall cross each shearhead arm at 3/4 the distance [lv-(c1/2)] from the column face to the
end of the shearhead arm. The critical section shall be located so that its perimeter bo is a
minimum, but need not be closer than d/2.
(9) Shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than (√fck/3)bod on the critical section
defined in (8). When shearhead reinforcement is provided, Vn shall not be taken greater
than 0.59√fckbod on the critical section defined in 0507.12.1(3)
(10) Moment resistance Mv contributed to each slab column strip by a shearhead shall
not be taken greater than values computed by the following Eq. (0507.12.6)
where, φ is for tension-controlled members, n is number of shearhead arms, and lv is

length of each shearhead arm actually provided. However, Mv shall not be taken larger
than the smallest of the following values:

KBC2009 Part 1 English Version

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KBC2009 Part 1 English Version

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ministry of Land, Transport and Maritime Affairs Notification No.

The Ministry notifies the amended “Korea Building Code-Structural” as follows.

Korean Building Structures Code

Chapter 1 General Rules

0101 General Information

0101.5 Relevant Structural Criteria and Specification

0101.6 Time Limit of Review

0103 Classification of importance of buildings

0103.1 Importance (special)

0103.2 Importance (1)

0103.3 Importance (2)

0103.4 Importance (3)

0104 Structural Design

0104.1 Principles of Structural Design

0104.2.1 Types of Structure Design Methods

0104.2.2 Tolerable Stress Design Method or Tolerable Strength Design Method

0104.3.1 Structural Planning

0104.3.2 Frame Analysis and Member Design

0104.3.3 Creating Structural Drawing Documents

0104.3.4 Creating Structural Drawings

0105 Various Inspections and Testings, and Performance Validation of Structural

0106 Verification of Structural Safety

0106.1 Verification of Structural Safety in Structural Drawing Documents

0106.2 Verification of Structural Safety of Construction Drawing Documents

0106.3 Verification of Structural Safety during Construction

0106.4 Verification of Structural Safety during Maintenance

0107 Principal Structural Engineer

0107.1 Qualification of Principal Structural Engineer

0107.2 Responsibilities of Principal Structural Engineer

0107.3 Signature or Seal of Principal Structural Engineer

0201.2 Definition of Terms

0202.1 Written Approval

0202.2 Approval Records

0202.3 Declaration of Proof of Performance

0203 General Inspection

0203.1 General Information

0203.3 New Materials and Materials without Specified Size

0203.3.4 Verification in accordance with Quality Standards

0203.3.5 Verification of Accuracy and Performance

0203.3.6 Verification of Quality Management System

0203.3.6.1 Specific Standards Management by Manufacturer(s)

0203.3.6.3 Process Management

0203.3.6.5 Outsourcing Management

0203.3.6.6 Claim Management

0203.3.7 Verification of Operation of a Quality Management Organization

0203.3.9 Assessment and Post-Inspection

0203.3.10 Approval Record and Notification

0204 Special Inspection

0204.1 General Information

0204.1.1 Special Inspector

0204.2 Steel Structures

0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection

0204.2.1.1 Inspection Items

(1) Rounding or band cutters

(1) Manual arc welder

(1) Management policy and its conditions of quality

0204.2.1.3 Detailed Inspection on Connections

0204.2.1.4 High-tension Bolt Inspection

0204.2.1.5 Evaluation and Post Inspection

According to 0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection, the manufacturing plant shall submit

0204.2.1.6 Written Approval

0204.2.1.7 Approval Records

According to 0204.2.1 Manufacture Inspection, results of the due diligence shall be

0204.2.2.1 Colum Base Inspection